Sorry, your browser does not support JavaScript!
UpasanaYoga.org
Brahma Sūtra Bhāṣyam
translated by V. M. Apte (1960)

Phala Adhyāya (Chapter 4 of 4)


(Collapsing the Panels – highlights the distinct Adhikaraṇa Topics)
Last Selected:
⇦ Return Clicking ✅ below updates Last Selected.
(If Browser retains data between sessions)

Chap. 1
Samanvaya
Chap. 2
Avirodha
Chap. 3
Sādhana
Chap. 4
Phala

(Upaniṣad Śānti Mantras)

4. Phala Adhyāya

Intro Pāda 1 Pāda 2 Pāda 3 Pāda 4

Adhikaraṇas (Topics):

154. Āvṛti (4.1.1–2) 155. Ātmatvopāsanā (4.1.3) 156. Pratīka (4.1.4) 157. Brahma-dṛṭṣi (4.1.5) 158. Āditya-ādi (4.1.6) 159. Āsīna (4.1.7–10) 160. Eka-agratā (4.1.11) 161. Ā-prāyaṇa (4.1.12) 162. Tad-adhigama (4.1.13) 163. Itara-asaṃśleṣa (4.1.14) 164. Anārabdha (4.1.15) 165. Agni-hotra-ādi (4.1.16–17) 166. Vidyā-jñāna-sādhanatva-ādi (4.1.18) 167. Itara-kṣapaṇa (4.1.19)
168. Vāg (4.2.1–2) 169. Manas (4.2.3) 170. Adhyakṣa (4.2.4–6) 171. Ā-sṛty-upakrama (4.2.7) 172. Saṃsāra-vyapadeśa (4.2.8–11) 173. Pratiṣedha (4.2.12–14) 174. Vāg-ādi-laya (4.2.15) 175. Avibhāga (4.2.16) १७६. 176. Tad-okas (4.2.17) 177. Raśmi (4.2.18–19) 178. Dakṣaṇa-ayana (4.2.20–21)
179. Arcir-ādi (4.3.1) 180. Vāyu (4.3.2) 181. Taḍid (4.3.3) 182. Ātivāhika (4.3.4–6) 183. Kārya (4.3.7–14) 184. Apratīka-ālambana (4.3.15–16)
185. Sampadya-āvirbhāva (4.4.1–3) 186. Avibhāgena Dṛṣṭatva (4.4.4) 187. Brāhman (4.4.5–7) 188. Saṅkalpa (4.4.8–9) 189. Abhāva (4.4.10–14) 190. Pradīpa (4.4.15–16) 191. Jagad-vyāpāra (4.4.17–22)

Format by A.K. Aruna, 2021 ver.2.0: UpasanaYoga. If downloaded, requires installed Devanāgarī Siddhanta1.ttf font, downloadable from UpasanaYoga. If run from UpasanaYoga website, it alternatively can use online Web Font. Top button "Collapse all panels" contracts the view in which individual items can be re-expanded, or again the top button "Restore all panels" reloads page to original view.
This is V. M. Apte’s 1960 English translation of Ādi-Śaṅkara's Bhāṣyam (commentary) comprising for the students of Vedānta an excellent introduction and summary of the main topics concerning the proper textual understanding of the Upaniṣads.

by A.K. Aruna
This work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/4.0/, or click the following logo:
Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License

4. L.1  तृतीयेऽध्याये परापरासु विद्यासु साधनाश्रयो विचारः प्रायेण अत्यगात्;
In the third Adhyāya consideration was mostly given to the higher (Para) and lower (Apara) Vidyās, with reference to the means (of acquiring them).

4. L.2  अथेह चतुर्थे फलाश्रय आगमिष्यति;
Now, here in the fourth (Adhyāya) consideration will be given to the fruit (Phala, of the Vidyās).

4. L.3  प्रसङ्गागतं च अन्यदपि किञ्चिच् चिन्तयिष्यते;
May be, as occasion may arise, some other things also will be considered.

4. L.4  प्रथमं तावत् कतिभिश्चिदधिकरणैः साधनाश्रय-विचार-शेषम् एवानुसरामः –
To begin with, however, in (i.e. by means of) the next few Adhikaraṇas we would continue the consideration of those means (of acquiring knowledge) which still have remained (to be fully considered).

[Go top]

Su.4.1.1 Su..2

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
आवृत्तिरसकृदुपदेशात्॥४.१.१॥
āvṛttir asakṛd upadeśāt.

Āvṛttiḥ: repetition, practice of meditation on Brahman (is necessary); A-sakṛt: not only once, many times, repeatedly; Upadeśāt: because of instruction by the scriptures.

🔗 Repetition (of the mental act of acquiring knowledge i.e. Jñāna-kriyā is necessary), because, (the Scriptures have) more than once given such instruction. — 4.1.1.

4.1.1 L.1  ‘आत्मा वा अरे द्रष्टव्यः श्रोतव्यो मन्तव्यो निदिध्यासितव्यः’ (BrhU.4.5.6)
‘तमेव धीरो विज्ञाय प्रज्ञां कुर्वीत’ (BrhU.4.4.21)
‘सोऽन्वेष्टव्यः स विजिज्ञासितव्यः’ (ChanU.8.7.1) इति च
एवमादिश्रवणेषु संशयः –

A doubt arises with regard to the following Scriptural statements —
“Oh Maitreyī, verily the Self should be seen, heard, cogitated upon and constantly meditated upon” (BrhU.4.5.6),
“Let the mentally well-poised intelligent man (Dhīra) attain knowledge by knowing Him (the Ātmā)” (BrhU.4.4.21),
“That is to be sought for, that is to be desired to be understood” (ChanU.8.7.1) —

4.1.1 L.2  किं सकृत्प्रत्ययः कर्तव्यः, आहोस्वित् आवृत्त्येति।
Viz., as to whether there should be only a single mental act or whether there should be a repetition (of such a mental act).


4.1.1 L.3  किं तावत्प्राप्तम्?
What then is the conclusion arrived at (by the opponent of Vedānta)?


4.1.1 L.4  सकृत्प्रत्ययः स्यात्, प्रयाजादिवत्,
It is, that, like ‘Prayāja’ (some particular act performed only once during the sacrifice) there should be only one such mental act,

4.1.1 L.5  तावता शास्त्रस्य कृतार्थत्वात्;
Because in that way the purpose of the Śāstra will have been adequately served,

4.1.1 L.6  अश्रूयमाणायां हि आवृत्तौ क्रियमाणायाम् अशास्त्रार्थः कृतो भवेत्।
And any such repetition (of it) which is not enjoined by the Scriptures, would be tantamount to going counter to the Śāstra.


4.1.1 L.7  ननु असकृदुपदेशा उदाहृताः –
But (says the Vedāntin) several instructions of the Scriptures have been mentioned in illustrations such as —

4.1.1 L.8  ‘श्रोतव्यो मन्तव्यो निदिध्यासितव्यः’ इत्येवमादयः –
“(That the Self) should be seen, heard, cogitated upon and meditated upon”.


4.1.1 L.9  एवमपि यावच्छब्दमावर्तयेत् – सकृच्छ्रवणं सकृन्मननं सकृन्निदिध्यासनं चेति,
(The opponent of Vedānta says’) — Even so, such repetition may be made as instructed by the Scriptures, by hearing once, thinking once, cogitating upon once, and meditating upon once,

4.1.1 L.10  नातिरिक्तम्।
But not more than that,

4.1.1 L.11  सकृदुपदेशेषु तु ‘वेद’ ‘उपासीत’ इत्येवमादिषु अनावृत्तिरिति
And of course, where instruction (to do a thing) is given by the Scriptures only once, as in “Let him understand or let him meditate upon”, there should be no such repetition.


4.1.1 L.12  एवं प्राप्ते, ब्रूमः – प्रत्ययावृत्तिः कर्तव्या।
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), we reply: — This act (of acquiring knowledge) ought to be repeated.

4.1.1 L.13  कुतः? असकृदुपदेशात् –
Whence is it so? Because of several instructions.

4.1.1 L.14  ‘श्रोतव्यो मन्तव्यो निदिध्यासितव्यः’ इत्येवंजातीयको हि असकृदुपदेशः प्रत्ययावृत्तिं सूचयति।
Such instruction (about repetition) more than once as “(That the Self) should be seen, heard, cogitated upon and meditated upon”, suggests the repetition of the act of acquiring knowledge.


4.1.1 L.15  ननु उक्तम् – यावच्छब्दमेव आवर्तयेत्, नाधिकमिति –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) we have explained that as instructed by the Scriptures, we should repeat the mental act once, but never more than that.


4.1.1 L.16  न, दर्शन-पर्यवसानत्वाद् एषाम्;
(We reply) — No, because they (i.e. such mental acts) are meant ultimately to culminate in the intuitive realization (of Brahman).

4.1.1 L.17  दर्शन-पर्यवसानानि हि श्रवणादीन् यावर्त्यमानानि दृष्टार्थानि भवन्ति –
It is only when they so culminate in such intuitive realization (of Brahman) by such repeated hearing etc. that they have their tangible fruit,

4.1.1 L.18  यथा अवघातादीनि तण्डुलादि-निष्पत्तिपर्यवसानानि, तद्वत्।
Just as the threshing of rice (which has its husk on it) has its culmination in the dehusking of such rice grains.

4.1.1 L.19  अपि च उपासनं निदिध्यासनं च इत्यन्तर्णीतावृत्ति-गुणैव क्रिया अभिधीयते;
Besides ‘cogitation and meditation’ are said to imply action in which this aspect of repetition (Āvṛtti-guṇa) is implicit.

4.1.1 L.20  तथा हि लोके ‘गुरुमुपास्ते’ ‘राजानमुपास्ते’ इति च यस्तात्पर्येण गुर्वादीननुवर्तते, स एवमुच्यते;
For instance in ordinary life when we say that a man worships his preceptor or his king, we understand that it means that he serves his preceptor or his king with continued unswerving loyalty (Tāt-paryeṇa).

4.1.1 L.21  तथा ‘ध्यायति प्रोषितनाथा पतिम्’ इति – या निरन्तर-स्मरणा पतिं प्रति सोत्कण्ठा, सा एवमभिधीयते।
Similarly it is only when a Proṣita-nāthā wife (a grass widow i.e. a wife whose husband has gone away on business) constantly remembers her absent husband and is eager to meet him, that we speak of her (i.e. such traveller’s wife) that she has no other thought but that of thinking constantly and wistfully remembering her absent husband.

4.1.1 L.22  विद्युपास्त्योश्च वेदान्तेषु अव्यतिरेकेण प्रयोगो दृश्यते;
It is seen that the terms ‘he should know’, ‘he should meditate’ are used in Vedānta texts without any distinction i.e. as synonymous.

4.1.1 L.23  क्वचित् विदिनोपक्रम्य उपासिनोपसंहरति,
In some places a Scriptural statement begins with the term ‘let him know’, and concludes with ‘let him meditate upon’,

4.1.1 L.24  यथा – ‘यस्तद्वेद यत्स वेद स मयैतदुक्तः’ (ChanU.4.1.4) इत्यत्र
As for instance in — “He who knows in the same manner in which he (Raikva) knows it (earns the same fruit which Raikva earned). It is of him that I have spoken (to you)” (ChanU.4.1.4)

4.1.1 L.25  ‘अनु म एतां भगवो देवतां शाधि यां देवताम् उपास्से’ (ChanU.5.2.2) इति;
And “Oh Bhagavān, teach me about the deity on which you meditate” (ChanU.5.2.2).

4.1.1 L.26  क्वचिच्च उपासिनोपक्रम्य विदिनोपसंहरति, यथा – ‘मनो ब्रह्मेत्युपासीत’ (ChanU.3.18.1) इत्यत्र
Elsewhere, the Scriptures begin with ‘meditating’ and conclude with ‘knowing’ as for instance in — “Meditate on the mind as Brahman” (ChanU.3.18.1)

4.1.1 L.27  ‘भाति च तपति च कीर्त्या यशसा ब्रह्मवर्चसेन य एवं वेद’ (ChanU.3.18.3) इति।
And “He who knows it to be so, shines and radiates with the heat of his fame, success, and strength, obtained through the knowledge of Brahman” (ChanU.3.18.3).

4.1.1 L.28  तस्मात् सकृदुपदेशेष्वपि आवृत्ति-सिद्धिः। असकृदुपदेशस्तु आवृत्तेः सूचकः॥१॥
Thus, it is established, that repetition is necessary even when instruction is given only once, while several instructions of course suggest repetition (of such mental acts). — 1.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
लिङ्गाच्च॥४.१.२॥
Liṅgāc ca.

Liṅgāt: because of the indicatory mark or sign; Ca: and.

🔗 Also, because of the indicatory mark (the necessity of repetition is understood). — 4.1.2.

4.1.2 L.1  लिङ्गमपि प्रत्ययावृत्तिं प्रत्याययति।
A Scriptural indicatory mark also, makes the repetition of the mental act of acquiring knowledge, understood.

4.1.1 L.2  तथा हि – उद्गीथविज्ञानं प्रस्तुत्य, ‘आदित्य उद्गीथः’ (ChanU.1.5.1)
Thus, with reference to the Udgīṭha Vidyā, after having censured meditation on “Āditya as the Udgīṭha” (ChanU.1.5.1),

4.1.1 L.3  इत्येतत् एकपुत्रतादोषेणापोद्य,
As involving the fault of having the fruit of being blessed with a single son only,

4.1.1 L.4  ‘रश्मींस्त्वं पर्यावर्तयात्’ (ChanU.1.5.2) इति रश्मिबहुत्वविज्ञानं बहुपुत्रतायै विदधत्
And enjoining the Vidyā of of the rays, thus — “Do thou meditate on the rays” (ChanU.1.5.2), for the sake of obtaining many sons,

4.1.1 L.5  सिद्धवत्प्रत्ययावृत्तिं दर्शयति;
The Scriptures indicate the enjoining of the repetition of the mental act of meditation as something already well established.

4.1.1 L.6  तत्सामान्यात् सर्वप्रत्ययेष्वावृत्ति-सिद्धिः॥
Therefore in common with it, such repetition of the mental acts of acquiring knowledge is established in the case of all mental acts.


4.1.1 L.7  अत्राह – भवतु नाम साध्यफलेषु प्रत्ययेष्वावृत्तिः,
The opponent of Vedānta here says — May, such repetition of the mental act, well be, in the case of those mental acts of meditation whose fruit is capable of being achieved,

4.1.1 L.8  तेष्वावृत्तिसाध्यस्यातिशयस्य सम्भवात्;
Because of the possibility of a superiority of fruit being achieved thereby,

4.1.1 L.9  यस्तु परब्रह्मविषयः प्रत्ययो नित्यशुद्धबुद्धमुक्त-स्वभावमेव आत्मभूतं परं ब्रह्म समर्पयति, तत्र किमर्था आवृत्तिरिति।
But what good can there be of such repetition of a mental act with respect to the Highest Brahman, which culminates in (the realization of) the transcendent Brahman, which has the nature of being eternally pure, enlightened and free, and which is the Self of all?


4.1.1 L.10  सकृच्छ्रुतौ च ब्रह्मात्मवत्प्रतीत्यनुपपत्तेरावृत्त्यभ्युपगम इति चेत्,
If it be said (by the Vedāntin), that the realization of Brahman as the Self of all can take place by only one such act of hearing, is not reasonably sustainable, and hence I hold that repetition of it is understandable,


4.1.1 L.11  न, आवृत्तावपि तदनुपपत्तेः;
(We, the opponents of Vedānta, reply) — No, because it is not reasonably sustainable (that such realization would necessarily take place) even by such repetition.

4.1.1 L.12  यदि हि ‘तत्त्वमसि’ इत्येवंजातीयकं वाक्यं सकृच्छ्रूयमाणं ब्रह्मात्मत्वप्रतीतिं नोत्पादयेत् ततस्तदेव आवर्त्यमानमुत्पादयिष्यतीति का प्रत्याशा स्यात्।
If the passage “That thou art” (ChanU.6.8.7) heard only once does not create such realization, what hope is there that even a repetition of such a passage would create such realization?


4.1.1 L.13  अथोच्येत – न केवलं वाक्यं कञ्चिदर्थं साक्षात्कर्तुं शक्नोति;
If it be said (by the Vedāntin) that a passage merely by itself may not be able to cause this entity to be realized

4.1.1 L.14  अतो युक्त्यपेक्षं वाक्यमनुभावयिष्यति ब्रह्मात्मत्वमिति –
And hence a passage which depends on reasoning to help it, may cause the realization of Brahman as the Self (of all),

4.1.1 L.15  तथाप्यावृत्त्यानर्थक्यमेव;
We, (the opponents of Vedānta) reply, even then such repetition is purposeless,

4.1.1 L.16  सापि हि युक्तिः सकृत्प्रवृत्तैव स्वमर्थमनुभावयिष्यति।
Because even mere reasoning, operating but once only, may cause its own object to be realized.


4.1.1 L.17  अथापि स्यात् – युक्त्या वाक्येन च सामान्यविषयमेव विज्ञानं क्रियते, न विशेषविषयम्;
It may even be like this (says the Vedāntin), viz. that reason and the (Scriptural) passage, together, may effect only a general, and not a special, kind of knowledge (of an entity).

4.1.1 L.18  यथा ‘अस्ति मे हृदये शूलम्’ इत्यतो वाक्यात् गात्रकम्पादिलिङ्गाच्च
For instance, from a sentence such as ‘I have pain in my chest’, and the symptom of the tremor of limbs,

4.1.1 L.19  शूलसद्भावसामान्यमेव परः प्रतिपद्यते, न विशेषमनुभवति –
A man may merely understand the existence of such pain (in the man who says so, only in a general way) but he cannot experience such pain,

4.1.1 L.20  यथा स एव शूली;
In that special manner in which the sufferer of such pain himself actually experiences it.

4.1.1 L.21  विशेषानुभवश्च अविद्याया निवर्तकः; तदर्था आवृत्तिरिति चेत् –
If it be said (by the Vedāntin) that it is such special realization which removes ignorance (i.e. Nescience), and hence it is, that repetition is necessary for that purpose,


4.1.1 L.22  न, असकृदपि तावन्मात्रे क्रियमाणे विशेषविज्ञानोत्पत्त्यसम्भवात्;
(The opponent of Vedānta says) — No. Even if such repetition is made more than once, there is no possibility of such special realization.

4.1.1 L.23  न हि सकृत्प्रयुक्ताभ्यां शास्त्रयुक्तिभ्याम् अनवगतो विशेषः
If such special realization does not result by the application of the Śāstra and reasoning, once,

4.1.1 L.24  शतकृत्वोऽपि प्रयुज्यमानाभ्याम् अवगन्तुं शक्यते;
It cannot be so realized, even if they are employed even a hundred times.

4.1.1 L.25  तस्मात् यदि शास्त्रयुक्तिभ्यां विशेषः प्रतिपाद्येत, यदि वा सामान्यमेव
Therefore, whether a special or a general realization is sought to be propounded by means of the Śāstra and by reasoning,

4.1.1 L.26  उभयथापि सकृत्प्रवृत्ते एव ते स्वकार्यं कुरुत इति आवृत्त्यनुपयोगः;
In either case, inasmuch as they would accomplish their work by one such operation of themselves (i.e. of the Śāstra and reasoning) repetition would have no use.

4.1.1 L.27  न च सकृत्प्रयुक्ते शास्त्रयुक्ती कस्यचिदप्यनुभवं नोत्पादयत इति शक्यते नियन्तुम्,
Besides it is not possible to determine that the Śāstra and reasoning employed but once only, can never as a rule produce such experience,

4.1.1 L.28  विचित्रप्रज्ञत्वात् प्रतिपत्तॄणाम्।
Because of the varying intelligences of those who have to experience such a realization.

4.1.1 L.29  अपि च अनेकांशोपेते लौकिके पदार्थे सामान्यविशेषवति एकेनावधानेन एकमंशमवधारयति, अपरेण अपरम् – इति स्यादप्यभ्यासोपयोगः,
There may well be such use for repetition, where, in the ordinary world, in the case of a thing consisting of many parts, and possessing general and special characteristics, one part of such a thing may be understood by one such act of careful intentness of attention, and another part by another such act of careful intentness of attention,

4.1.1 L.30  यथा दीर्घप्रपाठकग्रहणादिषु;
As for instance, in the case of the understanding of a lengthy chapter of the same lesson,

4.1.1 L.31  न तु निर्विशेषे ब्रह्मणि सामान्यविशेष-रहिते चैतन्यमात्रात्मके प्रमोत्पत्तावभ्यासापेक्षा युक्तेति॥
But no such repetition is needed for the generation of the right knowledge of Brahman, which is devoid of any such ordinary or special characteristics of any kind, and which has sentiency alone as its Self.


4.1.1 L.32  अत्रोच्यते – भवेदावृत्त्यानर्थक्यं तं प्रति, यः ‘तत्त्वमसि’ (ChanU.6.8.7) इति सकृदुक्तमेव ब्रह्मात्मत्वमनुभवितुं शक्नुयात्;
To this conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), it is said, that repetition may well be purposeless in the case of one, who, when the passage “That thou art” is addressed to him only once, is able to realize that Brahman is the Self (of all),

4.1.1 L.33  यस्तु न शक्नोति, तं प्रति उपयुज्यत एव आवृत्तिः।
But to one who is not so able to realize, repetition is useful.

4.1.1 L.34  तथा हि च्छान्दोग्ये – ‘तत्त्वमसि श्वेतकेतो’ (ChanU.6.8.7) इत्युपदिश्य,
For instance, in the Chāndogya, when instructed (by the preceptor), thus — “Oh Śveta-ketu, that thou art” (ChanU.6.8.7),

4.1.1 L.35  ‘भूय एव मा भगवान्विज्ञापयतु’ (ChanU.6.8.7) इति पुनः पुनः परिचोद्यमानः तत्तदाशङ्काकारणं निराकृत्य,
And on his being asked again and again thus — “The Bhagavān should again explain it to me” (ChanU.6.8.7), the preceptor after having removed every such cause of doubt one by one,

4.1.1 L.36  ‘तत्त्वमसि’ इत्येवासकृदुपदिशति;
Again and again instructs Śveta-ketu thus — ‘Oh Śveta-ketu, that thou art’.

4.1.1 L.37  तथा च ‘श्रोतव्यो मन्तव्यो निदिध्यासितव्यः’ (BrhU.4.5.6) इत्यादि दर्शितम्।
That is why we have given this Scriptural illustration, thus — “Ātmā verily should be heard, cogitated upon, and meditated upon” (BrhU.4.5.6).


4.1.1 L.38  ननु उक्तम् – सकृच्छ्रुतं चेत् तत्त्वमसिवाक्यं स्वमर्थमनुभावयितुं न शक्नोति,
But (says the opponent of Vedānta), if the passage “That thou art”, heard but once only, is unable to make one realize that which it means,

4.1.1 L.39  तत आवर्त्यमानमपि नैव शक्ष्यतीति –
Then it certainly would not be able to do so even when it is repeated.


4.1.1 L.40  नैष दोषः; न हि दृष्टेऽनुपपन्नं नाम;
(We reply) — This is no fault, for, indeed, when a thing (such as repetition) is seen to be useful how can it be said that it is not reasonably sustainable?

4.1.1 L.41  दृश्यन्ते हि सकृच्छ्रुताद्वाक्यात् मन्दप्रतीतं वाक्यार्थं आवर्तयन्तः तत्तदाभासव्युदासेन सम्यक्प्रतिपद्यमानाः।
It is indeed seen, that those who are able to understand the meaning of a sentence but vaguely by hearing it once only, are able to understand its meaning correctly, by a progressive removal of misconceptions (as to its meaning), by repetition.

4.1.1 L.42  अपि च ‘तत्त्वमसि’ इत्येतद्वाक्यं त्वंपदार्थस्य तत्पदार्थभावमाचष्टे;
Besides, the sentence “That thou art” speaks of the entity denoted by the word ‘thou’ as being identical with the entity denoted by the word ‘That’.

4.1.1 L.43  तत्पदेन च प्रकृतं सत् ब्रह्म ईक्षितृ जगतो जन्मादिकारणम् अभिधीयते –
And it is by the word ‘That’ (Tat), that Brahman, the ‘Sat’, and the seer, is said to be the cause of the origin of this world,

4.1.1 L.44  ‘सत्यं ज्ञानमनन्तं ब्रह्म’ (TaitU.2.1.1)
‘विज्ञानमानन्दं ब्रह्म’ (BrhU.3.9.28)
‘अदृष्टं द्रष्टृ’ (BrhU.3.8.11)
‘अविज्ञातं विज्ञातृ’ (BrhU.3.8.11)
अजमजरममरम् (BrhU.4.4.25)
‘अस्थूलमनण्वह्रस्वमदीर्घम्’ (BrhU.3.8.8)
इत्यादिशास्त्रसिद्धम्;

As is well-known from the Scriptural passages such as —
Brahman is truth and knowledge, and is eternal” (TaitU.2.1.1),
Brahman which is knowledge and bliss” (BrhU.3.9.28),
“Unseen but seeing, unknown but knowing etc.” (BrhU.3.8.11),
Not subject to birth, not subject to old age, not subject to death (BrhU.4.4.25),
“Neither gross nor subtle, nor short nor long” (BrhU.3.8.8) etc.

4.1.1 L.45  तत्र अजादिशब्दैर्जन्मादयो भावविकारा निवर्तिताः;
There, by the words ‘not subject to birth etc.’, birth and such other phases of existence are denied,

4.1.1 L.46  अस्थूलादिशब्दैश्च स्थौल्यादयो द्रव्यधर्माः;
By the words ‘neither gross etc.’, such properties of matter as grossness etc. are denied,

4.1.1 L.47  विज्ञानादिशब्दैश्च चैतन्य-प्रकाशात्मकत्वमुक्तम्;
And by the words ‘knowledge etc.’ Brahman’s being the light of sentiency is spoken of.

4.1.1 L.48  एष व्यावृत्त-सर्वसंसार-धर्मकोऽनुभवात्मको ब्रह्मसंज्ञकस्तत्पदार्थो वेदान्ताभियुक्तानां प्रसिद्धः;
The entity ‘That’ (Tat) called Brahman, which is devoid of all the attributes of a transitory mundane existence, and which is capable of being realized, is well-known to those who are well-versed in Vedānta.

4.1.1 L.49  तथा त्वंपदार्थोऽपि प्रत्यगात्मा श्रोता देहादारभ्य प्रत्यगात्मतया सम्भाव्यमानः चैतन्यपर्यन्तत्वेनावधारितः;
Similarly, they also know that the entity indicated by the word ‘Thou’ (Tvam) is the Universal Highest Self (Pratyag-ātmā), the hearer, and the one which beginning with the body is understood to be the innermost Self of all and is ultimately determined to be of the nature of sentiency (Caitanya-Sva-rūpa).

4.1.1 L.50  तत्र येषाम् एतौ पदार्थौ अज्ञानसंशयविपर्यय-प्रतिबद्धौ, तेषां
Now, in the case of those whose comprehension of the meaning of these two terms is obstructed, i.e. coloured by ignorance, doubt, and confusion,

4.1.1 L.51  ‘तत्त्वमसि’ इत्येतद्वाक्यं स्वार्थे प्रमां नोत्पादयितुं शक्नोति, पदार्थज्ञान-पूर्वकत्वाद् वाक्यार्थज्ञानस्य –
The sentence “That thou art” is unable to generate appropriate knowledge of what these words mean, because, the knowledge of the meaning of all the words (of a sentence), is a pre-requisite for the knowledge of the meaning of such a sentence,

4.1.1 L.52  इत्यतः, तान्प्रति एष्टव्यः पदार्थविवेक-प्रयोजनः शास्त्रयुक्त्यभ्यासः।
And hence in their case, the repetition of the study of Scriptural passages and reasoning, which results in the proper discrimination of the words, is necessary.

4.1.1 L.53  यद्यपि च प्रतिपत्तव्य आत्मा निरंशः,
Even though, the Self which is to be realized, does not consist of any parts as such,

4.1.1 L.54  तथापि अध्यारोपितं तस्मिन् बह्वंशत्वं देहेन्द्रियमनोबुद्धिविषय-वेदनादि-लक्षणम्;
Still the nature of consisting of such parts as are characterized by a body, the sense-organs, mind, intelligence, objects of sense, and the property of reacting to pleasure and pain, is superimposed on it,

4.1.1 L.55  तत्र एकेन अवधानेन एकमंशमपोहति,
And in such a case, inasmuch as one mental act of intentness of attention removes the misconception about one such part,

4.1.1 L.56  अपरेण अपरम् –
And another such mental act of intentness of attention removes the misconception about another such part, and so on,

4.1.1 L.57  इति युज्यते तत्र क्रमवती प्रतिपत्तिः;
It is but proper that in such a case, realization comes about by progressive stages,

4.1.1 L.58  तत्तु पूर्वरूपमेव आत्मप्रतिपत्तेः।
But even that is but only a penultimate condition of the actual realization of the Self.

4.1.1 L.59  येषां पुनः निपुणमतीनां न अज्ञानसंशय-विपर्ययलक्षणः पदार्थविषयः प्रतिबन्धोऽस्ति,
But such clever minds, as are not subject to any such impediments of the nature of ignorance, doubt, and confusion, as to the meaning of words,

4.1.1 L.60  ते शक्नुवन्ति सकृदुक्तमेव तत्त्वमसिवाक्यार्थम् अनुभवितुमिति, तान्प्रति आवृत्त्यानर्थक्यमिष्टमेव;
Are able to understand the meaning of the passage “That thou art” even though it is mentioned but once only,

4.1.1 L.61  सकृदुत्पन्नैव हि आत्मप्रतिपत्तिः अविद्यां निवर्तयतीति, नात्र कश्चिदपि क्रमोऽभ्युपगम्यते। सत्यमेवं युज्येत,
And hence in their case it is but proper, that repetition has no purpose, and the realization of the Self, effected once for all, removes all ignorance, and no such order of progressive realization need be understood (to be necessary).


4.1.1 L.62  यदि कस्यचित् एवं प्रतिपत्तिर्भवेत्;
बलवती हि आत्मनो दुःखित्वादिप्रतिपत्तिः;
अतो न दुःखित्वाद्यभावं कश्चित्प्रतिपद्यत इति चेत् –

But if it be said (by the opponent of Vedānta) — Forsooth, it would be proper if anybody were to realize the Self in this way,
But (on the other hand) that the Self is subject to pain, is very forcibly experienced (by men),
And no one ever experiences the complete absence of pain etc.,


4.1.1 L.63  न, देहाद्यभिमानवत् दुःखित्वाद्यभिमानस्य मिथ्याभिमानत्वोपपत्तेः;
(We reply) — No, because it is reasonably sustainable, that just as the conception by the Self, that it possesses a body of its own, is false, even so the conception of it being subject to pain etc. also, is due to a similar false conception,

4.1.1 L.64  प्रत्यक्षं हि देहे छिद्यमाने दह्यमाने वा ‘अहं छिद्ये दह्ये’ इति च मिथ्याभिमानो दृष्टः;
For it is seen that when a body is actually cut or burnt, an erroneous conception such as ‘I am being cut and I am being burnt’ does in fact take place.

4.1.1 L.65  तथा बाह्यतरेष्वपि पुत्रमित्रादिषु सन्तप्यमानेषु ‘अहमेव सन्तप्ये’ इत्यध्यारोपो दृष्टः;
Similarly when entities, more external to the Self (than the body), such as a son or a friend, are being afflicted with pain, a similar false superimposition, viz. that it is ‘I’, i.e., the Self, that is being afflicted with pain, is to be seen.

4.1.1 L.66  तथा दुःखित्वाद्यभिमानोऽपि स्यात्, देहादिवदेव
Even so there may be an erroneous misconception of pain etc., similar to the misconception of possessing a body.

4.1.1 L.67  चैतन्याद् बहिरुपलभ्यमानत्वाद् दुःखित्वादीनाम्,
Because pain etc., like the body etc., are experienced as being distinctly separate from sentiency,

4.1.1 L.68  सुषुप्तादिषु च अननुवृत्तेः;
As they are not experienced during deep sleep.

4.1.1 L.69  चैतन्यस्य तु सुषुप्तेऽपि अनुवृत्तिमामनन्ति –
The Scriptures on the other hand declare that sentiency is experienced even during deep sleep,

4.1.1 L.70  ‘यद्वै तन्न पश्यति पश्यन्वै तन्न पश्यति’ (BrhU.4.3.23) इत्यादिना;
Thus — “Verily while that which he does not see (with his eyes) he verily does see, though he does not see” (BrhU.4.3.23).

4.1.1 L.71  तस्मात् सर्वदुःख-विनिर्मुक्तैकचैतन्यात्मकोऽहमित्येष आत्मानुभवः।
Therefore, the realization of the Self, is the realization that ‘I am the Self’, characterized only by sentiency and freedom from all pain as such.

4.1.1 L.72  न च एवम् आत्मानमनुभवतः किञ्चिदन्यत्कृत्यम् अवशिष्यते;
For him, who actually experiences the Self in this manner, there is nothing left to be done.

4.1.1 L.73  तथा च श्रुतिः – ‘किं प्रजया करिष्यामो येषां नोऽयमात्मायं लोकः’ (BrhU.4.4.22)
The same is expressed in the Scriptural passage “What use is progeny to us, to whom the Self only is but the (heavenly) world?” (BrhU.4.4.22),

4.1.1 L.74  इत्यात्मविदः कर्तव्याभावं दर्शयति;
Which indicates that for a man who knows the Self, nothing is left to be done.

4.1.1 L.75  स्मृतिरपि – ‘यस्त्वात्मरतिरेव स्यादात्मतृप्तश्च मानवः।
आत्मन्येव च सन्तुष्टस्तस्य कार्यं न विद्यते’ (BhG.3.17) इति।

So says the Smṛti also, thus — “One who is delighted in the Self, is satiated with the Self
And is content in the same, has nothing left for him to do” (BhG.3.17).

4.1.1 L.76  यस्य तु न एषोऽनुभवो द्रागिव जायते, तं प्रति अनुभवार्थ एव आवृत्त्यभ्युपगमः।
In the case of those to whom such realization does not come readily, repetition is understood to be necessary for such realization.

4.1.1 L.77  तत्रापि न तत्त्वमसि-वाक्यार्थात् प्रच्याव्य
Even in the case of a man who has understood the meaning of the passage ‘That thou art’, the Scriptures do not seek to distract such a person away from the meaning of the passage,

4.1.1 L.78  आवृत्तौ प्रवर्तयेत्;
And induce him towards practising repetition.

4.1.1 L.79  न हि वरघाताय कन्यामुद्वाहयन्ति;
No one gets one’s daughter married (with a mental reservation) for the purpose of doing violence to the bridegroom (at some future time).

4.1.1 L.80  नियुक्तस्य च ‘अस्मिन्नधिकृतोऽहं कर्ता मयेदं कर्तव्यम्’ इत्यवश्यं ब्रह्मप्रत्ययाद् विपरीतप्रत्यय उत्पद्यते;
Even in the case of a man who considers himself to be enjoined by the Scriptures to such repetition, a conception contrary to that of the conception of Brahman, such as that ‘I am the doer, I have got to do this’, is invariably generated.

4.1.1 L.81  यस्तु स्वयमेव मन्दमतिः अप्रतिभानात् तं वाक्यार्थं जिहासेत्,
He who is intellectually dull and, therefore, misses the meaning of the sentence because its meaning does not flash on him,

4.1.1 L.82  तस्य एतस्मिन्नेव वाक्यार्थे स्थिरीकार आवृत्त्यादिवाचोयुक्त्या अभ्युपेयते।
Deserves to be firmly grounded into the meaning of the sentence, by such means as repetition etc.

4.1.1 L.83  तस्मात् परब्रह्मविषयेऽपि प्रत्यये तदुपायोपदेशेष्वावृत्ति-सिद्धिः॥२॥
Therefore, it is thus established that even in matters relating to the realization of Brahman, repetition of the instruction which is the means to such realization of knowledge, is necessary. — 2.

– 154. Āvṛty-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
आत्मेति तूपगच्छन्ति ग्राहयन्ति च॥४.१.३॥
Ātmeti tūpagacchanti grāhayanti ca.

Ātmā iti: as the Self; Tu: but; Upagacchanti: acknowledge, approach, realise; Grāhayanti: teach, make others comprehend, instruct; Ca: also.

🔗 (The Scriptures understand) that Īśvara i.e. Brahman is the Jīva-Self (Ātmā) and they (i.e. Scriptures) also cause it to be so understood. — 4.1.3.

4.1.1 L.1  यः शास्त्रोक्तविशेषणः परमात्मा,
स किम् अहमिति ग्रहीतव्यः, किं वा मदन्य इति – एतद्विचारयति।

The Sūtra-kāra is now considering whether the Highest Self whose special attributes are described by the Śāstra,
Should be understood to be the ‘I’ or it should be understood as being some thing other than ‘I’.


4.1.1 L.2  कथं पुनरात्मशब्दे प्रत्यगात्मविषये श्रूयमाणे संशय इति,
(The opponent of Vedānta says) — When the Scriptures mention the word ‘Self’ in connection with the innermost Universal Self, whence can such a doubt arise?


4.1.1 L.3  उच्यते – अयमात्मशब्दो मुख्यः शक्यतेऽभ्युपगन्तुम्, सति जीवेश्वरयोरभेदसम्भवे;
इतरथा तु गौणोऽयमभ्युपगन्तव्यः – इति मन्यते।

It is said (by the Sūtra-kāra) — Were there to be a possibility of non-difference between the Jīva-Self and the Lord, then alone, it is thought, that the word ‘Jīva-Self’ could be understood in its principal sense,
Otherwise it will have to be understood in its secondary sense.


4.1.1 L.4  किं तावत्प्राप्तम्?
What then is the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta)?

4.1.1 L.5  न अहमिति ग्राह्यः;
It is that it can’t be understood to be the ‘I’.

4.1.1 L.6  न हि अपहतपाप्मत्वादि-गुणो विपरीत-गुणत्वेन शक्यते ग्रहीतुम्,
It is not possible to understood Him, who possesses the nature of being free from sinfulness i.e. the Highest Lord, as one having a contrary nature (i.e. that of the embodied Jīva-Self),

4.1.1 L.7  विपरीत-गुणो वा अपहतपाप्मत्वादि-गुणत्वेन;
Nor can he, that has such contrary nature, be considered to be one who possesses the nature of being free from sinfulness (i.e. that of the Highest Lord).

4.1.1 L.8  अपहतपाप्मत्वादि-गुणश्च परमेश्वरः, तद्विपरीत-गुणस्तु शारीरः;
The Highest Lord has the nature of being free from sinfulness and the embodied Jīva-Self has a nature contrary to that.

4.1.1 L.9  ईश्वरस्य च संसार्यात्मत्वे ईश्वराभाव-प्रसङ्गः;
Now, if the Highest Lord were to be considered to be a transmigratory Jīva-Self, there would be the predicament of the non-existence of the Highest Lord himself thus resulting,

4.1.1 L.10  ततः शास्त्रानर्थक्यम्;
And thereby the Śāstra would become meaningless.

4.1.1 L.11  संसारिणोऽपि ईश्वरात्मत्वे अधिकार्यभावाच्छास्त्रानर्थक्यमेव,
Again, if the transmigratory Jīva-Self were to be the Lord (i.e. Īśvara) there would be the absence of a person competent (to study the Vedānta Śāstra) and thus the Śāstra would equally again be rendered meaningless,

4.1.1 L.12  प्रत्यक्षादिविरोधश्च।
And besides there would be a contradiction of such means-of-proof as direct perception etc. (as it is known by everybody that the Jīva-Self is not the Lord).


4.1.1 L.13  अन्यत्वेऽपि तादात्म्य-दर्शनं शास्त्रात् कर्तव्यम् –
प्रतिमादिष्विव विष्ण्वादि-दर्शनम् इति चेत् –

If it be said (by the Vedāntin), that different as they are, complete identity between them ought to be understood on the authority of the Śāstra,
In the same way in which a symbol and Viṣṇu etc. are looked upon as being identical,


4.1.1 L.14  काममेवं भवतु;
(We the opponents of Vedānta say), well may it be so if you so prefer it,

4.1.1 L.15  न तु संसारिणो मुख्य आत्मा ईश्वर इत्येतत् नः प्रापयितव्यम्॥
But do not seek to land us into an admission, that the Lord is the Self of the transmigratory being i.e. the Jīva-Self in the principal sense of the term.


4.1.1 L.16  एवं प्राप्ते, ब्रूमः – आत्मेत्येव परमेश्वरः प्रतिपत्तव्यः।
To this, we reply — The Highest Lord should of course be understood to be the Ātmā (Jīva-Self),

4.1.1 L.17  तथा हि परमेश्वरप्रक्रियायां जाबाला आत्मत्वेनैव एतमुपगच्छन्ति –
For even so do the Jābālas, in the chapter dealing with the Highest Lord, understood the Lord to be the Ātmā (Jīva-Self) thus —

4.1.1 L.18  ‘त्वं वा अहमस्मि भगवो देवतेऽहं वै त्वमसि भगवो देवते’ इति;
“Thou art indeed I, Oh blessed deity, and I indeed, am Thou”.

4.1.1 L.19  तथा अन्येऽपि ‘अहं ब्रह्मास्मि’ इत्येवमादय आत्मत्वोपगमा द्रष्टव्याः।
Similarly Scriptural passages such as “I am Brahman” also should be looked upon as considering (the Highest Lord) as the Self.

4.1.1 L.20  ग्राहयन्ति च आत्मत्वेनैव ईश्वरं वेदान्तवाक्यानि –
‘एष त आत्मा सर्वान्तरः’ (BrhU.3.4.1)
‘एष त आत्मान्तर्याम्यमृतः’ (BrhU.3.7.3)
‘तत्सत्यꣳ स आत्मा तत्त्वमसि’ (ChanU.6.8.7) इत्येवमादीनि।

Vedānta texts such as “This your Self which is inside all” (BrhU.3.4.1),
“This your Self which is the ruler within and is immortal” (BrhU.3.7.3),
“That is the truth, that is the Self, that thou art” (ChanU.6.8.7),
Make us understand the Lord to be the Ātmā (i.e. the Jīva-Self).


4.1.1 L.21  यदुक्तम् – प्रतीक-दर्शनमिदं विष्णुप्रतिमान्यायेन भविष्यतीति, तदयुक्तम्,
What is mentioned (by the opponent of Vedānta), viz., that it can be understood by these sentences, on the strength of a similar reasoning about a symbol being Viṣṇu, that the symbol (Pratīka) should be understood to be Brahman, is not logical,

4.1.1 L.22  गौणत्वप्रसङ्गात्,
Because there would thus be the predicament of these passages having to be understood in a secondary sense.

4.1.1 L.23  वाक्य-वैरूप्याच्च –
Besides (it would not be proper), because here the syntactical form of the sentences of the Scriptures is dissimilar.

4.1.1 L.24  यत्र हि प्रतीकदृष्टिरभिप्रेयते, सकृदेव तत्र वचनं भवति –
Where, the Scriptures mean, that a symbol should be superimposed with the notion of a particular thing, there is only a unilateral statement,

4.1.1 L.25  यथा ‘मनो ब्रह्म’ (ChanU.3.18.1) ‘आदित्यो ब्रह्म’ (ChanU.3.19.1) इत्यादि;
As for instance in the passages — “The mind is Brahman” (ChanU.3.18.1), “The Āditya is Brahman” (ChanU.3.19.1).

4.1.1 L.26  इह पुनः – त्वम् अहमस्मि, अहं च त्वमसीत्याह –
Here however the Scriptures declare thus — “Thou art I, and I am Thou”,

4.1.1 L.27  अतः प्रतीकश्रुति-वैरूप्यात् अभेदप्रतिपत्तिः;
And hence, as here, the form of the Scriptural statement is different from the Scriptural statement about the symbol, it is understood that there is non-difference (between the embodied Jīva-Self and Brahman).

4.1.1 L.28  भेददृष्ट्यपवादाच्च;
Besides, the Scriptures have censured the looking upon of entities as being different.

4.1.1 L.29  तथा हि – ‘अथ योऽन्यां देवतामुपास्तेऽन्योऽसावन्योऽहमस्मीति न स वेद’ (BrhU.1.4.10)
‘मृत्योः स मृत्युमाप्नोति य इह नानेव पश्यति’ (BrhU.4.4.19, KathU.2.1.10)
‘सर्वं तं परादाद्योऽन्यत्रात्मनः सर्वं वेद’ (BrhU.4.5.71)
इत्येवमाद्या भूयसी श्रुतिः भेददर्शनम् अपवदति।

For instance, Scriptural passages, such as “The man who meditates upon a deity as an entity different from himself, really does not understand (the Truth)” (BrhU.1.4.10),
“One who here perceives entities as being different from each other, only goes from death to death” (BrhU.4.4.19),
“Everything forsakes him who considers all entities as being different from the Self” (BrhU.4.5.7),
Have censured the understanding of such difference (in entities).


4.1.1 L.30  यत्तूक्तम् – न विरुद्धगुणयोरन्योन्यात्मत्वसम्भव इति,
As regards the statement (by the opponent of Vedānta), that it is not possible for entities having opposite natures to be the Self of each other (i.e. to be mutually identical),


4.1.1 L.31  नायं दोषः, विरुद्धगुणताया मिथ्यात्वोपपत्तेः।
(We reply) — This is no fault, because it is reasonably sustainable, that the notion of their possessing natures opposed to each other, is illusory.


4.1.1 L.32  यत्पुनरुक्तम् – ईश्वराभाव-प्रसङ्ग इति,
As regards the statement that there would be the predicament of the non-existence of the Lord,


4.1.1 L.33  तदसत्, शास्त्रप्रामाण्यात्
(We reply) — that also is not so, because of the authority of the Śāstra,

4.1.1 L.34  अनभ्युपगमाच्च;
And also because we do not understand (as you the opponent of Vedānta do) that the Lord himself has the nature of the transmigratory Jīva-Self.

4.1.1 L.35  न हि ईश्वरस्य संसार्यात्मत्वं प्रतिपाद्यत इत्यभ्युपगच्छामः –
We understand that the Scriptures do not propound that the Lord is the transmigratory Jīva-Self,

4.1.1 L.36  किं तर्हि? – संसारिणः संसारित्वापोहेन ईश्वरात्मत्वं प्रतिपिपादयिषितमिति।
But on the other hand we do understand that the Scriptures aim at propounding, by denying the transmigratory nature of the Jīva-Self itself, that it is the Lord.

4.1.1 L.37  एवं च सति अद्वैतेश्वरस्य अपहतपाप्मत्वादि-गुणता विपरीत-गुणता तु इतरस्य मिथ्येति व्यवतिष्ठते।
This being so, it is determined, that the non-dual Lord has the nature of being free from all sinfulness, and that the (supposed) contrary nature of the Jīva-Self, is illusory.


4.1.1 L.38  यदप्युक्तम् – अधिकार्यभावः प्रत्यक्षादि-विरोधश्चेति,
With regard to the statement (by the opponent of Vedānta) that there would be the absence of any person competent (to study the Vedānta Śāstra) and that such means-of-proof as direct perception would be contradicted,


4.1.1 L.39  तदप्यसत्, प्राक्प्रबोधात् संसारित्वाभ्युपगमात्,
(We reply) that, that also is not so, because it is understood by us, that prior to the realization of knowledge, the Jīva-Self by all means, does indeed have such transmigratory nature,

4.1.1 L.40  तद्विषयत्वाच्च प्रत्यक्षादि-व्यवहारस्य;
And it is during such condition that the operation of such means-of-proof, as direct perception etc. takes place.

4.1.1 L.41  ‘यत्र त्वस्य सर्वमात्मैवाभूत्तत्केन कं पश्येत्’ (BrhU.2.4.14)
इत्यादिना हि प्रबोधे प्रत्यक्षाद्यभावं दर्शयति।

While the Scriptures indicate by the passage “When all this becomes to him, the Self as such, by what will he see and see what”? (BrhU.2.4.14)
That after the realization (of the Self) there is absence of such means-of-proof as direct perception etc.


4.1.1 L.42  प्रत्यक्षाद्यभावे श्रुतेरप्यभाव-प्रसङ्ग इति चेत्,
If it be said (by the opponent of Vedānta) that in the absence of the means-of-proof such as direct perception, there would be the predicament of even the Scriptures themselves ceasing to be the Scriptures (because they are the strongest means-of-proof),


4.1.1 L.43  न, इष्टत्वात्;
(We reply) — Not exactly, because, we on the other hand, do welcome such a predicament (i.e. it is for us a consummation devoutly to be wished).

4.1.1 L.44  ‘अत्र पिताऽपिता भवति’ (BrhU.4.3.22) इत्युपक्रम्य,
‘वेदा अवेदाः’ (BrhU.4.3.22) इति वचनात्
इष्यत एव अस्माभिः श्रुतेरप्यभावः प्रबोधे।

Besides, the Scriptures beginning with “In this condition (of realization), a father ceases to be a father” (BrhU.4.3.22),
Go on to say in the end, that “The Vedas cease to be the Vedas” (BrhU.4.3.22),
And thus after the realization (of Brahman) we do welcome, even the Vedas ceasing to be the Vedas.


4.1.1 L.45  कस्य पुनरयम् अप्रबोध इति चेत्,
If the opponent were to say — “Who in that case, is the one, that is in ignorance i.e. in need of such realization?”,


4.1.1 L.46  यस्त्वं पृच्छसि तस्य ते – इति वदामः।
We reply — It is you yourself, who are asking this question.


4.1.1 L.47  ननु अहमीश्वर एवोक्तः श्रुत्या –
If the opponent were to say — “Oh, but the Scriptures declare that I myself am the Lord”,


4.1.1 L.48  यद्येवं प्रतिबुद्धोऽसि, नास्ति कस्यचिदप्रबोधः।
(We retort) — If you have realized it to be so (i.e. that you are the Lord) then (in that case) there is none that happens to be without any such realization.

4.1.1 L.49  योऽपि दोषश्चोद्यते कैश्चित् – अविद्यया किल आत्मनः सद्वितीयत्वात्
Again the fault attributed, viz. that inasmuch as the Self along with Avidyā (i.e. Nescience) necessarily make a pair, it makes for duality,

4.1.1 L.50  अद्वैतानुपपत्तिरिति, सोऽपि एतेन प्रत्युक्तः।
And hence ‘Advaita’ (non-duality or monism) is not reasonably sustainable, is also refuted by what has just gone before.

4.1.1 L.51  तस्मात् आत्मेत्येव ईश्वरे मनो दधीत॥३॥
Therefore, one should focus the mind on the Lord as being the Ātmā (the Self). — 3.

– 155. Ātmatvopāsanā-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
न प्रतीके न हि सः॥४.१.४॥
Na pratīke na hi saḥ.

Na: not; Pratīke: in the symbol (such as Ākāśa, the sun, the mind, etc.); Na: not; Hi: because; Saḥ: he.

🔗 The Symbol cannot be (understood to be the Self). He (i.e. the person meditating) does not (look upon it as the Self). — 4.1.4.

4.1.4 L.1  ‘मनो ब्रह्मेत्युपासीतेत्यध्यात्मम् अथाधिदैवतम् आकाशो ब्रह्मेति’ (ChanU.3.18.1)
तथा ‘आदित्यो ब्रह्मेत्यादेशः’ (ChanU.3.19.1)
‘स यो नाम ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते’ (ChanU.7.1.5) इत्येवमादिषु
प्रतीकोपासनेषु संशयः –

Now a doubt arises, with regard to meditations on symbols
In such (Scriptural passages) as “One should meditate on the mind as Brahman, the Adhyātma (aspect), and ‘the Ākāśa is Brahman’ the Adhidaivatā (aspect)” (ChanU.3.18.1),
“The instruction is that Āditya is Brahman” (ChanU.3.19.1),
“He who meditates on Nāman (i.e. the Vedas) as Brahman” (ChanU.7.1.5),

4.1.4 L.2  किं तेष्वपि आत्मग्रहः कर्तव्यः, न वेति।
As to whether the symbols should themselves be understood to be the Self (Ātmā) or not.


4.1.4 L.3  किं तावत्प्राप्तम्?
What then is the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta)?


4.1.4 L.4  तेष्वपि आत्म-ग्रह एव युक्तः कर्तुम्।
It is, that it is logical that they also should themselves be understood to be the Self (Ātmā).

4.1.4 L.5  कस्मात्? ब्रह्मणः श्रुतिषु आत्मत्वेन प्रसिद्धत्वात्,
Whence is it so? Because in the Scriptures, Brahman is well-known as being the Self (Ātmā),

4.1.4 L.6  प्रतीकानामपि ब्रह्मविकारत्वाद् ब्रह्मत्वे सति आत्मत्वोपपत्तेः
And inasmuch as these symbols, as the effects or modifications (Vikāra) of Brahman, are also of the nature of Brahman, it is reasonably sustainable that they also are of the nature of the Self.


4.1.4 L.7  इत्येवं प्राप्ते ब्रूमः – न प्रतीकेष्वात्ममतिं बध्नीयात्;
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), we reply — One should not fasten the notion of the Self on symbols.

4.1.4 L.8  न हि स उपासकः प्रतीकानि व्यस्तानि आत्मत्वेन आकलयेत्।
The person meditating does not understand these different symbols to be the Self.

4.1.4 L.9  यत्पुनः ब्रह्मविकारत्वात् प्रतीकानां ब्रह्मत्वं ततश्च आत्मत्वमिति,
The argument that symbols being the effects of Brahman, are themselves of the nature of Brahman, and hence they are of the nature of the Self also,

4.1.4 L.10  तदसत्, प्रतीकाभाव-प्रसङ्गात्;
Is not correct because (in that case) there would then be the predicament of the non-existence of the symbol itself thus resulting.

4.1.4 L.11  विकारस्वरूपोपमर्देन हि नामादि-जातस्य ब्रह्मत्वमेव आश्रितं भवति।
It is only after the nature of the diverse effects such as Nāman etc. qua effects is destroyed, that it is possible to accept them as being of the nature of Brahman.

4.1.4 L.12  स्वरूपोपमर्दे च नामादीनां
When this nature of the effects i.e. Nāman etc. is destroyed,

4.1.4 L.13  कुतः प्रतीकत्वम् आत्मग्रहो वा?
How could they then have the nature of a symbol or how could they then be accepted as being of the nature of the Self?

4.1.4 L.14  न च ब्रह्मण आत्मत्वात् ब्रह्मदृष्ट्युपदेशेष्वात्म-दृष्टिः कल्प्या,
Because Brahman has the nature of the Self, it cannot be supposed, that in the instruction about the contemplation on Brahman, there is an instruction about the contemplation on the Self,

4.1.4 L.15  कर्तृत्वाद्यनिराकरणात्;
Because in the instruction about the contemplation on Brahman, the agentship (of the person meditating) is not dispensed with.

4.1.4 L.16  कर्तृत्वादिसर्वसंसारधर्म-निराकरणेन हि ब्रह्मण आत्मत्वोपदेशः;
The doing away of all the attributes of transmigratory nature such as agentship etc., is a sine qua non for the instruction that Brahman is the Self,

4.1.4 L.17  तदनिराकरणेन च उपासन-विधानम्।
While an injunction to meditate is given without doing away with such attributes as agents etc. (implicit in transmigratory existence).

4.1.4 L.18  अतश्च उपासकस्य प्रतीकैः समत्वात्
Hence, inasmuch as, both the persons meditating, and the symbol (the object of meditation) are similar (because neither are Brahman),

4.1.4 L.19  आत्मग्रहो नोपपद्यते;
That the symbol can be looked upon as the ‘Self’ is not reasonably sustainable.

4.1.4 L.20  न हि रुचक-स्वस्तिकयोः इतरेतरात्मत्वम् अस्ति;
A Rucaka (a kind of golden utensil) and a Sv-asti-ka (another kind of golden utensil) are not the self of each other (i.e. they are not identical).

4.1.4 L.21  सुवर्णात्मनेव तु
They are identical only as gold.

4.1.4 L.22  ब्रह्मात्मना एकत्वे प्रतीकाभाव-प्रसङ्गम् अवोचाम।
We have said already, that if symbols are considered to be of the nature of Brahman, there would then be the predicament of the non-existence of the symbol resulting.

4.1.4 L.23  अतो न प्रतीकेष्वात्मदृष्टिः क्रियते॥४॥
Therefore, the symbol is not looked upon as being the Self. — 4.

– 156. Pratīka-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
ब्रह्मदृष्टिरुत्कर्षात्॥४.१.५॥
Brahma-dṛṣṭir utkarṣāt.

Brahma-dṛṣṭiḥ: the view of Brahman, the view in the light of Brahman; Utkarṣāt: on account of superiority, because of super-eminence.

🔗 (The Āditya i.e. the Sun etc.) are to be looked upon as Brahman, because, that way there is exaltation (Utkarṣa) (of them). — 4.1.5.

4.1.5 L.1  तेष्वेव उदाहरणेष्वन्यः संशयः –
As regards the instances given (above), this other doubt arises, viz.,

4.1.5 L.2  किमादित्यादिदृष्टयो ब्रह्मण्यध्यसितव्याः,
As to whether, therein, Āditya etc. are to be looked upon as Brahman,

4.1.5 L.3  किं वा ब्रह्मदृष्टिरादित्यादिष्विति।
Or Brahman is to be looked upon as Āditya etc.

4.1.5 L.4  कुतः संशयः? सामानाधिकरण्ये कारणानवधारणात्;
Whence is there any such doubt? Because we do not know of any reason for both these having the same case-ending (Sāmānādhikaraṇya).

4.1.5 L.5  अत्र हि ब्रह्मशब्दस्य आदित्यादिशब्दैः सामानाधिकरण्यमुपलभ्यते,
Here, it is seen that the word Brahman has the same case-ending as the words ‘Āditya etc.’

4.1.5 L.6  ‘आदित्यो ब्रह्म’ ‘प्राणो ब्रह्म’ ‘विद्युद्ब्रह्म’
In the passages “Āditya (is) Brahman”, “Prāṇa (is) Brahman”, “Lightning (is) Brahman”.

4.1.5 L.7  इत्यादि-समानविभक्ति-निर्देशात्; न च अत्र आञ्जसं सामानाधिकरण्यम् अवकल्पते,
Here, the fact of their having the same case-ending is not clearly understood to be proper,

4.1.5 L.8  अर्थान्तरवचनत्वाद् ब्रह्मादित्यादि-शब्दानाम्;
Because the words ‘Brahman’ and ‘Āditya’ etc. have different meanings.

4.1.5 L.9  न हि भवति – गौरश्व इति सामानाधिकरण्यम्।
A sentence such as ‘The bull (is) a horse’ cannot be an instance of a proper coordination merely because of the fact that both have the same case-ending.


4.1.5 L.10  ननु प्रकृतिविकार-भावाद् ब्रह्मादित्यादीनां मृच्छरावादिवत्
But (it is argued by the opponent of Vedānta), as there is a relationship of cause and effect between Brahman and Āditya, just as there is for instance, between clay and a trough,

4.1.5 L.11  सामानाधिकरण्यं स्यात् –
There would be such coordination between them, by reason of their having the same case-ending.


4.1.5 L.12  नेत्युच्यते; विकारप्रविलयो ह्येवं प्रकृतिसामानाधिकरण्यात् स्यात्,
No, we reply. By such coordination resulting from their having the same case-ending, the effect qua an effect would be destroyed,

4.1.5 L.13  ततश्च प्रतीकाभाव-प्रसङ्गम् अवोचाम;
And it has already been stated by us, that there would then be the predicament of the non-existence of the symbol itself resulting,

4.1.5 L.14  परमात्मवाक्यं चेदं तदानीं स्यात्,
And this passage would then be a passage relating to the Highest Self,

4.1.5 L.15  ततश्चोपासनाधिकारो बाध्येत,
And thus the competency (of a man) to meditate would be affected,

4.1.5 L.16  परिमितविकारोपादानं च व्यर्थम्।
And a particular mention here of only a few limited entities (such as Āditya, Prāṇa and lightning, when all entities are equally the effects of Brahman), would be useless.

4.1.5 L.17  तस्मात् ‘ब्राह्मणोऽग्निर्वैश्वानरः’ इत्यादिवत् अन्यतरत्रान्यतरदृष्ट्यध्यासे सति,
Therefore when there is a superimposition of one entity on another, as in the passage “The Brāhmaṇa (is) the Vaiśvā-nara Agni”,

4.1.5 L.18  क्व किंदृष्टिरध्यस्यतामिति संशयः।
And there is a doubt as to what is to be superimposed on what,

4.1.5 L.19  तत्र अनियमः, नियमकारिणः शास्त्रस्याभावादित्येवं प्राप्तम्।
And the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) is, that in the absence of any Śāstra laying down the raison d’etre of such a rule, there could be no rule as to that,

4.1.5 L.20  अथवा आदित्यादिदृष्टय एव ब्रह्मणि कर्तव्या इत्येवं प्राप्तम्;
Or preferably, the conclusion is, that Brahman should be looked upon as being the Āditya etc.,

4.1.5 L.21  एवं हि आदित्यादिदृष्टिभिः ब्रह्म उपासितं भवति;
Because it is only by looking upon Brahman as the Āditya etc. in this way that there would be a meditation on Brahman,

4.1.5 L.22  ब्रह्मोपासनं च फलवदिति शास्त्रमर्यादा।
And the Śāstra also lays down that it is only the meditation on Brahman that has a fruit,

4.1.5 L.23  तस्मात् न ब्रह्मदृष्टिरादित्यादिषु
And that hence the Āditya should not be looked upon as Brahman.


4.1.5 L.24  इत्येवं प्राप्ते ब्रूमः – ब्रह्मदृष्टिरेव आदित्यादिषु स्यादिति।
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta),we reply — Āditya etc. should be looked upon as Brahman.

4.1.5 L.25  कस्मात्? उत्कर्षात्;
Whence is it so? Because of the exaltation (Utkarṣa).

4.1.5 L.26  एवम् उत्कर्षेण आदित्यादयो दृष्टा भवन्ति,
It is in this way that Āditya etc. would really be looked upon as exalted,

4.1.5 L.27  उत्कृष्टदृष्टेस्तेष्वध्यासात्;
Because the notion of their being exalted (viz., that they are Brahman) is superimposed on them.

4.1.5 L.28  तथा च लौकिको न्यायोऽनुगतो भवति;
The same thing is held good in ordinary life,

4.1.5 L.29  उत्कृष्टदृष्टिर्हि निकृष्टेऽध्यसितव्येति लौकिको न्यायः –
Which expects that the idea of exaltation should always be properly superimposed on an inferior entity,

4.1.5 L.30  यथा राजदृष्टिः क्षत्तरि;
As for instance when a king’s charioteer is looked upon as the king.

4.1.5 L.31  स च अनुसर्तव्यः विपर्यये प्रत्यवाय-प्रसङ्गात्;
The same rule aught also to be followed here, because to reverse the process would cause the predicament of a fault (Pratyavāya) being committed.

4.1.5 L.32  न हि क्षत्तृदृष्टिपरिगृहीतो राजा निकर्षं नीयमानः श्रेयसे स्यात्।
If a king is looked upon as a charioteer, and is thus lowered in estimation, it would not be proper.


4.1.5 L.33  ननु शास्त्रप्रामाण्यादनाशङ्कनीयोऽत्र प्रत्यवाय-प्रसङ्गः,
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) such a doubt about the predicament of a fault thus resulting should not be entertained, because of the authority of the Scriptures,

4.1.5 L.34  न च लौकिकेन न्यायेन शास्त्रीया दृष्टिर्नियन्तुं युक्तेति –
And it would not be logical to regulate the outlook of Śāstra by the canons of the ordinary world.


4.1.5 L.35  अत्रोच्यते – निर्धारिते शास्त्रार्थे एतदेवं स्यात्;
To this our reply is — This would be so, provided the meaning of the Śāstra happens to be properly determined,

4.1.5 L.36  सन्दिग्धे तु तस्मिन्,
But when the meaning of the Śāstra is doubtful,

4.1.5 L.37  तन्निर्णयं प्रति लौकिकोऽपि न्याय आश्रीयमाणो न विरुध्यते;
The application of the canons of ordinary life for clearing the ambiguity would not be wrong.

4.1.5 L.38  तेन च उत्कृष्टदृष्ट्यध्यासे शास्त्रार्थेऽवधार्यमाणे,
निकृष्टदृष्टिम् अध्यस्यन्प्रत्यवेयादिति श्लिष्यते।

So, it is but proper, that when the meaning of the Śāstra is duly ascertained to be in favour of the superimposition of the notion of an exalted status (on an inferior entity),
Any one who superimposes a low status (on a superior entity) would be going into an error.

4.1.5 L.39  प्राथम्याच्च आदित्यादि-शब्दानां
Besides, as the words ‘Āditya’ etc. come first (in the passage),

4.1.5 L.40  मुख्यार्थत्वम् अविरोधात् ग्रहीतव्यम्;
In the absence of any reason to the contrary, they ought to be understood in their primary sense.

4.1.5 L.41  तैः स्वार्थवृत्तिभिरवरुद्धायां बुद्धौ,
When therefore, that these words should be understood in their primary sense is thus fixed in our mind first,

4.1.5 L.42  पश्चादवतरतो ब्रह्मशब्दस्य मुख्यया वृत्त्या सामानाधिकरण्यासम्भवात्,
And the word ‘Brahman’ which comes to our mind later cannot be properly coordinated with the earlier words ‘Āditya’ etc. in a Sāmānādhikaraṇya sense, if it is understood in its primary sense,

4.1.5 L.43  ब्रह्मदृष्टिविधानार्थतैव अवतिष्ठते।
The only remaining alternative available, is, that it (i.e. the passage) enjoins the looking upon the first entity as Brahman.

4.1.5 L.44  इति-परत्वादपि ब्रह्मशब्दस्य एष एवार्थो न्याय्यः;
Besides as the word ‘as’ (Iti) is used in conjunction with the word ‘Brahman’ the same meaning is logical.

4.1.5 L.45  तथा हि – ‘ब्रह्मेत्यादेशः’ ‘ब्रह्मेत्युपासीत’ ‘ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते’
इति च सर्वत्रेतिपरं ब्रह्मशब्दमुच्चारयति,

For the Scriptures everywhere mention the word ‘Brahman’ in conjunction with the word ‘Iti’,
As for instance in “That it is as Brahman, is the instruction”; “That it is as Brahman, is how it should be meditated upon”, “That it is as Brahman, is how he meditates on it”,

4.1.5 L.46  शुद्धांस्तु आदित्यादि-शब्दान्;
While they mention only the mere words ‘Āditya’ etc.

4.1.5 L.47  ततश्च यथा शुक्तिकां रजतमिति प्रत्येतीत्यत्र,
Hence as in the sentence ‘He perceives the mother-of-pearl as silver’

4.1.5 L.48  शुक्ति-वचन एव शुक्तिका-शब्दः,
While the word ‘mother-of-pearl’ means the mother-of-pearl,

4.1.5 L.49  रजत-शब्दस्तु रजत-प्रतीतिलक्षणार्थः –
The word ‘silver’ means only the perception of silver (in the mother-of-pearl).

4.1.5 L.50  प्रत्येत्येव हि केवलं रजतमिति, न तु तत्र रजतमस्ति –
A man merely perceives it as silver, when actually no silver is there.

4.1.5 L.51  एवमत्रापि आदित्यादीन् ब्रह्मेति प्रतीयादिति गम्यते।
In the same way it is understood here also, that he should look upon ‘Āditya’ etc. as Brahman.

4.1.5 L.52  वाक्यशेषोऽपि च द्वितीया-निर्देशेन आदित्यादीनेव उपास्ति-क्रियया व्याप्यमानान् दर्शयति –
‘स य एतदेवं विद्वानादित्यं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते’ (ChanU.3.19.4)
‘यो वाचं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते’ (ChanU.7.2.2)
‘यः सङ्कल्पं ब्रह्मेत्युपास्ते’ (ChanU.7.4.3) इति च।

The complementary passages “He who knows this to be so, meditates on the Āditya as Brahman” (ChanU.3.19.4),
“Who meditates on ‘Speech’ as Brahman” (ChanU.7.22.1),
“Who meditates on a mental resolution (Saṅkalpa) as Brahman” (ChanU.7.4.3)
Also, by using the words Āditya etc. in the accusative case, indicate that the Āditya etc. are the objects of the act of meditation, by superimposing the idea of Brahman on them.


4.1.5 L.53  यत्तूक्तम् – ब्रह्मोपासनमेवात्र आदरणीयं फलवत्त्वायेति,
With regard to the statement (by the opponent of Vedānta) that it is Brahman that should be meditated upon for the purpose of the fruit (viz. Final Release),


4.1.5 L.54  तदयुक्तम्, उक्तेन न्यायेन आदित्यादीनामेव उपास्यत्वावगमात्;
We say that it is not proper, because as demonstrated above, it is the Āditya etc. that have to be meditated upon (as Brahman).

4.1.5 L.55  फलं तु अतिथ्याद्युपासन इव आदित्याद्युपासनेऽपि ब्रह्मैव दास्यति, सर्वाध्यक्षत्वात्;
As regards the fruit of such meditation (viz. Final Release), Brahman itself, which presides over every thing, will of course vouchsafe the fruit of the meditation on Āditya etc., as in the case of the service (Upāsanā) of a guest (Atithi).

4.1.5 L.56  वर्णितं चैतत् ‘फलमत उपपत्तेः’ (BrS.3.2.38) इत्यत्र।
This has been already described in the Sūtra — “The fruit (comes) from Him (the Lord) for it is reasonably sustainable” (Bra. Su. III. ii. 38).

4.1.5 L.57  ईदृशं च अत्र ब्रह्मण उपास्यत्वम्, यत्प्रतीकेषु तद्दृष्ट्यध्यारोपणम् –
When it is said that Brahman is the object of meditation, it is in the sense of the superimposition of the idea of Brahman on symbols,

4.1.5 L.58  प्रतिमादिष्विव विष्ण्वादीनाम्॥५॥
Just as there is the superimposition of Viṣṇu etc. on images etc. — 5.

– 157. Brahma-dṛṭṣy-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
आदित्यादिमतयश्चाङ्ग उपपत्तेः॥४.१.६॥
Ādityādimatayaś cāṅga upapatteḥ.

Āditya-ādi-matayaḥ: the idea of the sun, etc.; Ca: and; Aṅge: in a subordinate member (of the sacrificial acts); Upapatteḥ: because of consistency, because of its reasonableness.

🔗 Notions of Āditya etc. (are to be superimposed) on the subordinate parts (i.e. Aṅgas of sacrificial acts), because it is reasonably sustainable. — 4.1.6.

4.1.6 L.1  ‘य एवासौ तपति तमुद्गीथमुपासीत’ (ChanU.1.3.1)
‘लोकेषु पञ्चविधꣳ सामोपासीत’ (ChanU.2.2.1)
‘वाचि सप्तविधꣳ सामोपासीत’ (ChanU.2.8.1)
‘इयमेवर्गग्निः साम’ (ChanU.1.6.1)
इत्येवमादिषु अङ्गावबद्धेषूपासनेषु

As regards meditations which relate to the subordinate parts (i.e. Aṅgas of sacrificial acts) such as
“He (the Sun) who shines, should be meditated upon as Udgītha” (ChanU.1.3.1),
“The worlds should be meditated upon as five-fold Sāman” (ChanU.2.2.1),
“‘Speech’ (Vāk) should be meditated upon as the seven-fold Sāman” (ChanU.2.8.1),
“This (very Earth) (is) the Ṛk and the Agni (is) the Sāman” (ChanU.1.6.1),

4.1.6 L.2  संशयः – किमादित्यादिषु उद्गीथादिदृष्टयो विधीयन्ते,
A doubt arises, as to whether it is enjoined, that the Āditya etc. should be looked upon as the Udgītha

4.1.6 L.3  किं वा उद्गीथादिष्वेव आदित्यादिदृष्टय इति।
Or that the Udgīṭha etc. should be looked upon as the Āditya etc.


4.1.6 L.4  तत्र अनियमः, नियमकारणाभावात् – इति प्राप्तम्;
With regard to that, the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) is that there is no rule as to that, on account of the absence of any reason for any such rule.

4.1.6 L.5  न हि अत्र ब्रह्मण इव कस्यचिदुत्कर्षविशेषोऽवधार्यते;
Here, it is not understood that there is any special exaltation of anything in particular, as there is in the case of Brahman.

4.1.6 L.6  ब्रह्म हि समस्तजगत्कारणत्वात्
अपहतपाप्मत्वादि-गुणयोगाच्च
आदित्यादिभ्य उत्कृष्टमिति शक्यम् अवधारयितुम्;

It is possible to understand that Brahman is more exalted than the Āditya etc.,
By reason of its being the cause of the world
And because of its being endowed with the nature of being free from sin,

4.1.6 L.7  न तु आदित्योद्गीथादीनां विकारत्वाविशेषात् किञ्चिदुत्कर्षविशेषावधारणे कारणमस्ति।
But there happens to be no reason to understand any reason for understanding that there is any special exaltation in the case of the Āditya and the Udgīṭha, inasmuch as, the nature of being but effects only, is common to them both.

4.1.6 L.8  अथवा नियमेनैव उद्गीथादिमतय आदित्यादिषु अध्यस्येरन्।
Or rather, (we think, that) the notions of Udgīṭha etc. should as a rule be superimposed on the Āditya etc.

4.1.6 L.9  कस्मात्? कर्मात्मकत्वादुद्गीथादीनाम्,
Whence is it so? Because Udgītha etc. are of the nature of sacrificial acts,

4.1.6 L.10  कर्मणश्च फलप्राप्तिप्रसिद्धेः;
And because it is well-known that it is through such acts that fruits are obtained.

4.1.6 L.11  उद्गीथादिमतिभिरुपास्यमाना आदित्यादयः कर्मात्मकाः सन्तः फलहेतवो भविष्यन्ति।
Āditya etc. when meditated upon with the notions of their being the Udgīṭha etc. may themselves acquire the nature of religious acts and may thus become the cause of the acquisition of fruits.

4.1.6 L.12  तथा च ‘इयमेवर्गग्निः साम’ (ChanU.1.6.1) इत्यत्र
For the Scriptures, by the passages “This (very Earth) (is) the Ṛk, this Agni (is) the Sāman” (ChanU.1.6.1),

4.1.6 L.13  ‘तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढं साम’ (ChanU.1.6.1)
And by (the complementary passage) “That this Sāman is superimposed on this Ṛk” (ChanU.1.6.1),

4.1.6 L.14  इति ऋक्शब्देन पृथिवीं निर्दिशति, सामशब्देनाग्निम्;
Indicate the Earth by the word Ṛk, and Agni by the word Sāman,

4.1.6 L.15  तच्च पृथिव्यग्न्योः ऋक्सामदृष्टिचिकीर्षायामवकल्पते,
Which is possible only when it is desired to look upon the Earth and the Agni as the Ṛk and Sāman respectively

4.1.6 L.16  न ऋक्सामयोः पृथिव्यग्निदृष्टिचिकीर्षायाम्;
And not when it is desired to look upon the Ṛk and Sāman as the Earth and Agni.

4.1.6 L.17  क्षत्तरि हि राजदृष्टिकरणात् राजशब्द उपचर्यते,
It is when the charioteer is looked upon as the king, that the word ‘King’ happens to be used metaphorically for the charioteer,

4.1.6 L.18  न राजनि क्षत्तृशब्दः।
But the word ‘charioteer’ is never so used metaphorically for the king.

4.1.6 L.19  अपि च ‘लोकेषु पञ्चविधꣳ सामोपासीत’ (ChanU.2.2.1)
इति अधिकरणनिर्देशात् लोकेषु साम अध्यसितव्यमिति प्रतीयते;

Besides, by the use of the locative case (Adhikaraṇa) in connection with the word ‘worlds’,
In the passage “The worlds should be meditated upon by looking upon them as the five-fold Sāman”,
It is understood, that it is the Sāman that is to be superimposed on the worlds.

4.1.6 L.20  ‘एतद्गायत्रं प्राणेषु प्रोतम्’ (ChanU.2.11.1) इति च एतदेव दर्शयति।
In the Scriptural passage “This Gāyatra (Sāman) (in which the five-fold Sāman is considered to be the five Prāṇas i.e. the sense-organs) is woven into the Prāṇas” (ChanU.2.11.1) also, it is indicated similarly.

4.1.6 L.21  प्रथमनिर्दिष्टेषु च आदित्यादिषु चरमनिर्दिष्टं ब्रह्माध्यस्तम् –
‘आदित्यो ब्रह्मेत्यादेशः’ (ChanU.3.19.1) इत्यादिषु;

In the Scriptural passage “That Āditya is Brahman, is the instruction” (ChanU.3.19.1),
Brahman, which is referred to after Āditya, is to be superimposed on Āditya etc. which are referred to first.

4.1.6 L.22  प्रथमनिर्दिष्टाश्च पृथिव्यादयः, चरमनिर्दिष्टा हिंकारादयः –
‘पृथिवी हिंकारः’ (ChanU.2.2.1) इत्यादिश्रुतिषु।

In the Scriptural passage “The Earth is the Hiṅ-kāra” (ChanU.2.2.1) again,
The Earth etc. are referred to first, and the Hiṅ-kāra etc. are referred to afterwards.

4.1.6 L.23  अतः अनङ्गेष्वादित्यादिषु अङ्गमतिक्षेप
Hence the notion of the subordinate parts (of a sacrificial act) are to be superimposed on Āditya etc. which are not such subordinate parts (of action i.e. Karma).


4.1.6 L.24  इत्येवं प्राप्ते ब्रूमः – आदित्यादिमतय एव अङ्गेषु उद्गीथादिषु क्षिप्येरन्।
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) we reply — It is the notions of Āditya etc., that should of course be superimposed on such subordinate parts (of sacrificial acts) as the Udgītha etc.

4.1.6 L.25  कुतः? उपपत्तेः;
Whence is it so? Because, it is reasonably so sustainable.

4.1.6 L.26  उपपद्यते हि एवम् अपूर्वसन्निकर्षात् आदित्यादिमतिभिः संस्क्रियमाणेषु उद्गीथादिषु कर्मसमृद्धिः।
It is reasonably sustainable, that it is only when the Udgītha etc. undergo refinement by the superimposition of the notions of Āditya on them, that on account of the contact with the Apūrva (lit., the remote consequence of an act, here, the merit of such religious acts) the religious acts attain greater augmentation.

4.1.6 L.27  ‘यदेव विद्यया करोति श्रद्धयोपनिषदा तदेव वीर्यवत्तरं भवति’ (ChanU.1.1.10) इति च
विद्यायाः कर्मसमृद्धिहेतुत्वं दर्शयति।

The Scriptural passage “Whatever (religious act) he performs with knowledge, faith, and meditation (on the deities), that alone becomes more potent” (ChanU.1.1.10)
Indicates that knowledge (Vidyā) is the cause which makes a religious act more potent.


4.1.6 L.28  भवतु कर्मसमृद्धिफलेष्वेवम्;
But (says the opponent of Vedānta), this may be so, in the case of actions which are made more potent by such meditations,

4.1.6 L.29  स्वतन्त्रफलेषु तु कथम् –
But what is the position (Katham) with regard to actions which have their own independent fruit,

4.1.6 L.30  ‘य एतदेवं विद्वाँल्लोकेषु पञ्चविधं सामोपास्ते’ (ChanU.2.2.3) इत्यादिषु?
As is seen for instance, in the Scriptural passage “He who, knowing this, meditates on these worlds by looking upon them as the five-fold Sāman” (ChanU.2.2.3)?


4.1.6 L.31  तेष्वपि अधिकृताधिकारात् प्रकृतापूर्व-सन्निकर्षेणैव फलकल्पना युक्ता,
(We reply) — Even in that case, because it is only those who are competent that can engage themselves in such meditation, it is logical to hold, that the fruit is obtained as a result of the relation of the aforesaid Apūrva to the meditation,

4.1.6 L.32  गोदोहनादि-नियमवत्।
As it is for instance, in the case of the rule about the Go-dohana (Milk-pail).

4.1.6 L.33  फलात्मकत्वाच्च आदित्यादीनाम् उद्गीथादिभ्यः कर्मात्मकेभ्यः उत्कर्षोपपत्तिः;
Besides, inasmuch as Āditya etc. have themselves the nature of (vouchsafing) a fruit, it is reasonably sustainable to understand that they are more exalted than the Udgītha etc. which are of the nature of a religious act.

4.1.6 L.34  आदित्यादिप्राप्तिलक्षणं हि कर्मफलं शिष्यते श्रुतिषु।
Moreover the Scriptures teach us that the fruit of religious acts is of the nature of the attainment of Āditya etc.

4.1.6 L.35  अपि च ‘ओमित्येतदक्षरमुद्गीथमुपासीत’ (ChanU.1.1.1)
‘खल्वेतस्यैवाक्षरस्योपव्याख्यानं भवति’ (ChanU.1.1.10) इति च
उद्गीथमेव उपास्यत्वेनोपक्रम्य,

Besides, the Scriptures by mentioning in the beginning that the Udgītha is something that should be meditated upon by the passage
“The letter ‘Om’ is the Udgītha and it should be meditated upon. The following is the further explanation of Udgītha” (ChanU.1.1.1),

4.1.6 L.36  आदित्यादिमतीर्विदधाति।
Later on enjoin this notion of looking upon them as Āditya.


4.1.6 L.37  यत्तूक्तम् – उद्गीथादिमतिभिरुपास्यमाना आदित्यादयः कर्मभूयं भूत्वा फलं करिष्यन्तीति,
The statement (by the opponent of Vedānta) that the Āditya etc. meditated upon as the Udgītha etc. would themselves acquire the nature of a religious act and yield a fruit,


4.1.6 L.38  तदयुक्तम्, स्वयमेवोपासनस्य कर्मत्वात् फलवत्त्वोपपत्तेः।
Is not proper, because meditation itself being a religious act, it would be reasonably sustainable that meditation itself would yield a fruit,

4.1.6 L.39  आदित्यादिभावेनापि च दृश्यमानानामुद्गीथादीनां कर्मात्मकत्वानपायात्।
And also because Udgītha etc. even though looked upon as Āditya etc. would not thereby lose their nature of being religious acts.

4.1.6 L.40  ‘तदेतदेतस्यामृच्यध्यूढꣳ साम’ (ChanU.1.6.1) इति तु लाक्षणिक एव पृथिव्यग्न्योः ऋक्सामशब्द-प्रयोगः;
The use of the words ‘Ṛk and Sāman’ for the Earth and the Agni respectively, in the Scriptural passage “That Sāman is superimposed on the Ṛk” (ChanU.1.6.1), is by way of an indirect application (Lakṣaṇā).

4.1.6 L.41  लक्षणा च यथासम्भवं सन्निकृष्टेन विप्रकृष्टेन वा स्वार्थसम्बन्धेन प्रवर्तते;
Indirect application (Lakṣaṇā) is promoted by its possible proximate or even distant relation as the case may be, to the primary meaning (of the word).

4.1.6 L.42  तत्र यद्यपि ऋक्सामयोः पृथिव्यग्निदृष्टिचिकीर्षा,
Hence even though it is desired here that the Ṛk and Sāman are to be looked upon as the Earth and Agni,

4.1.6 L.43  तथापि प्रसिद्धयोः ऋक्सामयोर्भेदेनानुकीर्तनात्,
Still, inasmuch as such well-known entities as Ṛk and Sāman have been separately mentioned,

4.1.6 L.44  पृथिव्यग्न्योश्च सन्निधानात्,
And again inasmuch as the entities, Earth and Agni are proximate to them,

4.1.6 L.45  तयोरेव एष ऋक्सामशब्द-प्रयोगः ऋक्साम-सम्बन्धादिति निश्चीयते;
Therefore, the Ṛk and Sāman thus being related to Earth and Agni, it is definitely ascertained that the words Ṛk and Sāman are used synonymously for the Earth and Agni respectively.

4.1.6 L.46  क्षत्तृशब्दोऽपि हि कुतश्चित्कारणाद् राजानमुपसर्पन् न निवारयितुं पार्यते।
Again, it is not possible to prevent the word ‘charioteer’ from proceeding to denote a king, for some reason or other (as for instance when the king chooses to take up the reins in his own hand, and do the work of a charioteer).

4.1.6 L.47  ‘इयमेवर्क्’ (ChanU.1.6.1) इति च
यथाक्षरन्यासम् ऋच एव पृथिवीत्वम् अवधारयति;

The Scriptural passage “This (Earth) itself, is the Ṛk (Iyam eva Ṛk)” (ChanU.1.6.1),
Because of the order in which the words (earth and Ṛk) are mentioned, makes it understood that it is the Ṛk that is of the nature of the Earth.

4.1.6 L.48  पृथिव्या हि ऋक्त्वेऽवधार्यमाणे –
If the Scriptures had meant it to be understood that the earth was of the nature of the Ṛk, the order of the words would have been —

4.1.6 L.49  इयमृगेवेत्यक्षरन्यासः स्यात्।
This (i.e. the Earth) is but the Ṛk only (Iyam Ṛk Eva).

4.1.6 L.50  ‘य एवं विद्वान्साम गायति’ (ChanU.1.7.7) इति च
अङ्गाश्रयमेव विज्ञानम् उपसंहरति, न पृथिव्याद्याश्रयम्।

Besides the Scriptural passage “He who knowing thus, sings Sāman” (ChanU.1.7.7)
Concludes that the meditation is upon the subordinate part (i.e. Aṅga of a religious act) and not upon the earth.

4.1.6 L.51  तथा ‘लोकेषु पञ्चविधꣳ सामोपासीत’ (ChanU.2.2.1) इति
यद्यपि सप्तमीनिर्दिष्टा लोकाः, तथापि साम्न्येव ते अध्यस्येरन्,

Similarly, in the Scriptural passage “The worlds may be meditated upon as the five-fold Sāman”,
Even though the word ‘world’ is governed by the locative case (Lokeṣu), it is the worlds that are to be superimposed on the five-fold Sāman,

4.1.6 L.52  द्वितीयानिर्देशेन साम्न उपास्यत्वावगमात्;
Because it is understood from the word Sāman which is governed by the accusative case, that it is the Sāman that is the object of meditation.

4.1.6 L.53  सामनि हि लोकेष्वध्यस्यमानेषु साम लोकात्मनोपासितं भवति,
When the worlds are superimposed on Sāman, it is that Sāman which is meditated upon as the worlds,

4.1.6 L.54  अन्यथा पुनः लोकाः सामात्मना उपासिताः स्युः।
Or otherwise it would be the worlds that would happen to be meditated upon as Sāman.

4.1.6 L.55  एतेन ‘एतद्गायत्रं प्राणेषु प्रोतम्’ (ChanU.2.11.1) इत्यादि व्याख्यातम्।
This discussion should be understood as explaining the Scriptural passage “This Gāyatra (Sāman) is woven into the Prāṇas” (ChanU.2.11.1),

4.1.6 L.56  यत्रापि तुल्यो द्वितीयानिर्देशः ‘अथ खल्वमुमादित्यꣳ सप्तविधꣳ सामोपासीत’ (ChanU.2.9.1) इति,
Where also the Scriptures use the accusative case equally for both (the words), as in the passage “Now verily this seven-fold Sāman should be meditated upon as Āditya” (ChanU.2.9.1).

4.1.6 L.57  तत्रापि – ‘समस्तस्य खलु साम्न उपासनꣳ साधु’ (ChanU.2.1.1)
‘इति तु पञ्चविधस्य’ (ChanU.2.7.2)
‘अथ सप्तविधस्य’ (ChanU.2.8.1) इति च
साम्न एव उपास्यत्वोपक्रमात् –

As the introductory portion shows the Sāman as the entity to be meditated upon, thus — “Verily meditation on the whole Sāman is good” (ChanU.2.1.1),
“Now about the five-fold” (ChanU.2.7.2),
“And now about the seven-fold” (ChanU.2.8.1),

4.1.6 L.58  तस्मिन्नेव आदित्याद्यध्यासः।
It is the Āditya etc. that are to be superimposed on it (i.e. the Sāman).

4.1.6 L.59  एतस्मादेव च साम्न उपास्यत्वावगमात्
It is precisely because it is understood that it is the Sāman that is to be the object of meditation,

4.1.6 L.60  ‘पृथिवी हिंकारः’ (ChanU.2.2.1) इत्यादिनिर्देश-विपर्ययेऽपि
That even when the Scriptural indication is the opposite way, such as “The Earth is the Hiṅ-kāra” (ChanU.2.2.1),

4.1.6 L.61  हिंकारादिष्वेव पृथिव्यादिदृष्टिः।
It is Hiṅ-kāra etc. that are to be looked upon as the Earth etc.

4.1.6 L.62  तस्मात् अनङ्गाश्रया आदित्यादिमतयः अङ्गेषूद्गीथादिषु क्षिप्येरन्निति सिद्धम्॥६॥
Therefore it is thus proved that the notions of Āditya etc., which do not rest on any subordinate part (of a religious act) are to be superimposed on the Udgīṭha etc. which are such subordinate parts of religious acts. — 6.

– 158. Āditya-ādy-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.1.7 Su..8 Su..9 Su..10

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
आसीनः सम्भवात्॥४.१.७॥
Āsīnaḥ sambhavāt.

Āsīnaḥ: sitting; Sambhavāt: on account of the possibility.

🔗 (The person meditating must be) in a sitting posture, because (it is only that way that meditation) is possible. — 4.1.7.

4.1.7 L.1  कर्माङ्ग-सम्बद्धेषु तावत् उपासनेषु कर्मतन्त्रत्वात् न आसनादि-चिन्ता;
There could be no question of the consideration about posture etc. in the case of meditations relating to the subordinate parts of religious actions, inasmuch as they are regulated by the religious actions themselves,

4.1.7 L.2  नापि सम्यग्दर्शने, वस्तुतन्त्रत्वाद् विज्ञानस्य;
Nor can there be any such question in the case of the correct i.e. perfect intuitive knowledge (of an entity such as Brahman), as the knowledge of such an entity depends upon such intuitive knowledge of the entity itself.

4.1.7 L.3  इतरेषु तु उपासनेषु
किम् अनियमेन तिष्ठन् आसीनः शयानो वा प्रवर्तेत
उत नियमेन आसीन एवेति चिन्तयति।

But with regard to other meditations,
The Sūtra-kāra now proceeds to consider, whether they should as a rule be performed in a sitting posture
Or whether a man should set about to perform them, regardless of any such rule, whether he be standing, sitting, or lying down, just as he pleases.


4.1.7 L.4  तत्र मानसत्वादुपासनस्य अनियमः शरीरस्थितेः
With regard to this, the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) is, that inasmuch as meditation is a mental act, there could be no rule with regard to the bodily posture.


4.1.7 L.5  इत्येवं प्राप्ते, ब्रवीति – आसीन एवोपासीतेति।
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) the Sūtra-kāra replies — A person should meditate in a sitting posture only.

4.1.7 L.6  कुतः? सम्भवात्।
Whence is it so? Because it is possible (only in that posture).

4.1.7 L.7  उपासनं नाम समानप्रत्यय-प्रवाहकरणम्;
Meditation indeed is the setting up of a continuous stream of homogeneous mental apprehensions,

4.1.7 L.8  न च तत् गच्छतो धावतो वा सम्भवति,
Which is not possible when a person is either walking or running,

4.1.7 L.9  गत्यादीनां चित्तविक्षेपकरत्वात्;
As motion etc. of any kind are prone to distract the mind.

4.1.7 L.10  तिष्ठतोऽपि देहधारणे व्यापृतं मनो न सूक्ष्मवस्तु-निरीक्षणक्षमं भवति;
In the case of a man standing also, inasmuch as the mind is preoccupied in maintaining the body in an erect posture, it is not capable of realizing a supersensuous entity.

4.1.7 L.11  शयानस्यापि अकस्मादेव निद्रया अभिभूयते;
A man in a recumbent posture is prone to be suddenly overpowered by sleep.

4.1.7 L.12  आसीनस्य तु एवंजातीयको भूयान्दोषः सुपरिहर इति
But, in the case of a man in a sitting posture, many such faults are easily avoidable

4.1.7 L.13  सम्भवति तस्योपासनम्॥७॥
And meditation by him is thus possible. — 7.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
ध्यानाच्च॥४.१.८॥
Dhyānāc ca.

Dhyānāt: on account of meditation; Ca: and.

🔗 Also because (of meditation being) of the nature of steadfast concentration of thought. — 4.1.8.

4.1.8 L.1  अपि च ध्यायत्यर्थ एषः, यत्समानप्रत्यय-प्रवाहकरणम्;
Besides, to concentrate on a thought steadfastly is but the setting up of a continuous stream of homogeneous mental apprehensions.

4.1.8 L.2  ध्यायतिश्च प्रशिथिलाङ्ग-चेष्टेषु प्रतिष्ठितदृष्टिषु एकविषयाक्षिप्त-चित्तेषु उपचर्यमाणो दृश्यते –
The term ‘steadfast concentration of thought’ is seen to be used in a secondary sense, when bodily movements are perfectly relaxed, the vision is fixed (as in a brown-study), and the mind is absorbed in a single object, as for instance,

4.1.8 L.3  ध्यायति बकः, ध्यायति प्रोषितबन्धुरिति।
When we speak of a crane watching intently (for a fish) or of a grass widow (a Proṣita-bandhu i.e. a woman whose husband is absent on a journey) watching intently with steadfast devotion (her traveller-husband’s return).

4.1.8 L.4  आसीनश्च अनायासो भवति;
This can be accomplished with ease in a sitting posture.

4.1.8 L.5  तस्मादपि आसीनकर्मोपासनम्॥८॥
Therefore, also, meditation is an act to be performed in a sitting posture. — 8.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अचलत्वं चापेक्ष्य॥४.१.९॥
Acalatvaṃ cāpekṣya.

A-calatvam: immobility, stability, steadiness; Ca: and, indeed; Apekṣya: referring to, aiming at, pointing to.

🔗 It is with reference to the steadfastness (of the earth even while rotating, that the Scriptures have used that term in steadfast concentration in the case of the earth). — 4.1.9.

4.1.9 L.1  अपि च ‘ध्यायतीव पृथिवी’ (ChanU.7.6.1) इत्यत्र
In the Scriptural passage “The Earth is, as it were, in (a condition of) steady concentration (of thought)” (ChanU.7.6.1),

4.1.9 L.2  पृथिव्यादिषु अचलत्वमेवापेक्ष्य ध्यायतिवादो भवति;
The statement about such concentration of thought is used in reference to the Earth’s (apparent) want of movement.

4.1.9 L.3  तच्च लिङ्गम् उपासनस्य आसीनकर्मत्वे॥९॥
That is a Scriptural indicatory mark for holding, that meditation is an act to be performed in a sitting posture. — 9.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
स्मरन्ति च॥४.१.१०॥
Smaranti ca.

Smaranti: the Smṛti texts say, it is mentioned in the Smṛtis; Ca: also.

🔗 The Smṛtis also say similarly. — 4.1.10.

4.1.10 L.1  स्मरन्त्यपि च शिष्टा उपासनाङ्गत्वेन आसनम् –
The learned Smṛti-kāras also speak of the sitting posture (Āsana) as a subordinate part of meditation, thus —

4.1.10 L.2  ‘शुचौ देशे प्रतिष्ठाप्य स्थिरमासनमात्मनः’ (BhG.6.11) इत्यादिना।
“Having taken up a firm sitting posture for oneself in a hallowed place etc.” (BhG.6.11).

4.1.10 L.3  अत एव पद्मकादीनाम् आसनविशेषाणाम् उपदेशो योगशास्त्रे॥१०॥
Hence also, the Yoga-Śāstra gives instructions about such special postures as Padmaka (the lotus posture — i.e. sitting, right foreleg on left thigh and left foreleg on right thigh). — 10.

– 159. Āsīna-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
यत्रैकाग्रता तत्राविशेषात्॥४.१.११॥
Yatraikāgratā tatrāviśeṣāt.

Yatra: where, wherever; Eka-agratā: concentration of mind; Tatra: there; A-viśeṣāt: for want of any specification, it not being specifically mentioned, as there is no special direction in Śruti.

🔗 Because, no particular (rules are mentioned, meditation should he performed) wherever concentration of mind (can he attained). — 4.1.11.

4.1.11 L.1  दिग्देशकालेषु संशयः – किमस्ति कश्चिन्नियमः, नास्ति वेति।
As regards the direction, environment or time (in which meditation should be performed), a doubt (arises), as to whether there is or is not any rule (governing it).

4.1.11 L.2  प्रायेण वैदिकेष्वारम्भेषु दिगादिनियमदर्शनात्,
स्यादिहापि कश्चिन्नियम इति यस्य मतिः,
तं प्रत्याह –

The Sūtra-kāra answers the opponent of Vedānta,
Who considers, that there may be some sort of rule as to that,
Inasmuch as it is observed that usually in the case of Vedic actions there is a rule as to the direction etc.,

4.1.11 L.3  दिग्देशकालेषु अर्थलक्षण एव नियमः;
That a rule as to direction etc. in connection with the aim (of such meditation) does exist by implication, thus: —

4.1.11 L.4  यत्रैव अस्य दिशि देशे काले वा मनसः सौकर्येणैकाग्रता भवति,
तत्रैवोपासीत, प्राचीदिक्-पूर्वाह्ण-प्राचीनप्रवणादिवत् विशेषाश्रवणात्,
एकाग्रताया इष्टायाः सर्वत्राविशेषात्।

As there is no special Scriptural mention about any rule about meditation, as there is in Sacrifices etc., as regards the eastern direction, or forenoon, or a site sloping towards the east, one should perform meditation wherever
And in whichever direction, and whenever, concentration of mind can be secured with ease,
Because such concentration of mind is possible anywhere.


4.1.11 L.5  ननु विशेषमपि केचिदामनन्ति –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) some do mention such special rules as for instance —

4.1.11 L.6  ‘समे शुचौ शर्करावह्निवालुकाविवर्जिते शब्दजलाश्रयादिभिः।
मनोनुकूले न तु चक्षुपीडने गुहानिवाताश्रयणे प्रयोजयेत्’ (SvetU.2.10) इति यथेति –

“One should meditate in a level place which is clean and is free from pebbles, fire, sand etc. and also free from noise and ponds etc.
And in a place which is agreeable to the mind, but not in a place where there are mosquitoes etc. which are troublesome to the eye, i.e. in a cave etc. where the air is still and calm” (SvetU.2.10).


4.1.11 L.7  उच्यते; सत्यमस्ति एवंजातीयको नियमः;
The reply given is — No doubt there is such a kind of rule

4.1.11 L.8  सति त्वेतस्मिन्, तद्गतेषु विशेषेष्वनियम इति सुहृद्भूत्वा आचार्य आचष्टे।
But such a rule being there, the Ācārya as a friend hints that there is no special rule about the special things mentioned in that rule.

4.1.11 L.9  ‘मनोनुकूले’ इति चैषा श्रुतिः यत्रैकाग्रता तत्रैव – इत्येतदेव दर्शयति॥११॥
The expression ‘agreeable to the mind’ indicates this very thing, viz. that meditation should be performed, in such places wherever there is concentration of mind. — 11.

– 160. Eka-agratā-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
आ प्रायणात्तत्रापि हि दृष्टम्॥४.१.१२॥
Ā prāyaṇāt tatrāpi hi dṛṣṭam.

Ā prāyaṇāt: till death, till Mukti; Tatra: there, then; Api: also, even; Hi: because; Dṛṣṭam: is seen (in the Śruti).

🔗 There should he repetition of meditations, right up to the time of death, because it is observed to be so, even at that moment. — 4.1.12.

4.1.12 L.1  आवृत्तिः सर्वोपासनेष्वादर्तव्येति स्थितमाद्येऽधिकरणे;
In the first Adhikaraṇa it was concluded that there should be repetition of all meditations.

4.1.12 L.2  तत्र यानि तावत् सम्यग्दर्शनार्थान्युपासनानि, तानि अवघातादिवत् कार्यपर्यवसानानीति
So far as that is concerned, as such meditations for the purpose of correct i.e. perfect knowledge, should, as in the case of the pounding (of rice etc.), ultimately culminate in the achievement of the objective viz. correct i.e. perfect knowledge,

4.1.12 L.3  ज्ञातमेव एषाम् आवृत्तिपरिमाणम्;
The extent of their repetition has of course been understood already.

4.1.12 L.4  न हि सम्यग्दर्शने कार्ये निष्पन्ने यत्नान्तरं किञ्चिच्छासितुं शक्यम्,
When the effect of meditation viz. correct i.e. perfect knowledge, is achieved, it is not possible to enjoin any further effort (of meditation)

4.1.12 L.5  अनियोज्यब्रह्मात्मत्व-प्रतिपत्तेः शास्त्रस्याविषयत्वात्।
Because, as Brahman is the Self of all and is not something which can be enjoined (on a man), it cannot be the province of a Śāstra.

4.1.12 L.6  यानि पुनः अभ्युदय-फलानि,
With respect to meditations which have the fruit of the nature of secular prosperity, however,

4.1.12 L.7  तेष्वेषा चिन्ता – किं कियन्तंचित्कालं प्रत्ययम् आवर्त्य उपरमेत्,
There is scope for consideration as to whether one should stop after repeating such meditations for some time,

4.1.12 L.8  उत यावज्जीवम् आवर्तयेदिति।
Or whether they should be repeated as long as one continues to live.


4.1.12 L.9  किं तावत्प्राप्तम्?
What then is the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta)?

4.1.12 L.10  कियन्तंचित्कालं प्रत्ययम् अभ्यस्य उत्सृजेत्,
It is, that meditation having been performed for some time, should be given up,

4.1.12 L.11  आवृत्तिविशिष्टस्योपासनशब्दार्थस्य कृतत्वाद्
Because the Scriptural requirement of ‘meditation’ in which such repetition is implicit, is thereby achieved.


4.1.12 L.12  इत्येवं प्राप्ते, ब्रूमः –
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) we reply: —

4.1.12 L.13  आ प्रायणादेव आवर्तयेत् प्रत्ययम्,
Meditation should be repeated right up to the time of death,

4.1.12 L.14  अन्त्यप्रत्यय-वशाद् अदृष्टफल-प्राप्तेः;
Because the acquisition of the invisible fruit of meditation is dependent upon the final act of the acquisition of knowledge (Antya-pratyaya).

4.1.12 L.15  कर्माण्यपि हि जन्मान्तरोपभोग्यं फलमारभमाणानि
Religious acts which begin to produce the fruit to be enjoyed during the next birth,

4.1.12 L.16  तदनुरूपं भावनाविज्ञानं प्रायणकाले आक्षिपन्ति –
Require (Akṣipanti) the knowledge of the nature of i.e. the conception of, such fruit, at the time of death,

4.1.12 L.17  ‘सविज्ञानो भवति सविज्ञानमेवान्ववक्रामति’
‘यच्चित्तस्तेनैष प्राणमायाति प्राणस्तेजसा युक्तः सहात्मना यथासङ्कल्पितं लोकं नयति’
इति चैवमादिश्रुतिभ्यः;

According to Scriptural passages such as
“He becomes endowed with special consciousness of desires, he follows the subtle body (Liṅga-Śarīra) which has such special consciousness of desires” (BrhU.4.4.2),
“He approaches the Prāṇa with whatsoever he has in his mind. This Prāṇa conjointly with Tejas, takes him along with the Self, to the desired world” (PrasU.3.10).

4.1.12 L.18  तृणजलूका-निदर्शनाच्च;
(This is so), also because of the illustration of the caterpillar on the grass (while connected from the previous, the caterpillar connects to the next blade).

4.1.12 L.19  प्रत्ययास्त्वेते स्वरूपानुवृत्तिं मुक्त्वा किमन्यत् प्रायणकाल-भावि भावना-विज्ञानम् अपेक्षेरन्।
But so far as these meditations are concerned, what knowledge of desires other than that which accrues at the time of death, apart from the repetition of such meditations, can such meditations expect?

4.1.12 L.20  तस्मात् ये प्रतिपत्तव्यफल-भावनात्मकाः प्रत्ययाः, तेषु आ प्रायणात् आवृत्तिः।
Therefore, there ought to be a repetition of the meditations, which are of the nature or the conception of the knowledge of the desire of the fruit to be obtained at the time of death.

4.1.12 L.21  तथा च श्रुतिः – ‘स यावत्क्रतुरयमस्माल्लोकात्प्रैति’ इति
For even so does the Scriptural passage “With whatever special desire he departs from this world”

4.1.12 L.22  प्रायणकालेऽपि प्रत्ययानुवृत्तिं दर्शयति।
Indicate the repetition of the act of meditation, even at the time of death.

4.1.12 L.23  स्मृतिरपि – ‘यं यं वापि स्मरन्भावं त्यजत्यन्ते कलेवरम्।
तं तमेवैति कौन्तेय सदा तद्भावभावितः’ (BhG.8.6) इति,
‘प्रयाणकाले मनसाचलेन’ (BhG.8.10) इति च।

The Smṛti also says — “With whatever desire in mind he departs from the body at the end,
To that object of desire, Oh son of Kuntī, obsessed as he is with that desire, he goes” (BhG.8.6),
“With a steadfast mind, at the time of departure (from the body)” (BhG.8.10).

4.1.12 L.24  ‘सोऽन्तवेलायामेतत्त्रयं प्रतिपद्येत’ इति च
मरणवेलायामपि कर्तव्यशेषं श्रावयति॥१२॥

The Scriptures also declare, that even at the time of death, there is something still remaining to be done, thus —
“He should at the time of death, call to his mind the three things” (The three Mantras addressed to the Sun, the Ādhidaivika aspect of Prāṇa thus — “There is no destruction of you, you are constant, you are the subtle element of Prāṇa”) (ChanU.3.17.6). — 12.

– 161. Ā-prāyaṇa-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
तदधिगम उत्तरपूर्वाघयोरश्लेषविनाशौ तद्व्यपदेशात्॥४.१.१३॥
Tad-adhigama uttara-pūrvāghayor a-śleṣa-vināśau tad-vyapadeśāt.

Tad-adhigame: when that is realised; Uttara-pūrva-aghayoḥ: of the subsequent and the previous sins; A-śleṣa-vināśau: non-clinging and destruction; Tad-vyapadeśāt: because Śruti has declared so.

🔗 On its (Brahman’s) realization, the possible future sins and the past ones, do not come into contact and are destroyed respectively, because it is so declared (by the Scriptures). — 4.1.13.

4.1.13 L.1  गतस्तृतीयशेषः;
The supplemental portion which remained (to be discussed) in the third Adhyāya is now finished.

4.1.13 L.2  अथेदानीं ब्रह्मविद्या-फलं प्रति चिन्ता प्रतायते।
Now, the Sūtra-kāra starts on the consideration of the fruit of the knowledge of Brahman.

4.1.13 L.3  ब्रह्माधिगमे सति तद्विपरीतफलं दुरितं क्षीयते, न क्षीयते वेति संशयः।
The doubt is, as to whether, when realization of Brahman has taken place, sinful acts whose fruit is contrary to it (i.e. the fruit of the knowledge of Brahman) are destroyed or not.


4.1.13 L.4  किं तावत्प्राप्तम्? फलार्थत्वात् कर्मणः फलमदत्त्वा न सम्भाव्यते क्षयः;
What then is the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta)? It is, that inasmuch as actions do have the result of producing their fruit, their destruction, prior to their producing such fruit, is not possible,

4.1.13 L.5  फलदायिनी हि अस्य शक्तिः श्रुत्या समधिगता;
Because it is understood from the Scriptures, that actions do possess an inherent power of producing their fruit,

4.1.13 L.6  यदि तत् अन्तरेणैव फलोपभोगमपवृज्येत, श्रुतिः कदर्थिता स्यात्;
And hence if sinful acts were to be so destroyed before their fruit is duly suffered, the Scriptures would thus happen to be ignored.

4.1.13 L.7  स्मरन्ति च – ‘न हि कर्म क्षीयते’ इति।
The Scriptures also declare — Actions are never destroyed.


4.1.13 L.8  नन्वेवं सति प्रायश्चित्तोपदेशोऽनर्थकः प्राप्नोति –
But (says the Vedāntin) if it be so, then it would come to this, that the instruction of the Scriptures with respect to expiatory rites would be rendered meaningless.


4.1.13 L.9  नैष दोषः, प्रायश्चित्तानां नैमित्तिकत्वोपपत्तेः
This is no fault (the opponent of Vedānta replies), because it is reasonably sustainable that expiatory rites are understood to depend upon particular occasions, as for instance,

4.1.13 L.10  गृहदाहेष्ट्यादिवत्।
Like the Iṣṭi which is to be performed, when a house is destroyed by fire.

4.1.13 L.11  अपि च प्रायश्चित्तानां दोषसंयोगेन विधानाद् भवेदपि दोषक्षपणार्थता;
Besides as expiatory rites have been enjoined in connection with a man’s contact with sin, they may well have the purpose of neutralizing such sinful acts,

4.1.13 L.12  न त्वेवं ब्रह्मविद्यायां विधानमस्ति।
But there is no such injunction (about expiatory rites) with respect to the Vidyā of the knowledge of Brahman (viz. that it should be attained for the purpose of neutralizing sinful acts).


4.1.13 L.13  नन्वनभ्युपगम्यमाने ब्रह्मविदः कर्मक्षये
But (says the Vedāntin), if it is not understood that the sinful acts of a man who has attained the knowledge of Brahman are so destroyed,

4.1.13 L.14  तत्फलस्यावश्यभोक्तव्यत्वाद् अनिर्मोक्षः स्यात् –
Then inasmuch as the fruit of such actions has necessarily to be suffered, no Final Release would ever take place.


4.1.13 L.15  नेत्युच्यते;
(The opponent of Vedānta replies) — No,

4.1.13 L.16  देशकालनिमित्तापेक्षो मोक्षः कर्मफलवत् भविष्यति।
Because, like fruits of actions, Final Release also may come about, depending upon a particular environment, time and special cause.

4.1.13 L.17  तस्मान्न ब्रह्माधिगमे दुरितनिवृत्तिः
Therefore, there never is any destruction of the sinful acts, on the attainment of the knowledge of Brahman.


4.1.13 L.18  इत्येवं प्राप्ते ब्रूमः –
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), we reply: —

4.1.13 L.19  तदधिगमे ब्रह्माधिगमे सति उत्तरस्य अश्लेषः, पूर्वस्य विनाशः।
On its (i.e. Brahman’s) realization, the destruction and non-contact respectively of prior and subsequent sinful acts, come about,

4.1.13 L.20  उत्तरपूर्वयोः अघयोः अश्लेषविनाशौ भवतः – I.e. the prior sinful acts are destroyed and possible sinful acts in future do not come into contact with a person.

4.1.13 L.21  कस्मात्? तद्व्यपदेशात्;
Whence is it so? Because of the declaration to that effect (by the Scriptures).

4.1.13 L.22  तथा हि ब्रह्मविद्या-प्रक्रियायां
For the Scriptures, in the chapter dealing with Brahma-Vidyā,

4.1.13 L.23  सम्भाव्यमान-सम्बन्धस्य आगामिनो दुरितस्यानभिसम्बन्धं विदुषो व्यपदिशति –
Indicate that a learned man does not come into contact, with future sins, (even though such contact is possible in the case of future sinful acts), thus —

4.1.13 L.24  ‘यथा पुष्करपलाश आपो न श्लिष्यन्त एवमेवंविदि पापं कर्म न श्लिष्यते’ (ChanU.4.14.3) इति;
“Just as water does not stick to a lotus-leaf, even so, sinful acts do not contaminate a man, who knows this in this way” (ChanU.4.14.3).

4.1.13 L.25  तथा विनाशमपि पूर्वोपचितस्य दुरितस्य व्यपदिशति –
The Scriptures similarly indicate the destruction of sinful acts committed already, thus —

4.1.13 L.26  ‘तद्यथेषीकातूलमग्नौ प्रोतं प्रदूयेतैवꣳ हास्य सर्वे पाप्मानः प्रदूयन्ते’ (ChanU.5.24.3) इति;
“Just as a fluff of cotton-wool sticking to an arrow is consumed when the arrow is put in the fire, even so are all his prior sins destroyed” (ChanU.5.24.3).

4.1.13 L.27  अयमपरः कर्मक्षयव्यपदेशो भवति –
The following again, is yet one more Scriptural declaration about the destruction of actions —

4.1.13 L.28  ‘भिद्यते हृदयग्रन्थिश्छिद्यन्ते सर्वसंशयाः।
क्षीयन्ते चास्य कर्माणि तस्मिन्दृष्टे परावरे’ (MunU.2.2.8) इति।

“The knot of the Hṛdaya is cut under and all doubts are resolved
And all actions destroyed on the realization of Him who is at once both the High (Para) and low (Avara)” (MunU.2.2.8).


4.1.13 L.29  यदुक्तम् – अनुपभुक्तफलस्य कर्मणः क्षयकल्पनायां शास्त्रं कदर्थितं स्यादिति,
With regard to the statement (by the opponent of Vedānta) that the assumption of the destruction of acts before their fruits are experienced, would mean that the Śāstra is ignored or vitiated,


4.1.13 L.30  नैष दोषः;
We reply that this is no fault.

4.1.13 L.31  न हि वयं कर्मणः फलदायिनीं शक्तिम् अवजानीमहे;
We do not mean to deny the power of actions to generate their fruit,

4.1.13 L.32  विद्यत एव सा;
सा तु विद्यादिना कारणान्तरेण प्रतिबध्यत इति वदामः;

But we only wish to say, that such power which of course is always inherent in actions,
Is merely arrested by some such other cause as correct or perfect knowledge etc.

4.1.13 L.33  शक्तिसद्भावमात्रे च शास्त्रं व्याप्रियते,
The Śāstra is concerned merely in maintaining that such power does exist,

4.1.13 L.34  न प्रतिबन्धाप्रतिबन्धयोरपि।
But not in maintaining either its liability to be obstructed, or not to be obstructed, in any way.

4.1.13 L.35  ‘न हि कर्म क्षीयते’ इत्येतदपि स्मरणमौत्सर्गिकम् –
The Smṛti statement, viz., that action is never destroyed is a statement only of the nature of a general rule,

4.1.13 L.36  न हि भोगादृते कर्म क्षीयते तदर्थत्वादिति;
That inasmuch as action has the result of producing a fruit, it is never destroyed unless its fruit is first experienced.

4.1.13 L.37  इष्यत एव तु प्रायश्चित्तादिना तस्य क्षयः –
‘सर्वं पाप्मानं तरति, तरति ब्रह्महत्याम्, योऽश्वमेधेन यजते, य उ चैनमेवं वेद’ इत्यादि श्रुतिस्मृतिभ्यः।

On the authority of such Scriptural statements as “He escapes from all sins, He who performs the Aśva-medha sacrifice escapes from the sin of the killing of a Brāhmaṇa, and also every one who knows it to be so”,
The destruction of actions by expriatory rites is of course to be desired.


4.1.13 L.38  यत्तूक्तम् – नैमित्तिकानि प्रायश्चित्तानि भविष्यन्तीति,
The statement (by the opponent of Vedānta) that expiatory rites may well be for special occasions as and when they arise,


4.1.13 L.39  तदसत्, दोष-संयोगेन चोद्यमानानामेषां
(We reply) — It is not so, because as they are enjoined whenever there is a contact with sin,

4.1.13 L.40  दोषनिर्घातफल-सम्भवे फलान्तरकल्पनानुपपत्तेः।
And as their fruit, viz. the destruction of such sins by them, is possible, the idea of their having some other fruit is not reasonably sustainable.


4.1.13 L.41  यत्पुनरेतदुक्तम् – न प्रायश्चित्तवत् दोषक्षयोद्देशेन विद्याविधानमस्तीति,
With regard, again, to the statement (by the opponent of Vedānta) that there is no injunction as regards the acquisition of the knowledge (of Brahman) with the intention of the destruction of sin, as there is in the case of an expiatory rite,


4.1.13 L.42  अत्र ब्रूमः – सगुणासु तावद्विद्यासु विद्यत एव विधानम्,
We reply — There of course is such an injunction in the case of Vidyās (Cognitions) with respect to qualified Brahman,

4.1.13 L.43  तासु च वाक्यशेषे ऐश्वर्य-प्राप्तिः पाप-निवृत्तिश्च विद्यावत उच्यते,
Because in the complementary passage with regard to them, the attainment of lordly power by, and the removal of sin of, him, who has attained such knowledge, is referred to,

4.1.13 L.44  तयोश्चाविवक्षाकारणं नास्ति –
And as there is no reason for the Scriptures not desiring to state so,

4.1.13 L.45  इत्यतः पाप्मप्रहाणपूर्वकैश्वर्य-प्राप्तिः तासां फलमिति निश्चीयते;
It is therefore definitely ascertained that the acquisition of lordly power, as preceded by the destruction i.e. incineration (Pradaha) of sin, is their fruit.

4.1.13 L.46  निर्गुणायां तु विद्यायां यद्यपि विधानं नास्ति,
As regards Vidyās (Cognitions) with respect to unqualified Brahman, even though there is no similar injunction,

4.1.13 L.47  तथापि अकर्त्रात्मत्वबोधात् कर्मप्रदाहसिद्धिः।
The destruction i.e. incineration of all actions is established as a necessary result of the knowledge that the Self is not an agent.

4.1.13 L.48  अश्लेष इति च आगामिषु कर्मसु कर्तृत्वमेव न प्रतिपद्यते ब्रह्मविदिति दर्शयति।
The term ‘non-contact’ indicates, that, with regard to actions (which may occur) at some future time, any one who has realized Brahman does not ever actually become an agent of any action.

4.1.13 L.49  अतिक्रान्तेषु तु यद्यपि मिथ्याज्ञानात्कर्तृत्वं प्रतिपेद इव,
With respect to actions in the past, though a person through false-knowledge understood himself to be such an agent as it were,

4.1.13 L.50  तथापि विद्यासामर्थ्यान्मिथ्याज्ञान-निवृत्तेः
Still by reason of the removal of such false-knowledge through the power of the knowledge (of Brahman)

4.1.13 L.51  तान्यपि प्रविलीयन्त इत्याह – विनाश इति।
Even these past actions are dissolved, and that is why the Sūtra-kāra has referred to their destruction.

4.1.13 L.52  पूर्वसिद्धकर्तृत्वभोक्तृत्व-विपरीतं हि
त्रिष्वपि कालेष्वकर्तृत्वाभोक्तृत्व-स्वरूपं ब्रह्माहमस्मि,
नेतः पूर्वमपि कर्ता भोक्ता वा अहमासम्, नेदानीम्, नापि भविष्यत्काले –
इति ब्रह्मविद् अवगच्छति;

The person who has realized Brahman understands,
That he himself is Brahman, which has the nature of never being an agent or an experiencer during all the three divisions of time (viz. the past, present or future),
Contrary to the preconceived (wrong) notion of being such an agent or experiencer,
And a person who has realized Brahman knows that he never was such agent or experiencer before, nor is he so at present, nor will he ever be so at some future time.

4.1.13 L.53  एवमेव च मोक्ष उपपद्यते;
Final Release is reasonably sustainable only in this way.

4.1.13 L.54  अन्यथा हि अनादिकालप्रवृत्तानां कर्मणां क्षयाभावे
Otherwise as there would never be any destruction of actions which have their origin in beginningless time,

4.1.13 L.55  मोक्षाभावः स्यात्।
There would be no Final Release.

4.1.13 L.56  न च देशकालनिमित्तापेक्षो मोक्षः कर्मफलवत् भवितुमर्हति;
Final Release does not, like fruits of actions, deserve to be dependent on environment, time and special causes,

4.1.13 L.57  अनित्यत्वप्रसङ्गात्,
Because (if it were to be so), there would be the predicament of its being transitory i.e. non-eternal,

4.1.13 L.58  परोक्षत्वानुपपत्तेश्च ज्ञानफलस्य।
And also because it is not reasonably sustainable that the fruit of knowledge is not directly perceptible.

4.1.13 L.59  तस्मात् ब्रह्माधिगमे दुरितक्षय इति स्थितम्॥१३॥
Therefore, it is firmly established that on the realization of Brahman, sinful actions are liquidated. — 13.

– 162. Tad-adhigama-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
इतरस्याप्येवमसंश्लेषः पाते तु॥४.१.१४॥
Itarasyāpy evam asaṃśleṣaḥ pāte tu.

Itarasya: of the other; Api: also; Evam: thus, in the same way; A-samśleṣaḥ: non-clinging; Pāte: at death; Tu: but, indeed.

🔗 But there is a similar non-contact even of the other i.e. meritorious acts, in the same way (as in the case of sinful acts), and (Final Release takes place), as soon as the body falls (i.e. death takes place). — 4.1.14.

4.1.14 L.1  पूर्वस्मिन्नधिकरणे बन्धहेतोरघस्य स्वाभाविकस्य अश्लेष-विनाशौ ज्ञाननिमित्तौ शास्त्र-व्यपदेशान्निरूपितौ;
In the former topic (Adhikaraṇa), non-contact and destruction of (future and past) sins which are natural and which are the cause of bondage, were as indicated by the Scriptures (Śāstra), explained as being caused by the knowledge (of Brahman).


4.1.14 L.2  धर्मस्य पुनः शास्त्रीयत्वात् शास्त्रीयेण ज्ञानेन अविरोध इत्याशङ्क्य
Now, a doubt having been raised, that meritorious acts being acts in accordance with the Śāstra, they could not be antagonistic to knowledge based on the Śāstra,


4.1.14 L.3  तन्निराकरणाय पूर्वाधिकरण-न्यायातिदेशः क्रियते –
In order to remove such doubt, an extended application (Atideśa) of the argument in the previous Adhikaraṇa is made here (in the Sūtra),

4.1.14 L.4  इतरस्यापि पुण्यस्य कर्मणः एवम् अघवत् असंश्लेषो विनाशश्च ज्ञानवतो भवतः –
Viz. that in the case of a man who has attained knowledge, there is a similar non-contact and destruction of acts of the other kind i.e. meritorious acts, as in the case of sinful acts.

4.1.14 L.5  कुतः? – तस्यापि स्वफल-हेतुत्वेन ज्ञानफलप्रतिबन्धित्व-प्रसङ्गात्,
Whence is it so? Because of the possibility of a predicament of such acts being an impediment to the fruit of knowledge (i.e. Final Release) occurring, as they also, are the cause of their own fruit.

4.1.14 L.6  ‘उभे उ हैवैष एते तरति’ (BrhU.4.4.22) इत्यादिश्रुतिषु च
In Scriptural passages such as “He verily transcends both (i.e. meritorious as well as sinful acts)” (BrhU.4.4.22),

4.1.14 L.7  दुष्कृतवत् सुकृतस्यापि प्रणाश-व्यपदेशात्,
There is a mention that like sinful acts meritorious acts also are annihilated,

4.1.14 L.8  अकर्त्रात्मत्वबोध-निमित्तस्य च कर्मक्षयस्य सुकृतदुष्कृतयोः तुल्यत्वात्,
As is indicated by (the use of) the word ‘destruction’, because the destruction of actions, as a result of the knowledge that the Self is never an agent (i.e. the doer of such acts), is common, both to meritorious as well as sinful acts,

4.1.14 L.9  ‘क्षीयन्ते चास्य कर्माणि’ (MunU.2.2.8) इति च
And as in the Scriptural passage “His (i.e. of the man who has realized Brahman) actions are annihilated” (MunU.2.2.8);

4.1.14 L.10  विशेषश्रुतेः।
No distinction is made (between meritorious and sinful acts).

4.1.14 L.11  यत्रापि केवल एव पाप्म-शब्दः पठ्यते, तत्रापि तेनैव पुण्यमप्याकलितमिति द्रष्टव्यम्,
Besides where only the word ‘sin’ is seen (to be used in the Scriptures) it should be understood that it covers ‘merit’ also,

4.1.14 L.12  ज्ञानापेक्षया निकृष्टफलत्वात्।
Because, as compared with the fruit of perfect knowledge (i.e. Final Release) the fruit of a meritorious act (which is only secular prosperity) is inferior.

4.1.14 L.13  अस्ति च श्रुतौ पुण्येऽपि पाप्मशब्दः –
Besides the word ‘sin’ is used in the Scriptures also to indicate merit,

4.1.14 L.14  ‘नैनं सेतुमहोरात्रे तरतः’ (ChanU.8.4.1) इत्यत्र
Because, in the Scriptural passage “Neither day nor night transcend this bund” (ChanU.8.4.1),

4.1.14 L.15  सह दुष्कृतेन सुकृतम् अप्यनुक्रम्य,
Good deeds are enumerated along with the bad deeds,

4.1.14 L.16  ‘सर्वे पाप्मानोऽतो निवर्तन्ते’ इत्यविशेषेणैव प्रकृते पुण्ये पाप्मशब्द-प्रयोगात्।
And in the passage “All sins turn back from here”, for ‘merit’ which also is relevant here, the word ‘sin’ is used in a common way.

4.1.14 L.17  ‘पाते तु’ इति तुशब्दोऽवधारणार्थः।
The word ‘as soon as’ (Tu) in the Sūtra ‘as soon as the body falls’ is used for the purpose of indicating proper ascertainment.

4.1.14 L.18  एवं धर्माधर्मयोर्बन्ध-हेत्वोः विद्यासामर्थ्यादश्लेषविनाश-सिद्धेः
It being thus established, that there is non-contact and liquidation of good and bad deeds which are the cause of bondage, as a result of the power of the knowledge i.e. Vidyā (of Brahman),

4.1.14 L.19  अवश्यंभाविनी विदुषः शरीरपाते मुक्तिरित्यवधारयति॥१४॥
The Sūtra-kāra makes us understand that in the case of a man who has attained knowledge (of Brahman), Final Release is bound to take place the moment the body falls (i.e. death supervenes). — 14.

– 163. Itara-asaṃśleṣa-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अनारब्धकार्ये एव तु पूर्वे तदवधेः॥४.१.१५॥
Anārabdha-kārye eva tu pūrve tad-avadheḥ.

An-ārabdha-kārye: in the case of those works, the effects of which have not begun to operate, i.e., to yield fruits or results; Eva: only; Tu: but; Pūrve: former works; Tad-avadheḥ: that (death) being the limit, because of waiting till death.

🔗 But it is only the past actions which have not started their effects i.e. fructification (that are annihilated by the acquisition of the knowledge of Brahman), because (the Scriptures have declared death to be) the point of time, (for Final Release). — 4.1.15.

4.1.15 L.1  पूर्वयोरधिकरणयोर्ज्ञान-निमित्तः सुकृतदुष्कृतयोर्विनाशोऽवधारितः;
From the foregoing Adhikaraṇas, the annihilation of meritorious and unmeritorious actions as brought about by the knowledge of Brahman, has been ascertained.

4.1.15 L.2  स किमविशेषेण आरब्धकार्ययोः अनारब्धकार्ययोश्च भवति,
उत विशेषेणानारब्धकार्ययोः एवेति विचार्यते।

It is now being considered whether, this (annihilation) takes place indiscriminately in the case of both, viz. actions which have started to fructify and those which have not yet started, to do so,
Or particularly in the case of those only, which have not yet started to fructify.


4.1.15 L.3  तत्र ‘उभे उ हैवैष एते तरति’ (BrhU.4.4.22)
इत्येवमादिश्रुतिष्वविशेषश्रवणाद्

With regard to that, as, by the passage “Verily he transcends both these” (BrhU.4.4.2),
The Scriptures do not specify anything in particular,

4.1.15 L.4  अविशेषेणैव क्षय इति
(The conclusion is that) there is annihilation of all acts generally.


4.1.15 L.5  एवं प्राप्ते, प्रत्याह – अनारब्धकार्ये एव त्विति।
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), we reply — (the annihilation is) of only those acts which have not yet begun to fructify.

4.1.15 L.6  अप्रवृत्तफले एव पूर्वे जन्मान्तर-सञ्चिते,
It is the collective meritorious and unmeritorious actions of the previous birth,

4.1.15 L.7  अस्मिन्नपि च जन्मनि प्राग्ज्ञानोत्पत्तेः सञ्चिते, सुकृत-दुष्कृते
And those also of the present birth done prior to the generation of knowledge of Brahman and which have not yet started to fructify,

4.1.15 L.8  ज्ञानाधिगमात् क्षीयेते;
That are annihilated by such acquisition of the knowledge of Brahman,

4.1.15 L.9  न तु आरब्धकार्ये सामिभुक्तफले,
But not those which have already started to fructify and which are only semi-enjoyed,

4.1.15 L.10  याभ्यामेतत् ब्रह्मज्ञानायतनं जन्म निर्मितम्।
And which have constituted the cause of the generation of the present body (i.e. Janma) which is the repository of the knowledge of Brahman.

4.1.15 L.11  कुत एतत्?
‘तस्य तावदेव चिरं यावन्न विमोक्ष्येऽथ सम्पत्स्ये’ (ChanU.6.14.2) इति
शरीरपातावधिकरणात् क्षेमप्राप्तेः;

Whence is it so?
Because the Scriptures have prescribed the fall of the body as the point of time at which Final Release takes place,
By the passage “He is delayed in the acquisition of Final Release, only so long as he is not relieved of the body” (ChanU.6.14.2),

4.1.15 L.12  इतरथा हि ज्ञानाद् अशेषकर्म-क्षये सति स्थितिहेत्वभावात् ज्ञानप्राप्त्यनन्तरमेव क्षेमम् अश्नुवीत;
As otherwise, in the absence of any raison d’etre for a man’s existence after all actions are annihilated as a result of the acquisition of the knowledge of Brahman, he would secure Final Release immediately after such acquisition of knowledge,

4.1.15 L.13  तत्र शरीरपात-प्रतीक्षां न आचक्षीत।
And (if such were to be the case) the Scriptures would not have spoken about a man’s having to await the fall of the body (for Final Release).


4.1.15 L.14  ननु वस्तुबलेनैव अयमकर्त्रात्मावबोधः कर्माणि क्षपयन्
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) when this knowledge, viz. that the Ātmā is not in fact an agent, annihilates actions as a result of its own natural power (Vastu-balena),

4.1.15 L.15  कथं कानिचित्क्षपयेत् कानिचिच्चोपेक्षेत?
How can it be (maintained) that it annihilates some actions only and neglects to annihilate some others?

4.1.15 L.16  न हि समानेऽग्निबीजसम्पर्के,
When the contact between the seed and the fire is common (to all seeds),

4.1.15 L.17  केषाञ्चिद्बीजशक्तिः क्षीयते, केषाञ्चिन्न क्षीयते – इति शक्यम् अङ्गीकर्तुमिति।
It is not possible to accept that the power of some particular seeds (to germinate) is annihilated and the power of some others is not (so annihilated).


4.1.15 L.18  उच्यते – न तावदनाश्रित्य आरब्धकार्यं कर्माशयं ज्ञानोत्पत्तिरुपपद्यते;
We reply — It is not reasonably sustainable, that there can be any generation of the knowledge of Brahman without the acceptance of a reservoir of actions (which is the cause of the generation of a body), in which actions have started their effects i.e. fructification,

4.1.15 L.19  आश्रिते च तस्मिन्कुलालचक्रवत् प्रवृत्तवेगस्य अन्तराले प्रतिबन्धासम्भवात्
And when once that is accepted, and when, as in the case of a potter’s wheel which has been set in motion, there is no possibility of any hindrance to the momentum which is generated,

4.1.15 L.20  भवति वेगक्षयप्रतिपालनम्
It is inevitable that such knowledge has to await the dissipation of that momentum.

4.1.15 L.21  अकर्त्रात्म-बोधोऽपि हि मिथ्याज्ञान-बाधनेन कर्माण्युच्छिनत्ति;
The knowledge that the Self (Ātmā) is not an agent also annihilates actions by removing false-knowledge,

4.1.15 L.22  बाधितमपि तु मिथ्याज्ञानं द्विचन्द्रज्ञानवत् संस्कारवशात् कंचित्कालम् अनुवर्तत एव।
But even though it is so removed it does still persist for a while, as a result of past impressions, just as, for instance, the notion about there being two moons also persists for some time.

4.1.15 L.23  अपि च नैवात्र विवदितव्यम् –
Besides, it should not be discussed here (i.e. it is not debatable here)

4.1.15 L.24  ब्रह्मविदा कञ्चित्कालं शरीरं ध्रियते न वा ध्रियत इति।
As to whether a man who has realized Brahman does continue to possess a body for some time after such realization, or whether he does not,

4.1.15 L.25  कथं हि एकस्य स्वहृदय-प्रत्ययं ब्रह्म-वेदनं देह-धारणं च अपरेण प्रतिक्षेप्तुं शक्येत?
Because how can one man ever dispute another man’s experience of both the realization of Brahman and of his yet continuing to possess a body, as such experience of the other man, can belong to such other man alone?

4.1.15 L.26  श्रुति-स्मृतिषु च स्थितप्रज्ञलक्षण-निर्देशेन एतदेव निरुच्यते।
The Scriptures and the Smṛtis by way of indicating the characteristics of a man firmly ensconced in the knowledge of Brahman, have explained the same thing.

4.1.15 L.27  तस्माद् अनारब्धकार्ययोरेव सुकृतदुष्कृतयोः विद्या-सामर्थ्यात् क्षय इति निर्णयः॥१५॥
Therefore the final conclusion is, that through the power of knowledge there is annihilation only of the meritorious and unmeritorious actions which have not yet started their effects i.e. fructification. — 15.

– 164. Anārabdha-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.1.16 Su..17

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अग्निहोत्रादि तु तत्कार्यायैव तद्दर्शनात्॥४.१.१६॥
Agni-hotrādi tu tat-kāryāyaiva tad-darśanāt.

Agni-hotra-ādi: daily Agni-hotra, etc., daily offering of oblations to the perpetually maintained fire; Tu: but; Tat-kāryāya: tend towards the same result as that (knowledge); Eva: only; Tad-darśanāt: that being seen from the scriptures.

🔗 Agni-hotra etc. also (Tu), lead to the same result (viz. the generation of the effect of knowledge), because it is seen to be so (from the Scriptures). — 4.1.16.

4.1.16 L.1  पुण्यस्याप्यश्लेष-विनाशयोः अघन्यायोऽतिदिष्टः;
Extended application (Atideśa) of the reasoning about sinful acts, was made in the case of the non-contact and destruction of meritorious actions also.

4.1.16 L.2  सोऽतिदेशः सर्वपुण्यविषय इत्याशङ्क्य प्रतिवक्ति – अग्निहोत्रादि त्विति।
The Sūtra-kāra now raises a doubt as to whether this holds good in the case of all meritorious acts, and says — “Agni-hotra etc. also”.

4.1.16 L.3  तुशब्द आशङ्कामपनुदति;
The word ‘also (Tu)’ removes the doubt.

4.1.16 L.4  यन्नित्यं कर्म वैदिकमग्निहोत्रादि,
Whatever is routine (Nitya) Vedic religious action, such as Agni-hotra etc. for instance,

4.1.16 L.5  तत् तत्कार्यायैव भवति;
Makes for precisely the same result.

4.1.16 L.6  ज्ञानस्य यत्कार्यं तदेव अस्यापि कार्यमित्यर्थः।
The meaning is that the result of such action is the same as the result of knowledge.

4.1.16 L.7  कुतः? ‘तमेतं वेदानुवचनेन ब्राह्मणा विविदिषन्ति यज्ञेन दानेन’ (BrhU.4.4.22) इत्यादिदर्शनात्।
Whence is it so? On account of the Scriptural indication, viz. “The Brāhmaṇas endeavour to know the Self by means of the reciting of the Vedas, and by means of sacrifice, and charity” (BrhU.4.4.22).


4.1.16 L.8  ननु ज्ञान-कर्मणोः विलक्षणकार्यत्वात् कार्यैकत्वानुपपत्तिः –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) inasmuch as the results of knowledge and actions are dissimilar, it is not reasonably sustainable that they can have the same result.


4.1.16 L.9  नैष दोषः,
We reply — This is no fault,

4.1.16 L.10  ज्वर-मरण-कार्ययोरपि दधि-विषयोः
Because even though curds and poison have the effect of (causing) fever and death respectively,

4.1.16 L.11  गुड-मन्त्र-संयुक्तयोः तृप्ति-पुष्टिकार्य-दर्शनात्,
Still, when they are used conjointly with brown sugar, and incantations (Mantras) respectively, they are observed to produce satisfaction, and physical well-being i.e. nourishment, respectively.

4.1.16 L.12  तद्वत् कर्मणोऽपि ज्ञान-संयुक्तस्य मोक्ष-कार्योपपत्तेः।
Even so, religious actions when they are connected with knowledge, produce the result of Final Release.


4.1.16 L.13  ननु अनारभ्यो मोक्षः,
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) Final Release is not something which can be effected i.e. produced,

4.1.16 L.14  कथमस्य कर्मकार्यत्वमुच्यते?
And so how can it be said to be the result of action?


4.1.16 L.15  नैष दोषः, आरादुपकारकत्वात् कर्मणः;
We reply — This is no fault, because actions help to produce that effect indirectly from a distance.

4.1.16 L.16  ज्ञानस्यैव हि प्रापकं सत् कर्म
Action being something which promotes knowledge,

4.1.16 L.17  प्रणाड्या मोक्षकारणमित्युपचर्यते;
It is metaphorically said to be the means of Final Release, through the medium of knowledge.

4.1.16 L.18  अत एव च अतिक्रान्तविषयम् एतत् कार्यैकत्वाभिधानम्।
Hence it is, that the statement about the result being the same, is with reference only to action already performed (before the generation of knowledge).

4.1.16 L.19  न हि ब्रह्मविद आगाम्यग्निहोत्रादि सम्भवति,
In the case of a man who has realized Brahman, it is not possible that there can be any performance of Agni-hotra etc. after such realization,

4.1.16 L.20  अनियोज्य-ब्रह्मात्मत्वप्रतिपत्तेः शास्त्रस्याविषयत्वात्।
Because the realization of Brahman as the Self (of a man), which cannot be something to which a man can be enjoined, cannot properly be the subject of a Śāstra.

4.1.16 L.21  सगुणासु तु विद्यासु कर्तृत्वानतिवृत्तेः
In the case of meditations connected with qualified Brahman, inasmuch as in that case, a man does not cease to be an agent,

4.1.16 L.22  सम्भवति आगाम्यपि अग्निहोत्रादि।
The performance of Agni-hotra etc. even afterwards (i.e. after attaining knowledge of qualified Brahman) is of course possible.

4.1.16 L.23  तस्यापि निरभिसन्धिनः कार्यान्तराभावाद्
And when such action is performed in a disinterested manner (without any motive), then in the absence of its having any relation to any other result,

4.1.16 L.24  विद्या-सङ्गत्युपपत्तिः॥१६॥
It is reasonably sustainable, that it has appropriateness for such a relation to meditation (Vidyā). — 16.

[Go top]

4.1.17 L.1  किंविषयं पुनरिदम् अश्लेष-विनाश-वचनम्,
किंविषयं वा अदो विनियोग-वचनम् एकेषां शाखिनाम् –
‘तस्य पुत्रा दायमुपयन्ति सुहृदः साधुकृत्यां द्विषन्तः पापकृत्याम्’ इति?

Now, with respect to what action (Karma), then, is this Scriptural statement, about the non-contact and destruction (of actions)?
And with respect to what action (Karma), then, is this statement about the appropriation (of merits and demerits), by the followers of one branch (of the Vedas)? thus —
“His sons inherit his property, his friends inherit his meritorious actions, and his enemies inherit his unmeritorious actions”

4.1.17 L.2  अत उत्तरं पठति –
The Sūtra-kāra gives a reply: —

←PrevNext→
अतोऽन्यापि ह्येकेषामुभयोः॥४.१.१७॥
Ato'nyāpi hyekeṣāmubhayoḥ.

Ataḥ: from this; Anyā: different; Api: also; Hi: because, indeed; Ekeṣām: of some (Śākhās); Ubhayoḥ: of both.

🔗 There are good acts, other than those (i.e. Agni-hotra etc.). (This statement about the appropriation is about them.) Both (Jaimini and Bādarāyaṇa) (agree about that). — 4.1.17.

4.1.17 L.3  अतोऽग्निहोत्रादेः नित्यात्कर्मणः अन्यापि ह्यस्ति साधु-कृत्या,
There are good acts, other than these compulsory routine acts, such as Agni-hotra etc.,

4.1.17 L.4  या फलमभिसन्धाय क्रियते,
Which are undertaken with a desire for a particular fruit,

4.1.17 L.5  तस्या एष विनियोग उक्तः एकेषां शाखिनाम् –
And it is about the appropriation of these that the followers of one branch have spoken thus —

4.1.17 L.6  ‘सुहृदः साधुकृत्यामुपयन्ति’ इति।
“His friends inherit the good deeds etc.”.

4.1.17 L.7  तस्या एव च इदम् अघवद् अश्लेषविनाश-निरूपणम् – इतरस्याप्येवम् असंश्लेष इति।
It is with regard to these, that there is this statement (Itarasyāpy evam asaṃśleṣa BrS.4.1.14) about this non-contact and destruction, as in the case of sinful acts.

4.1.17 L.8  तथाजातीयकस्य काम्यस्य कर्मणो विद्यां प्रत्यनुपकारकत्वे सम्प्रतिपत्तिः
उभयोरपि जैमिनि-बादरायणयोः आचार्ययोः॥१७॥

Both the Ācāryas Jaimini and Bādarāyaṇa
Agree in holding that such kind of acts, performed for some desired end, are not helpful towards (the acquisition of) knowledge. — 17.

– 165. Agni-hotra-ādy-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
यदेव विद्ययेति हि॥४.१.१८॥
Yad eva vidyayeti hi.

Yad eva: whatever; Vidyayā: with knowledge; Iti: thus, this, so; Hi: because.

🔗 (The Scriptural passage) “Also whatever (he does) equipped with Vidyā (knowledge of Brahman)” also (intimates similarly). — 4.1.18.

4.1.18 L.1  समधिगतम् एतद् अनन्तराधिकरणे –
It is understood from the preceding Adhikaraṇa,

4.1.18 L.2  नित्यमग्निहोत्रादिकं कर्म
That a compulsory routine act (Nitya-Karma) such as Agni-hotra etc.,

4.1.18 L.3  मुमुक्षुणा मोक्षप्रयोजनोद्देशेन
Which, if performed (by a man) with a desire for the fruit of Final Release,

4.1.18 L.4  कृतमुपात्त-दुरितक्षय-हेतुद्वारेण
And which by way of being the cause of the destruction of the sinful acts committed (by him),

4.1.18 L.5  सत्त्वशुद्धि-कारणतां प्रतिपद्यमानं
Becomes the means of the purification of the mind,

4.1.18 L.6  मोक्षप्रयोजनब्रह्माधिगम-निमित्तत्वेन ब्रह्मविद्यया सह एककार्यं भवतीति;
Thus becomes the means of producing in cooperation with Vidyā the same result as that produced by the knowledge of Brahman, which has Final Release as its fruit.

4.1.18 L.7  तत्र अग्निहोत्रादि कर्माङ्गव्यपाश्रय-विद्यासंयुक्तं केवलं चास्ति –
Now religious acts such as Agni-hotra etc. are acts which are either connected with Vidyā which is dependent upon the subsidiary part of religious acts, or are mere unconnected acts as such.

4.1.18 L.8  ‘य एवं विद्वान्यजति’ ‘य एवं विद्वाञ्जुहोति’ ‘य एवं विद्वाञ्शंसति’ ‘य एवं विद्वान्गायति’ ‘तस्मादेवंविदमेव ब्रह्माणं कुर्वीत नानेवंविदम्’ (ChanU.4.17.10)
‘तेनोभौ कुरुतो यश्चैतदेवं वेद यश्च न वेद’ (ChanU.1.1.10) इत्यादिवचनेभ्यो
विद्यासंयुक्तमस्ति, केवलमप्यस्ति।

By reason of Scriptural statements such as “He who sacrifices, knowing thus”, “He who offers oblation, knowing thus”, “He who recites, knowing thus”, “He who sings, knowing thus”, “Therefore one should appoint him only, who knows thus, as the Brahma-priest, and not one who does not know it to be like this” (ChanU.4.17.10),
“Both equally, i.e. he who knows this to be so, and he who does not, perform acts (by means of the letter ‘Om’)” (ChanU.1.1.10),
It is understood that religious acts are of both kinds, viz. either those connected with Vidyā or not so connected.

4.1.18 L.9  तत्रेदं विचार्यते –
With regard to that it is being considered,

4.1.18 L.10  किं विद्यासंयुक्तमेव अग्निहोत्रादिकं कर्म
Whether, it is only acts such as Agni-hotra etc. connected with Vidyā,

4.1.18 L.11  मुमुक्षोर्विद्याहेतुत्वेन तया सह एककार्यत्वं प्रतिपद्यते न केवलम्;
Which, by way of being the means of knowledge, come to have the same result as the result of knowledge, and not the mere Agni-hotra which is not so connected (with Vidyā),

4.1.18 L.12  उत विद्यासंयुक्तं केवलं च अविशेषेणेति।
Or whether both these kinds of acts whether connected or not so connected with Vidyā, equally without any distinction come to have the same result.

4.1.18 L.13  कुतः संशयः? ‘तमेतमात्मानं यज्ञेन विविदिषन्ति’ इति यज्ञादीनाम् अविशेषेण आत्मवेदनाङ्गत्वेन श्रवणात्,
Whence is the doubt? Because the Scriptural passage “(They) endeavour to know this Self by sacrifice”, speaks of sacrifice etc. generally, as being subsidiary to the knowledge of the Self,

4.1.18 L.14  विद्यासंयुक्तस्य च अग्निहोत्रादेः विशिष्टत्वावगमात्।
While Agni-hotra etc. connected with Vidyās are understood to have a sort of special significance.


4.1.18 L.15  किं तावत्प्राप्तम्?
What then is the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta)?

4.1.18 L.16  विद्यासंयुक्तमेव कर्म अग्निहोत्रादि आत्मविद्या-शेषत्वं प्रतिपद्यते, न विद्याहीनम्,
It is, that it is only Agni-hotra etc. which are connected with Vidyās, which become complementary to the knowledge of the Self, and not those which are not so connected,

4.1.18 L.17  विद्योपेतस्य विशिष्टत्वावगमाद् विद्याविहीनात् –
Because that which is equipped with Vidyā is understood to have a special significance over that which is not so connected.

4.1.18 L.18  ‘यदहरेव जुहोति तदहः पुनर्मृत्युमपजयत्येवं विद्वान्’ इत्यादिश्रुतिभ्यः,
Also because of such Scriptural passages as “One who knows this to be so, conquers death, the very day on which he offers an oblation”,

4.1.18 L.19  ‘बुद्ध्या युक्तो यया पार्थ कर्मबन्धं प्रहास्यसि’ (BhG.2.39)
‘दूरेण ह्यवरं कर्म बुद्धियोगाद्धनञ्जय’ (BhG.2.49) इत्यादिस्मृतिभ्यश्च

And because of the Smṛti passages “Equipped with which knowledge, Oh Pārtha, wilt thou' get rid of the bondage of acts?” (BhG.2.39),
“Oh Dhanañjaya, (mere) action is vastly inferior to action equipped with the possession of knowledge” (BhG.2.49).


4.1.18 L.20  इत्येवं प्राप्ते प्रतिपाद्यते – यदेव विद्ययेति हि।
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), it is expounded (by the Sūtra-kāra), thus — Also whatever (he does) equipped with Vidyā — (in the above Sūtra).

4.1.18 L.21  सत्यमेतत् – विद्यासंयुक्तं कर्म अग्निहोत्रादिकं विद्याविहीनात्कर्मणोऽग्निहोत्राद्विशिष्टम्,
It is true that an act such as Agni-hotra etc. when it is connected with Vidyā is superior to a mere act of Agni-hotra which is not so connected (with Vidyā),

4.1.18 L.22  विद्वान् इव ब्राह्मणो विद्याविहीनाद् ब्राह्मणात्;
Just as a Brāhmaṇa who is equipped with Vidyā, is superior to one who is not so equipped.

4.1.18 L.23  तथापि नात्यन्तमनपेक्षं विद्याविहीनं कर्म अग्निहोत्रादिकम्।
Still, it is not, that an act of Agni-hotra, not so connected with Vidyā, is not at all necessary.

4.1.18 L.24  कस्मात्? ‘तमेतमात्मानं यज्ञेन विविदिषन्ति’ इत्यविशेषेण अग्निहोत्रादेर्विद्याहेतुत्वेन श्रुतत्वात्।
Whence is it so? Because, the Scriptural passage “They endeavour to know this Self by means of a sacrifice” speaks of Agni-hotra generally as being the means of the knowledge of Brahman.


4.1.18 L.25  ननु विद्या-संयुक्तस्य अग्निहोत्रादेर्विद्याविहीनाद्विशिष्टत्वावगमात्
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) inasmuch as Agni-hotra etc. which is connected with Vidyā is understood (from the Scriptures) to be superior to one which is not so connected,

4.1.18 L.26  विद्या-विहीनम् अग्निहोत्रादि आत्मविद्याहेतुत्वेनानपेक्ष्यमेवेति युक्तम् –
It is logical, that Agni-hotra which is not so connected with Vidyā, is not considered necessary, as the means of the knowledge of the Self.


4.1.18 L.27  नैतदेवम्;
(We reply) — No, it is not so.

4.1.18 L.28  विद्या-सहायस्याग्निहोत्रादेः विद्यानिमित्तेन सामर्थ्यातिशयेन योगात्
आत्मज्ञानं प्रति कश्चित्कारणत्वातिशयो भविष्यति,
न तथा विद्याविहीनस्य –
इति युक्तं कल्पयितुम्;

Rather, it is logical to imagine
That as an Agni-hotra which is connected with Vidyā has very great power because of such Vidyā,
It only happens to be a superior means as regards the knowledge of the Self,
While it is not so in the case of a mere Agni-hotra which is not so connected with Vidyā.

4.1.18 L.29  न तु ‘यज्ञेन विविदिषन्ति’ इत्यत्राविशेषेणात्मज्ञानाङ्गत्वेन श्रुतस्याग्निहोत्रादेः अनङ्गत्वं शक्यमभ्युपगन्तुम्;
It is not proper to understand, that, Agni-hotra etc., which is mentioned by the Scriptures to be but a subordinate part of the knowledge of Brahman, in a general way only, thus — “Endeavour to know by means of a sacrifice”, is not such a subordinate part of the knowledge of Brahman.

4.1.18 L.30  तथा हि श्रुतिः – ‘यदेव विद्यया करोति श्रद्धयोपनिषदा तदेव वीर्यवत्तरं भवति’ (ChanU.1.1.10) इति
For the Scriptures which declare, thus — “Whatever he does with Vidyā, faith and esoteric meditation, becomes more potent” (ChanU.1.1.10),

4.1.18 L.31  विद्या-संयुक्तस्य कर्मणोऽग्निहोत्रादेः वीर्यवत्तरत्वाभिधानेन स्वकार्यं प्रति कञ्चिदतिशयं ब्रुवाणा
विद्या-विहीनस्य तस्यैव तत्प्रयोजनं प्रति वीर्यवत्त्वं दर्शयति;

And speak of a certain sort of superiority of an Agni-hotra which is connected with Vidyā, towards its own effect, by thus speaking about its being more potent,
Also indicate thereby, that the same Agni-hotra, when it is not so connected with Vidyā, has at least some potency as regards its fruit any way.

4.1.18 L.32  कर्मणश्च वीर्यवत्त्वं तत्, यत्स्वप्रयोजनसाधन-सहत्वम्।
Now what constitutes the potency of an act, is its ability to produce its own fruit.

4.1.18 L.33  तस्माद् विद्या-संयुक्तं नित्यमग्निहोत्रादि विद्या-विहीनं च उभयमपि
It is thus established, that the compulsory routine Agni-hotra, whether connected with Vidyā or not so connected,

4.1.18 L.34  मुमुक्षुणा मोक्षप्रयोजनोद्देशेन इह जन्मनि जन्मान्तरे च प्राग्ज्ञानोत्पत्तेः कृतं यत्,
And performed by an aspirant for Final Release, with the desire for such Final Release as its fruit, prior to the generation of the knowledge (of Brahman), whether during the present or previous birth,

4.1.18 L.35  तद्यथासामर्थ्यं
And which in proportion to its power,

4.1.18 L.36  ब्रह्माधिगमप्रतिबन्ध-कारणोपात्तदुरितक्षयहेतुत्व-द्वारेण ब्रह्माधिगम-कारणत्वं प्रतिपद्यमानं
Becomes the cause of the realization of Brahman, by way of causing the annihilation of the aggregate of sins which constitute an impediment to such realization (of Brahman),

4.1.18 L.37  श्रवणमननश्रद्धातात्पर्याद्यन्तरङ्ग-कारणापेक्षं ब्रह्मविद्यया सह एककार्यं भवतीति स्थितम्॥१८॥
And which is helpful to such internal causes as, hearing, contemplating, faith and steadfast devotion, thus becomes a collaborator of Brahma-Vidyā in the production of the same result, viz. Final Release. — 18.

– 166. Vidyā-jñāna-sādhanatva-ādy-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
भोगेन त्वितरे क्षपयित्वा सम्पद्यते॥४.१.१९॥
Bhogena tv-itare kṣapayitvā sampadyate.

Bhogena: by enjoyment; Tu: but; Itare: of the other two works (merit and demerit); Kṣapayitvā: having exhausted; Sampadyate: becomes united with Brahman, becomes one with Brahman, obtains, joins.

🔗 By destroying other acts (i.e. these meritorious and unmeritorious acts which have started to fructify) by experiencing their fruit, however, he attains identification with the Supreme Spirit i.e. Kaivalya. — 4.1.19.

4.1.19 L.1  अनारब्धकार्ययोः पुण्यपापयोः विद्यासामर्थ्यात् क्षय उक्तः।
Mention has already been made (by the Sūtra-kāra) of the destruction of the meritorious and sinful acts which have not yet started to fructify, through the power of knowledge.

4.1.19 L.2  इतरे तु आरब्धकार्ये पुण्यपापे उपभोगेन क्षपयित्वा ब्रह्म सम्पद्यते,
Having also annihilated the other meritorious and sinful acts which have already started fructifying, by the experiencing of their fruit, identification with the Supreme Spirit is attained,

4.1.19 L.3  ‘तस्य तावदेव चिरं यावन्न विमोक्ष्येऽथ सम्पत्स्ये’ (ChanU.6.14.2) इति ‘ब्रह्मैव सन्ब्रह्माप्येति’ इति च एवमादिश्रुतिभ्यः।
On the authority of the Scriptural passages “He is delayed only so long as he is not relieved of the body and then he becomes one with Brahman” (ChanU.6.14.2), and “Himself being Brahman, he merges into Brahman” etc.


4.1.19 L.4  ननु सत्यपि सम्यग्दर्शने
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) — Even though correct i.e. perfect knowledge is there,

4.1.19 L.5  यथा प्राग्देहपाताद् भेददर्शनं द्विचन्द्रदर्शनन्यायेनानुवृत्तम्,
Just as, according to the maxim (Nyāya) of ‘the vision of double moons’, a man still continues to see entities as different, prior to the fall of the body,

4.1.19 L.6  एवं पश्चादप्यनुवर्तेत –
He may well continue to do so i.e. see entities as different even after that.


4.1.19 L.7  न, निमित्ताभवात्।
(We reply) — No, because of the absence of any cause for it.

4.1.19 L.8  उपभोगशेष-क्षपणं हि तत्रानुवृत्ति-निमित्तम्,
In the former case, the necessity of the destruction of the residue of actions of which the first has yet to be experienced, is the cause of the persistence of such notion of duality,

4.1.19 L.9  न च तादृशम् अत्र किञ्चिदस्ति।
While no such cause exists in the present case.


4.1.19 L.10  ननु अपरः कर्माशयोऽभिनवमुपभोगम् आरप्स्यते –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) another fresh aggregate of actions may start a fresh experience of the fruit of actions?


4.1.19 L.11  न, तस्य दग्ध-बीजत्वात्;
(We reply) — No, because the seeds (of such actions) happen to have been burnt out.

4.1.19 L.12  मिथ्या-ज्ञानावष्टम्भं हि कर्मान्तरं देहपात उपभोगान्तरम् आरभेत;
Any new action, which has to depend upon false-knowledge, may if at all, begin a fresh experience after the fall of the body,

4.1.19 L.13  तच्च मिथ्याज्ञानं सम्यग्ज्ञानेन दग्धम् –
But such false-knowledge is completely destroyed by correct i.e. perfect knowledge,

4.1.19 L.14  इत्यतः साध्वेतत् आरब्धकार्य-क्षये विदुषः कैवल्यम् अवश्यं भवतीति॥१९॥
And hence, the proposition, that on the dissipation of the effects of actions which have started to fructify, a wise man experiences complete identity with the supreme spirit (Kaivalya), holds perfectly good. — 19.

– 167. Itara-kṣapaṇa-Adhikaraṇam. End of Pāda 4.1

[Go top]

168. Vāg (4.2.1–2) 169. Manas (4.2.3) 170. Adhyakṣa (4.2.4–6) 171. Ā-sṛty-upakrama (4.2.7) 172. Saṃsāra-vyapadeśa (4.2.8–11) 173. Pratiṣedha (4.2.12–14) 174. Vāg-ādi-laya (4.2.15) 175. Avibhāga (4.2.16) १७६. 176. Tad-okas (4.2.17) 177. Raśmi (4.2.18–19) 178. Dakṣaṇa-ayana (4.2.20–21)

Su.4.2.1 Su..2

[Go top]

4.2.1 L.1  अथ अपरासु विद्यासु फल-प्राप्तये देवयानं पन्थानम् अवतारयिष्यन्
Now, (the Sūtra-kāra) wishing to lead a man to the path of the Gods (Devāyana) for the attainment by him of the fruit of the lower kind of Vidyā,

4.2.1 L.2  प्रथमं तावत् यथाशास्त्रम् उत्क्रान्तिक्रमम् अन्वाचष्टे;
To begin with, speaks about the order of the passage (of the Self, out of the body), according to the Śāstra.

4.2.1 L.3  समाना हि विद्वदविदुषोः उत्क्रान्तिरिति वक्ष्यति –
He will later on say how the passage (of the Self, out of the body) is common, both in the case of those who are equipped with knowledge and those who are ignorant of it.

←PrevNext→
वाङ्मनसि दर्शनाच्छब्दाच्च॥४.२.१॥
Vāṅ manasi darśanāc-chabdāc ca.

Vāk: speech; Manasi: in the mind; Darśanāt: because it is so seen or observed, because of the scriptural declaration; Śabdāt: because of the word of the Vedas, because of the statement of the Smrti; Ca: also, and.

🔗 Vāk i.e. Speech (merges) into the Mind (Manas), because it is so seen and also because of the Scriptural statement. — 4.2.1.

4.2.1 L.4  अस्ति प्रायणविषया श्रुतिः –
There is the following Scriptural statement with regard to the subject of death —

4.2.1 L.5  ‘अस्य सोम्य पुरुषस्य प्रयतो वाङ्मनसि सम्पद्यते मनः प्राणे प्राणस्तेजसि तेजः परस्यां देवतायाम्’ (ChanU.6.8.6) इति।
“Oh gentle one, when a man is dying, Speech (Vāk) merges into the Manas, the Manas into Prāṇa, the Prāṇa into Tejas, and Tejas into the Highest deity” (ChanU.6.8.6).

4.2.1 L.6  किमिह वाच एव वृत्तिमत्त्या मनसि सम्पत्तिरुच्यते,
उत वाग्वृत्तेरिति विशयः।

Here, the doubt is, whether the Scriptural passage speaks of the merger of speech (Vāk) itself along with its mode or function, into the mind (Manas),
Or whether it speaks of the merger of only the mode or function (of speech).


4.2.1 L.7  तत्र वागेव तावत् मनसि सम्पद्यत इति प्राप्तम्;
With regard to that the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), is, that it is speech (Vāk) itself, that merges into the mind.

4.2.1 L.8  तथा हि श्रुतिरनुगृहीता भवति;
It would be only thus that the proper meaning of the Scriptural passage will be brought out,

4.2.1 L.9  इतरथा लक्षणा स्यात्;
Otherwise a Lakṣaṇa (implication) would result.

4.2.1 L.10  श्रुतिलक्षणाविशये च श्रुतिर्न्याय्या, न लक्षणा;
Whenever there is a doubt as between a Scriptural passage and a Lakṣaṇa, logically the Scriptural passage is acceptable and not a Lakṣaṇa.

4.2.1 L.11  तस्मात् वाच एव अयं मनसि प्रलय इति॥
Hence, the merger into the mind, is of speech (Vāk) itself.


4.2.1 L.12  एवं प्राप्ते, ब्रूमः – वाग्वृत्तिर्मनसि सम्पद्यत इति।
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), we reply — It is the mode or the function of speech (Vāk) that merges into the mind.


4.2.1 L.13  कथं वाग्वृत्तिरिति व्याख्यायते,
(Asks the opponent of Vedānta) — How do you interpret that it is only the function of speech (Vāk) that merges,

4.2.1 L.14  यावता ‘वाङ्मनसि’ इत्येव आचार्यः पठति?
When the Scriptural passage recites that speech (Vāk) merges into the mind (Manas)?


4.2.1 L.15  सत्यमेतत्; पठिष्यति तु परस्तात् –
(We reply) — What you say is right, but the Sūtra-kāra will mention hereafter (in Sūtra 16 of this Pāda) thus:

4.2.1 L.16  ‘अविभागो वचनात्’ (BrS.4.2.16) इति;
“There is nonseparateness (Avibhāga), i.e. complete merger, because of the Scriptural statement”.

4.2.1 L.17  तस्मादत्र वृत्त्युपशममात्रं विवक्षितमिति गम्यते।
Therefore, it is understood that what is intended to be spoken of here, is merely about the cessation of the mode or function of speech (Vāk).

4.2.1 L.18  तत्त्वप्रलय-विवक्षायां तु सर्वत्रैव अविभाग-साम्यात्
Assuming, the Sūtra-kāra intended to speak about the merger of the entity (Tattva) itself (i.e. speech), then, as nonseparateness i.e. complete merger would be common (between all entities) everywhere,

4.2.1 L.19  किं परत्रैव विशिंष्यात् – ‘अविभागः’ इति;
Why would he, only at a later stage, speak of nonseparateness or complete merger of it (into a person who has attained knowledge, in Sūtra 16)?

4.2.1 L.20  तस्मादत्र वृत्त्युपसंहार-विवक्षा।
Therefore the cessation of the mode or function alone is intended to be spoken of here,

4.2.1 L.21  वाग्वृत्तिः पूर्वमुपसंह्रियते
मनोवृत्ताववस्थितायामित्यर्थः।

The meaning being, that the mode or function of speech is arrested first,
While the mode or function of the mind still continues to function.

4.2.1 L.22  कस्मात्? दर्शनात् –
Whence is it so? Because it is so seen.

4.2.1 L.23  दृश्यते हि वाग्वृत्तेः पूर्वोपसंहारो मनोवृत्तौ विद्यमानायाम्;
It is actually seen that the function of speech is arrested first, even when the function of the mind still exists.

4.2.1 L.24  न तु वाच एव वृत्तिमत्त्या मनस्युपसंहारः केनचिदपि द्रष्टुं शक्यते।
Nobody is able to observe the merger of speech itself along with its function, in the mind.


4.2.1 L.25  ननु श्रुति-सामर्थ्यात् वाच एवायं मनस्यप्ययो युक्त इत्युक्तम् –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) it has been said, that on the authority of the Scriptures, it is logical that there is a merger of speech itself, into the mind.


4.2.1 L.26  नेत्याह, अतत्प्रकृतित्वात्;
We reply — No, because speech has not the mind as its cause.

4.2.1 L.27  यस्य हि यत उत्पत्तिः, तस्य तत्र प्रलयो न्याय्यः, मृदीव शरावस्य;
It is logical (to hold) that, from whatever cause any entity is created, into that, it merges, as for instance, an earthenware trough, into (its cause) the earth.

4.2.1 L.28  न च मनसो वागुत्पद्यत इति किञ्चन प्रमाणमस्ति।
There is no means-of-proof i.e. authority (for saying) that speech results from the mind.

4.2.1 L.29  वृत्त्युद्भवाभिभवौ तु अप्रकृति-समाश्रयावपि दृश्येते;
The generation and the cessation of a function, however, are seen to depend even upon what is not their cause.

4.2.1 L.30  पार्थिवेभ्यो हि इन्धनेभ्यः तैजसस्याग्नेः वृत्तिः उद्भवति, अप्सु च उपशाम्यति।
For instance, the function of fire which is of the nature of Tejas, is generated from fuel which is of the nature of the earth, while it (i.e. fire) is extinguished in water.


4.2.1 L.31  कथं तर्हि अस्मिन्पक्षे शब्दः – ‘वाङ्मनसि सम्पद्यते’ इति?
Supposing this view is correct (says the opponent of Vedānta), how is there a Scriptural statement, that “Speech merges into the Mind”?


4.2.1 L.32  अत आह – शब्दाच्चेति;
The Sūtra-kāra replies — On the authority of the Scriptures themselves.

4.2.1 L.33  शब्दोऽप्यस्मिन्पक्षेऽवकल्पते,
The meaning is that the Scriptural statement is reconcilable in favour of this view,

4.2.1 L.34  वृत्तिवृत्तिमतोः अभेदोपचारादित्यर्थः॥१॥
By metaphorically treating the function of an entity and the entity itself as being non-different. — 1.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अत एव च सर्वाण्यनु॥४.२.२॥
Ata eva ca sarvāṇy-anu.

Ataḥ eva: hence; Ca: and, also; Sarvāṇi: all (organs); Anu (Anugacchanti): after (follow).

🔗 Hence it is that all (sense-organs) follow the lead (of the mind). — 4.2.2.

4.2.2 L.1  ‘तस्मादुपशान्ततेजाः पुनर्भवमिन्द्रियैर्मनसि सम्पद्यमानैः’ (PrasU.3.9) इत्यत्र
In the Scriptural passage “Therefore when (after leaving the body) the Jīva-Self, whose lustre i.e. bodily heat (Tejas) has cooled off, (goes) to a rebirth (through death which is then imminent) along with the sense-organs that have become one with the mind” (PrasU.3.9),

4.2.2 L.2  अविशेषेण सर्वेषामेवेन्द्रियाणां मनसि सम्पत्तिः श्रूयते;
The Scriptures have mentioned the absorption of all sense-organs generally, into the mind.

4.2.2 L.3  तत्रापि अत एव वाच इव चक्षुरादीनामपि सवृत्तिके मनस्यवस्थिते वृत्तिलोप-दर्शनात्
Here it is to be seen from this Scriptural passage, that, for this very reason, viz., that just as speech by way of its mode or function becomes one with the mind, even so, the mode or functions of the eye etc. also merge into the mind which along with its mode or function is still in existence,

4.2.2 L.4  तत्त्व-प्रलयासम्भवात्
शब्दोपपत्तेश्च वृत्तिद्वारेणैव
सर्वाणीन्द्रियाणि मनोऽनुवर्तन्ते।

And, as it is possible to construe the word ‘sense-organ’ occurring in the Scriptures as meaning its function,
And as the complete absorption of the sense-organ as such (Tattva) is not possible,
The Scriptures mean to say that it is only through the merger of their modes or functions that the sense-organs are understood to become one with the mind.

4.2.2 L.5  सर्वेषां करणानां मनस्युपसंहाराविशेषे सति
Now, when the absorption of all the sense-organs generally (by way of their mode or function) into the mind, is being intended to be spoken of by the Scriptures,

4.2.2 L.6  वाचः पृथग्ग्रहणम् ‘वाङ्मनसि सम्पद्यते’ इत्युदाहरणानुरोधेन॥२॥
The special mention of speech (Vāk), the organ of speech (in the Sūtra) is in accordance with the particular instance from the Chāndogya Upaniṣad — “Speech becomes one with the Mind”. — 2.

– 168. Vāg-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
तन्मनः प्राण उत्तरात्॥४.२.३॥
Tan-manaḥ prāṇa uttarāt.

Tat: that; Manaḥ: mind; Prāṇe: in the Prāṇa; Uttarāt: from the subsequent clause (of the Śruti).

🔗 It is understood from, the following (sentence) that, Mind (merges) into Prāṇa (by way of its function or mode). — 4.2.3.

4.2.3 L.1  समधिगतमेतत् – ‘वाङ्मनसि सम्पद्यते’ (ChanU.6.8.6) इत्यत्र
वृत्तिसम्पत्ति-विवक्षेति;

By the Scriptural passage “Speech merges into the Mind” (ChanU.6.8.6),
It is meant to be spoken here, that it is the mode or function (of speech) that merges, is understood.

4.2.3 L.2  अथ यदुत्तरं वाक्यम् ‘मनः प्राणे’ (ChanU.6.8.6) इति,
As regards the next sentence — “Mind merges into Prāṇa” (ChanU.6.8.6) —

4.2.3 L.3  किमत्रापि वृत्ति-सम्पत्तिः एव विवक्ष्यते,
उत वृत्तिमत्सम्पत्तिः –
इति विचिकित्सायाम्,

When it is considered,
As to whether it is intended to be told, that here also, there is merging of the mode or function only,
Or whether there is merging of that to which the mode or function belongs (i.e. the entity, the sense-organ mind) along with its mode or function,


4.2.3 L.4  वृत्तिमत्सम्पत्तिरेव अत्र इति प्राप्तम्,
The conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) is, that it is the merging of the mind along with its mode or function, that is meant to be spoken of here.

4.2.3 L.5  श्रुत्यनुग्रहात्; तत्प्रकृतित्वोपपत्तेश्च;
Because the Scriptures favour the view, and it is reasonably sustainable, that the mind has Prāṇa as its material cause.

4.2.3 L.6  तथा हि – ‘अन्नमयꣳ हि सोम्य मन आपोमयः प्राणः’ (ChanU.6.5.4) इति
अन्नयोनि मन आमनन्ति, अब्योनिं च प्राणम्;

For the Scriptural passage “Oh gentle one, mind has the structure of the earth, and the Prāṇa has the structure of water” (ChanU.6.5.4)
Declares, that the earth is the cause of the mind, and water is the cause of the Prāṇa,

4.2.3 L.7  ‘आपश्चान्नमसृजन्त’ – इति श्रुतिः।
And that “the Āpas (i.e. waters) created the earth” (ChanU.6.2.4).

4.2.3 L.8  अतश्च यन्मनः प्राणे प्रलीयते, अन्नमेव तदप्सु प्रलीयते;
Hence when the mind therefore merges into Prāṇa, it is in fact the earth that merges in water,

4.2.3 L.9  अन्नं हि मनः, आपश्च प्राणः, प्रकृतिविकाराभेदादिति।
For mind in fact is the earth and the Prāṇa is water, because, there is non-difference between the cause and the effect.


4.2.3 L.10  एवं प्राप्ते, ब्रूमः –
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), we reply —

4.2.3 L.11  तदपि आगृहीत-बाह्येन्द्रिय-वृत्ति मनो वृत्तिद्वारेणैव प्राणे प्रलीयत इति
उत्तराद्वाक्याद् अवगन्तव्यम्;

It should be understood from the next sentence,
That it is by way of its mode or function only, that the mind, after having absorbed into itself the modes or functions of the external organs-of-sense merges into Prāṇa,

4.2.3 L.12  तथा हि सुषुप्सोर्मुमूर्षोश्च प्राणवृत्तौ परिस्पन्दात्मिकायाम् अवस्थितायाम्, मनोवृत्तीनामुपशमो दृश्यते;
Because it is seen, that in the case of a man in deep sleep or a man dying, there is a cessation of the function of the mind, while the respiratory function of the Prāṇa still continues.

4.2.3 L.13  न च मनसः स्वरूपाप्ययः प्राणे सम्भवति;
Again the merger of the mind (itself i.e. in its own nature) into Prāṇa is not possible,

4.2.3 L.14  अतत्प्रकृतित्वात्।
Because mind has not Prāṇa as its material cause (Atat-prakṛtitvāt).


4.2.3 L.15  ननु दर्शितं मनसः प्राणप्रकृतित्वम् –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta), it has been shown that the mind has Prāṇa as its material cause.


4.2.3 L.16  नैतत्सारम्;
(We reply) — This is not quite right.

4.2.3 L.17  न हि ईदृशेन प्राणाडिकेन तत्प्रकृतित्वेन
मनः प्राणे सम्पत्तुम् अर्हति;

Mind does not deserve to merge into Prāṇa,
By maintaining by way of such ratiocination (viz. that mind is earth, Prāṇa is water, and the earth originates from water) that mind has Prāṇa as its material cause.

4.2.3 L.18  एवमपि हि अन्ने मनः सम्पद्येत, अप्सु चान्नम्, अप्स्वेव च प्राणः;
Even accepting this view, mind will be absorbed into the earth, and the earth into water, and Prāṇa also into water.

4.2.3 L.19  न ह्येतस्मिन्नपि पक्षे प्राणभाव-परिणताभ्योऽद्भ्यो मनो जायत इति किञ्चन प्रमाणम् अस्ति;
Besides, even in this view there is no authority for the statement that mind has its origin in water which has modified itself into Prāṇa.

4.2.3 L.20  तस्मात् न मनसः प्राणे स्वरूपाप्ययः।
Therefore, mind itself (with its own nature) is not absorbed into Prāṇa.

4.2.3 L.21  वृत्त्यप्ययेऽपि तु शब्दोऽवकल्पते,
वृत्तिवृत्तिमतोः अभेदोपचारात्
इति दर्शितम्॥३॥

It has been shown (already) that
Even the Scriptural statement as it is, holds good, even if only the mode or function (of the mind) is understood to be absorbed,
By metaphorically holding a mode or function (of an entity) and the entity to which such function belongs, as being non-different. — 3.

– 169. Mano-(A)dhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.2.4 Su..5 Su..6

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
सोऽध्यक्षे तदुपगमादिभ्यः॥४.२.४॥
So'dhyakṣe tad-upagamādibhyaḥ.

Saḥ: that (Prāṇa); Adhyakṣe: in the ruler (the Jīva); Tad-upagama-ādibhyaḥ: on account of the (statements as to the Prāṇas) coming to it and so on.

🔗 The Prāṇa (vital breath) merges into the presiding entity (Adhyakṣa i.e. the Jīva-Self) because of its reaching the Jīva-Self, the presiding entity (Adhyakṣa). — 4.2.4.

4.2.4 L.1  स्थितमेतत् – यस्य यतो नोत्पत्तिः, तस्य तस्मिन्वृत्ति-प्रलयः, न स्वरूपप्रलय इति;
It has thus been established, that there is merger of merely the mode or function of an entity and not of the entity itself into another entity, from which the former entity has not had its origin.

4.2.4 L.2  इदमिदानीम् ‘प्राणस्तेजसि’ इत्यत्र चिन्त्यते –
Now, with regard to the Scriptural statement, “Prāṇa (merges) into Tejas”, it is being considered

4.2.4 L.3  किं यथाश्रुति प्राणस्य तेजस्येव वृत्त्युपसंहारः,
Whether, as stated by the Scriptures, this merging of the mode or function of Prāṇa, is into the Tejas only,

4.2.4 L.4  किं वा देहेन्द्रियपञ्जराध्यक्षे जीव इति।
Or it is into the Jīva-Self, the entity presiding over the bodily cage.


4.2.4 L.5  तत्र श्रुतेरनतिशङ्क्यत्वात् प्राणस्य तेजस्येव सम्पत्तिः स्यात्,
With regard to that, the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) is, that, as the Scriptures are above being doubted (Anatiśaṅkyatvāt), the merging of Prāṇa must be into Tejas,

4.2.4 L.6  अश्रुतकल्पनाया अन्याय्यत्वात् –
Because the assumption of anything that is not stated by the Scriptures is not logical.


4.2.4 L.7  इत्येवं प्राप्ते प्रतिपद्यते – सोऽध्यक्ष इति।
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), the Sūtra-kāra explains — The Prāṇa merges into the presiding entity (the Jīva-Self).

4.2.4 L.8  स प्रकृतः प्राणः, अध्यक्षे अविद्या-कर्म-पूर्वप्रज्ञोपाधिके विज्ञानात्मनि अवतिष्ठते;
The Prāṇa which is relevant (to the present discussion) subsists in the Jīva-Self i.e. the Cognitional Self, which is the presiding entity, having Nescience (Avidyā), action (Karma), and consciousness of the former birth (Pūrva-prajñā) as its limiting adjuncts.

4.2.4 L.9  तत्प्रधाना प्राणवृत्तिः भवतीत्यर्थः।
The meaning is that the function of Prāṇa has mainly that Jīva-Self as its basis (of operation).

4.2.4 L.10  कुतः? तदुपगमादिभ्यः –
Whence is it so? Because it is understood, that they (i.e. the Prāṇas i.e. sense-organs which have merged in the Prāṇa, the vital breath) reach the Self.

4.2.4 L.11  ‘एवमेवेममात्मानमन्तकाले सर्वे प्राणा अभिसमायन्ति यत्रैतदूर्ध्वोच्छ्वासी भवति’ इति हि
The Scriptural passage “Just in this way do all the Prāṇas gather round the Self at the time of death, when man reaches the final gasping stage” (BrhU.4.3.38),

4.2.4 L.12  श्रुत्यन्तरम् अध्यक्षोपगामिनः सर्वान्प्राणान् अविशेषेण दर्शयति;
Says so, commonly, of all Prāṇas in general, and a Scriptural passage elsewhere indicates, how all the Prāṇas approach the presiding entity,

4.2.4 L.13  विशेषेण च ‘तमुत्क्रामन्तं प्राणोऽनूत्क्रामति’ (BrhU.4.4.2) इति
And the Scriptures indicate in particular by the passage “When the Self goes out of the body, all the Prāṇas (i.e. sense-organs) follow the Self”,

4.2.4 L.14  पञ्चवृत्तेः प्राणस्य अध्यक्षानुगामितां दर्शयति,
As to how the Prāṇa of the five-fold modes or functions (i.e. of Prāṇa, Apāna, Vyāna, Udāna, Samāna) follows the presiding entity (i.e. the Jīva-Self),

4.2.4 L.15  तदनुवृत्तितां च इतरेषाम्
‘प्राणमनूत्क्रामन्तꣳ सर्वे प्राणा अनूत्क्रामन्ति’ (BrhU.4.4.2) इति;

And the Scriptural statement “When Prāṇa sets forth out of the body, all the Prāṇas, (i.e. sense-organs) follow that Prāṇa (i.e. vital breath)” (BrhU.4.4.2),
Indicates how the other Prāṇas follow in the wake of the Prāṇa of the five-fold modes or functions.

4.2.4 L.16  ‘सविज्ञानो भवति’ इति च
And the Scriptural statement “He becomes equipped with special cognition” (by way of being equipped with the sense-organs)

4.2.4 L.17  अध्यक्षस्य अन्तर्विज्ञानवत्त्व-प्रदर्शनेन
Demonstrates how the presiding entity becomes possessed of internal consciousness (Antar-vijñānatva),

4.2.4 L.18  तस्मिन् अपीतकरण-ग्रामस्य प्राणस्य अवस्थानं गमयति।
And makes it understood that the Prāṇa (i.e. vital breath) in whom the aggregate of all the other sense-organs has merged, subsists in it (i.e. in the presiding entity i.e. the Jīva-Self).


4.2.4 L.19  ननु ‘प्राणस्तेजसि’ इति श्रूयते;
But (says the opponent of Vedānta), the Scriptural passage declares that Prāṇa merges into Tejas.

4.2.4 L.20  कथं प्राणोऽध्यक्षे इत्यधिकावापः क्रियते?
How then do you go further and accept in addition that the Prāṇa merges into the presiding entity?


4.2.4 L.21  नैष दोषः, अध्यक्ष-प्रधानत्वाद् उत्क्रमणादि-व्यवहारस्य,
(We reply) — This is no fault, because, with regard to this business of the exodus from the body (Utkrānti), as the presiding entity (the Jīva-Self) is the main entity that is concerned in it,

4.2.4 L.22  श्रुत्यन्तर-गतस्यापि च विशेषस्यापेक्षणीयत्वात्॥४॥
Any special circumstances mentioned in other Scriptural passages, ought to be given due regard to. — 4.

[Go top]

4.2.5 L.1  कथं तर्हि ‘प्राणस्तेजसि’ इति श्रुतिरिति
The doubt here is as to how the Scriptural statement “The Prāṇa merges into Tejas” is to be explained.


4.2.5 L.2  अत आह –
The Sūtra-kāra replies: —

←PrevNext→
भूतेषु तच्छ्रुतेः॥४.२.५॥
Bhūteṣu tac-chruteḥ.

Bhūteṣu: in the elements; Tat-Śruteḥ: as that can be understood from Śruti, from the Śruti texts to that effect, there being a Vedic statement about that.

🔗 (The presiding entity along with Prāṇa) resides in the (subtle) elements, because the Scriptures declare to that effect. — 4.2.5.

4.2.5 L.3  स प्राण-सम्पृक्तोऽध्यक्षः तेजःसहचरितेषु भूतेषु देहबीज-भूतेषु सूक्ष्मेषु अवतिष्ठत इत्यवगन्तव्यम्,
It should be understood that the presiding entity which is in conjunction with Prāṇa, resides in the subtle elements, which are the associates of Tejas and which are the seeds of the body,

4.2.5 L.4  ‘प्राणस्तेजसि’ इति श्रुतेः।
Because of the Scriptural statement — “Prāṇa (merges) into Tejas”.


4.2.5 L.5  ननु च इयं श्रुतिः प्राणस्य तेजसि स्थितिं दर्शयति,
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) this Scriptural statement indicates the residing of Prāṇa in the Tejas,

4.2.5 L.6  न प्राणसम्पृक्तस्याध्यक्षस्य –
And it does not say that the presiding entity having Prāṇa in conjunction resides in the Tejas?


4.2.5 L.7  नैष दोषः, सोऽध्यक्षे – इति
अध्यक्षस्याप्यन्तराल उपसंख्यातत्वात्;

(We reply) — This is no fault. Because, by the preceding Sūtra, which says — “Prāṇa (merges) into the presiding entity”,
(It should be understood that) the presiding entity has been enumerated by the Scriptures as coming in between (Antar-āla) the Prāṇa and the Tejas.

4.2.5 L.8  योऽपि हि स्रुघ्नान्मथुरां गत्वा मथुरायाः पाटलिपुत्रं व्रजति, सोऽपि स्रुघ्नात् पाटलिपुत्रं यातीति शक्यते वदितुम्;
It is possible to say of a man, who, after going to Mathurā from Srughna proceeds from Mathurā to Pāṭali-putra, that he goes from Srughna to Pāṭali-putra.

4.2.5 L.9  तस्मात् ‘प्राणस्तेजसि’ इति
Therefore, by the Scriptural passage “Prāṇa (merges) into Tejas”,

4.2.5 L.10  प्राण-सम्पृक्तस्याध्यक्षस्यैव एतत् तेजः-सहचरितेषु भूतेष्ववस्थानम्॥५॥
It is precisely the residing of the presiding entity in conjunction with Prāṇa, in the subtle elements which are the associates of Tejas, that is meant. — 5.

[Go top]

4.2.6 L.1  कथं तेजःसहचरितेषु भूतेष्वित्युच्यते,
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) how could it be said that the presiding entity resides in the elements which are the associates of Tejas,

4.2.6 L.2  यावता एकमेव तेजः श्रूयते – ‘प्राणस्तेजसि’ इति?
When the Scriptures speak only of one element viz. the Tejas, thus — “Prāṇa (merges) into Tejas”?


4.2.6 L.3  अत आह –
The Sūtra-kāra replies: —

←PrevNext→
नैकस्मिन्दर्शयतो हि॥४.२.६॥
Naikasmin darśayato hi.

Na: not; Ekasmin: in one; Darśayataḥ: (both the Śruti and Smṛti) declare so, both the Śruti and Smṛti show; Hi: as, for, because.

🔗 But the Jīva-Self does not reside in one (element i.e. Tejas) only, because (the Scriptures and Smṛtis) both indicate this. — 4.2.6.

4.2.6 L.4  न एकस्मिन्नेव तेजसि शरीरान्तर-प्रेप्सावेलायां जीवोऽवतिष्ठते,
The Jīva-Self, at the time of entering into another body, does not happen to reside in Tejas only,

4.2.6 L.5  कार्यस्य शरीरस्यानेकात्मकत्व-दर्शनात्।
Because the gross physical body, which is the effect (of the subtle body), is seen to be composed of many (elements).

4.2.6 L.6  दर्शयतश्च एतमर्थं प्रश्न-प्रतिवचने ‘आपः पुरुषवचसः’ (ChanU.5.3.3) इति;
The same meaning is conveyed by the passage in the form of a question and answer, thus — “(Do you know) how Āpaḥ (during the fifth oblation) attain the name of a Puruṣa (man)?” (ChanU.5.3.3).

4.2.6 L.7  तद्व्याख्यातम् ‘त्र्यात्मकत्वात्तु भूयस्त्वात्’ (BrS.3.1.2) इत्यत्र।
This has been explained thus — “Because (Āpaḥ) has a triple composition (of elements), (but Āpaḥ is particularly mentioned) because of its preponderance” (BrSEng.3.1.2).

4.2.6 L.8  श्रुतिस्मृती च एतमर्थं दर्शयतः;
Both the Scriptures and Smṛtis indicate the same thing.

4.2.6 L.9  श्रुतिः – ‘पृथ्वीमय आपोमयो वायुमय आकाशमयस्तेजोमयः’ इत्याद्या;
The Scriptures say thus — “(This Self) has the structure of Earth, Water, Vāyu, Ākāśa and Tejas” (BrhU.4.4.5).

4.2.6 L.10  स्मृतिरपि – ‘अण्व्यो मात्राऽविनाशिन्यो दशार्धानां तु याः स्मृताः। ताभिः सार्धमिदं सर्वं सम्भवत्यनुपूर्वशः’ इत्याद्या।
The Smṛti says thus — Along with the subtle and indestructible minute parts of the five (lit., half of ten) elements, all this world is born, as of yore.


4.2.6 L.11  ननु च उपसंहृतेषु वागादिषु करणेषु शरीरान्तरप्रेप्सावेलायाम्
‘क्वायं तदा पुरुषो भवति’ (BrhU.3.2.13) इत्युपक्रम्य
श्रुत्यन्तरं कर्माश्रयतां निरूपयति –
‘तौ ह यदूचतुः कर्म हैव तदूचतुरथ ह यत्प्रशशꣳसतुः कर्म हैव तत्प्रशशꣳसतुः’ (BrhU.3.2.13) इति;

But (says the opponent of Vedānta) beginning with the Scriptural passage “Where, at that time, does the Puruṣa happen to be?”,
The subsequent Scriptural passage “What these two (viz. Yājña-valkya and Ārta-bhāga) spoke about was but Karma (action), what they praised (as being the material cause of the world) was but Karma (action)” (BrhU.3.2.13),
Explains, how, when all the sense-organs such as speech etc. become merged, at the time of the Self’s going away to another body,
It is but Karma on which the Self depends.


4.2.6 L.12  अत्रोच्यते –
The Sūtra-kāra says with regard to this —

4.2.6 L.13  तत्र कर्म-प्रयुक्तस्य ग्रहातिग्रह-संज्ञकस्य इन्द्रियविषयात्मकस्य बन्धनस्य प्रवृत्तिः
इति कर्माश्रयतोक्ता;

There, what is intended to be spoken of as (the Self’s) dependence on Karma (action),
Is the bringing about of the bondage (of the Self) by the tendency of sense-organs and sense-objects termed as Graha and Atigraha respectively, which is promoted by Karma (action).

4.2.6 L.14  इह पुनः भूतोपादानाद्देहान्तरोत्पत्तिः
इति भूताश्रयत्वमुक्तम्;

Here, on the other hand, what is spoken of as the dependence (of the Self) on the elements,
Is because of the desire to speak of the generation of another body, out of the elements, as its material cause.

4.2.6 L.15  प्रशंसाशब्दादपि तत्र प्राधान्यमात्रं कर्मणः प्रदर्शितम्,
Besides by the use of the word “praise” (Praśaṃsā), what is indicated is, that action is of the chiefest importance,

4.2.6 L.16  न त्वाश्रयान्तरं निवारितम्;
And not, that the dependence (of the Self) on another entity, is excluded.

4.2.6 L.17  तस्मादविरोधः॥६॥
Therefore, there is no contradiction (in those two passages). — 6.

– 170. Adhyakṣa-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
समाना चासृत्युपक्रमादमृतत्वं चानुपोष्य॥४.२.७॥
Samānā cā-sṛty-upakramād amṛtatvaṃ cānupoṣya.

Samānā: common; Ca: and; Ā-sṛti-upakramāt: up to the beginning of their ways; A-mṛtatvam: immortality; Ca: and; An-upoṣya: without burning, without dissolution.

🔗 (This going out of the body) is common (to both the learned and the ignorant), up to the beginning of the Path. (This) immortality is of those who have not completely destroyed their afflictions (such as Avidyā etc.). — 4.2.7.

4.2.7 L.1  सेयमुत्क्रान्तिः किं विद्वदविदुषोः समाना,
With regard to those who entertain a doubt, as to whether this going out (of the body) is common both to the learned and the ignorant,

4.2.7 L.2  किं वा विशेषवती –
Or whether, there is any distinctive peculiarity about it, (and that it applies only to the ignorant),


4.2.7 L.3  इति विशयानानां विशेषवतीति तावत्प्राप्तम्।
The conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) is that there is such distinctive peculiarity (i.e. it is applicable to only one of the two).

4.2.7 L.4  भूताश्रयविशिष्टा ह्येषा;
It relates to the Jīva-Self which depends on the subtle elements.

4.2.7 L.5  पुनर्भवाय च भूतान्याश्रीयन्ते;
It is for rebirth that these subtle elements are resorted to (by the Jīva-Self).

4.2.7 L.6  न च विदुषः पुनर्भवः सम्भवति;
Rebirth is not possible in the case of the learned,

4.2.7 L.7  अमृतत्वं हि विद्वानश्नुते – इति स्थितिः;
Because it is a firmly established conclusion that no rebirth is possible for a learned man and that he attains immortality.

4.2.7 L.8  तस्मादविदुष एव एषा उत्क्रान्तिः।
Therefore, this manner of going out (of the body) is only for the ignorant.


4.2.7 L.9  ननु विद्या-प्रकरणे समाम्नानात्
But (says the Vedāntin) — As this going out is mentioned (in the Scriptures) in the chapter dealing with the knowledge of the Self i.e. Ātmā-Vidyā (in Chāndogya 6.8),

4.2.7 L.10  विदुष एव एषा भवेत् –
This going out may be only in the case of the learned.


4.2.7 L.11  न, स्वापादिवत् यथाप्राप्तानुकीर्तनात्;
(The opponent of Vedānta replies) — No, like sleep etc. it is only referred to as a thing already established (by other means-of-proof) elsewhere before.

4.2.7 L.12  यथा हि ‘यत्रैतत्पुरुषः स्वपिति नाम’ (ChanU.6.8.1), ‘अशिशिषति नाम’ (ChanU.6.8.3), ‘पिपासति नाम’ (ChanU.6.8.5) इति च
Similarly, just as elsewhere in Scriptural passages, such as “When a man indeed desires to sleep, or desires to eat or desires to drink” (ChanU.6.8.1-5.3.5),

4.2.7 L.13  सर्वप्राणि-साधारणा एव स्वापादयोऽनुकीर्त्यन्ते विद्या-प्रकरणेऽपि
Sleep etc., which are common to all beings generally, are referred to even in the chapter dealing with the knowledge of the Self,

4.2.7 L.14  प्रतिपिपादयिषितवस्तु-प्रतिपादनानुगुण्येन,
As being best calculated to explain the thing desired to be explained,

4.2.7 L.15  न तु विदुषो विशेषवन्तो विधित्स्यन्ते;
And the Scriptures there, do not particularly purport to enjoin them on the learned,

4.2.7 L.16  एवम् इयमपि उत्क्रान्तिः महाजनगतैवानुकीर्त्यते,
Even so, this going out of the body which applies in the case of the people in general is here spoken of in a general way only,

4.2.7 L.17  यस्यां परस्यां देवतायां पुरुषस्य प्रयतः तेजः सम्पद्यते स आत्मा तत्त्वमसि – इत्येतत्प्रतिपादयितुम्।
With a view to propound, thus — “That Highest Deity in which the Tejas of the man about to die, merges, is the Ātmā (i.e. the Highest Self), and, that Self thou art”.

4.2.7 L.18  प्रतिषिद्धा च एषा विदुषः –
This manner of going out is denied in the case of the learned man,

4.2.7 L.19  ‘न तस्य प्राणा उत्क्रामन्ति’ (BrhU.4.4.6) इति।
On the authority of the Scriptural passage “His Prāṇas do not depart” (BrhU.4.4.6).

4.2.7 L.20  तस्मात् अविदुष एवैषेति॥
Therefore, this (going out of the body) is applicable only in the case of the ignorant.


4.2.7 L.21  एवं प्राप्ते, ब्रूमः –
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), we reply —

4.2.7 L.22  समाना चैषा उत्क्रान्तिः ‘वाङ्मनसि’ इत्याद्या
This going out of the body, beginning with the Scriptural statement, that “Speech (merges) into the Mind” etc.,

4.2.7 L.23  विद्वदविदुषोः आसृत्युपक्रमात् भवितुमर्हति,
Deserves to be common to both the learned as well as the ignorant up to the beginning of the Path,

4.2.7 L.24  अविशेषश्रवणात्;
Because nothing special in particular is mentioned by the Scriptures about it.

4.2.7 L.25  अविद्वान् देहबीजभूतानि भूतसूक्ष्माण्याश्रित्य
The ignorant person (by which, his Self is meant) after resorting to the subtle elements which form the seeds of the body,

4.2.7 L.26  कर्मप्रयुक्तो देहग्रहणम् अनुभवन् संसरति,
And being impelled by (his) Karma, goes out for experiencing the acquisition of a body,

4.2.7 L.27  विद्वांस्तु ज्ञानप्रकाशितं मोक्षनाडी-द्वारम् आश्रयते –
And the learned man on the other hand resorts to the Nāḍī which is the way to Mokṣa (i.e. Final Release) and which is illuminated by knowledge.

4.2.7 L.28  तदेतत् ‘आसृत्युपक्रमात्’ इत्युक्तम्।
The same is expressed (in the Sūtra), by “Upto the beginning of the path”.


4.2.7 L.29  ननु अमृतत्वं विदुषा प्राप्तव्यम्,
But (says the opponent of Vedānta), it is immortality which a learned man aims to attain

4.2.7 L.30  न च तद्देशान्तरायत्तम्,
And that does not depend upon (a man’s going) from one place to another, (i.e. it does hot involve any movement),

4.2.7 L.31  तत्र कुतो भूताश्रयत्वं सृत्युपक्रमो वेति –
So how can there ever be any such resort to subtle elements or any such going up to the Path (in his case)?


4.2.7 L.32  अत्रोच्यते – अनुपोष्य च, इदम्, अदग्ध्वा अत्यन्तम् अविद्यादीन् क्लेशान्,
To that (we reply) — This is for those who have not had their afflictions (i.e. Avidyā) destroyed (Anupoṣya).

4.2.7 L.33  अपरविद्या-सामर्थ्यात् आपेक्षिकम् अमृतत्वं प्रेप्सते सम्भवति
Where a man desires to obtain only a relative immortality on the strength of the Vidyā of qualified Brahman, without having got rid of afflictions such as Nescience etc.,

4.2.7 L.34  तत्र सृत्युपक्रमः भूताश्रयत्वं च –
There, in their case, the beginning of the Path and a resort to subtle elements is possible,

4.2.7 L.35  न हि निराश्रयाणां प्राणानां गतिरुपपद्यते;
Because, it is not reasonably sustainable, that any movement (towards Final Release) could be possible in the case of Prāṇas which have not resorted to any such subtle elements.

4.2.7 L.36  तस्माददोषः॥७॥
Therefore, there is no fault (of any kind here). — 7.

– 171. Ā-sṛty-upakrama-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.2.8 Su..9 Su..10 Su..11

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
तदाऽपीतेः संसारव्यपदेशात्॥४.२.८॥
Tad ā'pīteḥ saṃsāra-vyapadeśāt.

Tad: that, aggregate of the elements, the sum total of the subtle elements; Ā-apīteḥ: till the attainment of Brahman (through knowledge); Saṃsāra-vyapadeśāt: because (scriptures) declare the state of relative existence.

🔗 That (i.e. Tejas) subsists upto the time of complete merging (Pralaya), because there is reference to transmigratory existence till that time (in the Scriptures). — 4.2.8.

4.2.8 L.1  ‘तेजः परस्यां देवतायाम्’ (ChanU.6.8.6) इत्यत्र प्रकरणसामर्थ्यात्
तत् यथा प्रकृतं तेजः साध्यक्षं
सप्राणं सकरणग्रामं भूतान्तरसहितं प्रयतः पुंसः परस्यां देवतायां सम्पद्यत इत्येतदुक्तं भवति;

That the Scriptural passage “The Tejas (merges) into the transcendent deity (i.e. Brahman)”
Means that the Tejas of the person dying, which is the subject matter of the context here, along with the presiding entity,
Prāṇa, the set of sense-organs, and other elements, merges completely into the transcendent deity, has been stated on the authority of the Scriptural chapter.

4.2.8 L.2  कीदृशी पुनरियं सम्पत्तिः स्यादिति चिन्त्यते।
Of what nature, however, can this merger (i.e. Sampatti into Brahman) be, is being considered now.


4.2.8 L.3  तत्र आत्यन्तिक एव तावत् स्वरूपप्रविलय इति प्राप्तम्,
With regard to this the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) is, that this merging of the Tejas (i.e. of its own nature) is a total merging (into the transcendent deity),

4.2.8 L.4  तत्प्रकृतित्वोपपत्तेः;
Because, that it has that (i.e. the transcendent deity) as its own cause, is reasonably sustainable.

4.2.8 L.5  सर्वस्य हि जनिमतो वस्तुजातस्य प्रकृतिः परा देवतेति प्रतिष्ठापितम्;
It has been established, that the Highest deity (Brahman) is the material cause (Prakṛti i.e. Upādāna cause) of the entire set of entities liable to be created,

4.2.8 L.6  तस्मात् आत्यन्तिकी इयमविभागापत्तिरिति।
And hence this attainment (by an entity) of this condition of non-separation (with its material cause), is therefore absolute and complete.


4.2.8 L.7  एवं प्राप्ते, ब्रूमः – तत् तेजआदि भूतसूक्ष्मं श्रोत्रादिकरणाश्रयभूतम्
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), we reply – These subtle elements, Tejas etc., which form the substratum of all sense-organs, such as the sense-organ of hearing etc.,

4.2.8 L.8  आपीतेः आसंसारमोक्षात् सम्यग्ज्ञाननिमित्तात् अवतिष्ठते –
Subsist upto the time of merging i.e. upto the time of this Final Release from transmigratory existence resulting from correct i.e. perfect knowledge,

4.2.8 L.9  ‘योनिमन्ये प्रपद्यन्ते शरीरत्वाय देहिनः। स्थाणुमन्येऽनुसंयन्ति यथाकर्म यथाश्रुतम्’ (KathU.2.2.7) इत्यादिसंसार-व्यपदेशात्;
Because, the following Scriptural passage, viz. “Some enter into the species (Yoni) of beings which have a body, for the purpose of acquiring such a body, and others acquire existence as inanimate (rather as, ‘stationary’, like plant) things, according to what their actions are, and what they know” (KathU.2.2.7), indicates such transmigratory existence (in the case of the ignorant),

4.2.8 L.10  अन्यथा हि सर्वः प्रायणसमय एव उपाधिप्रत्यस्तमयादत्यन्तं ब्रह्म सम्पद्येत,
Because otherwise, every one would attain absolute Brahman by the mere extinction of all limiting adjuncts, just at the moment of death.

4.2.8 L.11  तत्र विधिशास्त्रमनर्थकं स्यात्, विद्या-शास्त्रं च;
In that case both the Śāstra which gives injunctions, as also the Śāstra of correct i.e. perfect knowledge, would be rendered meaningless.

4.2.8 L.12  मिथ्याज्ञान-निमित्तश्च बन्धो न सम्यग्ज्ञानादृते विस्रंसितुमर्हति;
Bondage, of which false-knowledge is the cause, does not deserve to be dissolved, except through correct i.e. perfect knowledge.

4.2.8 L.13  तस्मात् तत्प्रकृतित्वेऽपि सुषुप्ति-प्रलयवत्
बीजभावावशेषैव एषा सत्-सम्पत्तिरिति॥८॥

Therefore, even though it (i.e. Brahman) is the cause (of all the subtle elements) this merging into Sat (i.e. supreme being) is — as in the case of deep sleep and the great absorption (Pralaya) —
Only in such a way that they (i.e. the Jīva-Self, Prāṇa, the set of sense-organs and the subtle elements) still continue to exist in a seed form. — 8.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
सूक्ष्मं प्रमाणतश्च तथोपलब्धेः॥४.२.९॥
Sūkṣmaṃ pramāṇataś ca tathopalabdheḥ.

Sūkṣmam: subtle; Pramāṇataḥ: as regards size; Ca: and; Tathā: thus, so; Upalabdheḥ: because it is experienced, it being observed.

🔗 (This Tejas) is subtle in its nature and in its size, because it is seen to be so. — 4.2.9.

4.2.9 L.1  तच्च इतरभूतसहितं तेजो जीवस्य अस्माच्छरीरात् प्रवसत आश्रयभूतं स्वरूपतः परिमाणतश्च सूक्ष्मं भवितुमर्हति।
This Tejas (of a person) which, along with the other subtle elements, is resorted to by the Jīva-Self as it goes out of the body, deserves to be subtle by itself (in its own nature and size).

4.2.9 L.2  तथा हि नाडी-निष्क्रमणश्रवणादिभ्योऽस्य सौक्ष्म्यमुपलभ्यते।
Its subtle nature is also understood from the Scriptural declaration about its passage through the Nāḍīs etc.,

4.2.9 L.3  तत्र तनुत्वात् सञ्चारोपपत्तिः;
And its rarefied fineness (Tanutva) makes its movement reasonably sustainable,

4.2.9 L.4  स्वच्छत्वाच्च अप्रतिघातोपपत्तिः;
And its freedom from obstruction is made reasonably sustainable by reason of its pristine purity,

4.2.9 L.5  अत एव च देहान्निर्गच्छत् पार्श्वस्थैर्नोपलभ्यते॥९॥
And hence it is, precisely, that it is not perceived by persons round about (a person dying) as it goes out of the body. — 9.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
नोपमर्देनातः॥४.२.१०॥
Nopamardenātaḥ.

Na: not; Upamardena: by the destruction; Ataḥ: therefore, because of this reason.

🔗 Hence it is that (the subtle body is not destroyed) on the destruction of the gross body. — 4.2.10.

4.2.10 L.1  अत एव च सूक्ष्मत्वात् नास्य स्थूलस्य शरीरस्योपमर्देन दाहादि-निमित्तेन इतरत्सूक्ष्मं शरीरमुपमृद्यते॥१०॥
Hence it is that when the gross body is destroyed during cremation etc., this subtle body is not so destroyed. — 10.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अस्यैव चोपपत्तेरेष ऊष्मा॥४.२.११॥
Asyaiva copapatter eṣa ūṣmā.

Asya: of the subtle body; Eva: verily, certainly, alone; Ca: and, also; Upapatteḥ: it being possible, because of possibility; Eṣaḥ: this; Uṣmā: (bodily) heat.

🔗 This warmth is of this (i.e. the subtle body), because, that it is so, is reasonably sustainable. — 4.2.11.

4.2.11 L.1  अस्यैव च सूक्ष्मस्य शरीरस्य एष ऊष्मा, यमेतस्मिञ्जीवच्छरीरे संस्पर्शेनोष्माणं विजानन्ति।
It is precisely the warmth of this subtle body, which is experienced (by people) on touching the body,

4.2.11 L.2  तथा हि मृतावस्थायाम् अवस्थितेऽपि देहे विद्यमानेष्वपि च रूपादिषु देह-गुणेषु, न ऊष्मा उपलभ्यते,
For when the body is in the defunct condition, even when the body still subsists and the attributes of the body, such as form etc., are still present, no warmth is perceivable,

4.2.11 L.3  जीवदवस्थायामेव तु उपलभ्यते –
While it is so perceivable only when the body is in a living condition,

4.2.11 L.4  इत्यत उपपद्यते प्रसिद्धशरीरव्यतिरिक्त-व्यपाश्रय एव एष ऊष्मेति।
And hence it is that it is reasonably sustainable that this warmth has its resort elsewhere than in this well-known body as such.

4.2.11 L.5  तथा च श्रुतिः – ‘उष्ण एव जीविष्यञ्शीतो मरिष्यन्’ इति॥११॥
Of a similar import is the Scriptural passage “He is warm while he is living and cold when he is dead”. — 11.

– 172. Saṃsāra-vyapadeśa-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.2.12 Su..13 Su..14

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
प्रतिषेधादिति चेन्न शारीरात्॥४.२.१२॥
Pratiṣedhād iti cen na śārīrāt.

Pratiṣedhāt: on account of the denial; Iti: so; Cet: if (if it be argued); Na: not so, you cannot say so; Śārīrāt: from the individual soul.

🔗 If it be said that because of the denial (by the Scriptures), (the Prāṇas i.e. sense-organs of him who has realized Brahman) do not go out of the body, (we, the Vedāntins say) — No, because the denial is meant to imply that they i.e. the Prāṇas do not leave the Jīva-Self. — 4.2.12.

4.2.12 L.1  ‘अमृतत्वं चानुपोष्य’ इत्यतो विशेषणात्
(The Vedāntin says) — By the qualification made by the Scriptural passage “Immortality without having destroyed the afflictions (such as Avidyā)”

4.2.12 L.2  आत्यन्तिकेऽमृतत्वे गत्युत्क्रान्त्योः अभावोऽभ्युपगतः;
It is understood that in the case of absolute immortality there is absence of any movement and going out (of the Jīva-Self),

4.2.12 L.3  तत्रापि केनचित्कारणेन उत्क्रान्तिम् आशङ्क्य प्रतिषेधति –
Still (the Sūtra-kāra) by raising a doubt that this ‘going out’ may still be there on account of some reason or other, ultimately denies it all the same

4.2.12 L.4  ‘अथाकामयमानो योऽकामो निष्काम आप्तकाम आत्मकामो भवति न तस्य प्राणा उत्क्रामन्ति ब्रह्मैव सन्ब्रह्माप्येति’ (BrhU.4.4.6) इति।
By the Scriptural passage “Now about one who does not desire (Akāmayamānaḥ), who therefore is without desire (Akāma), who is free from (any) desire (Niṣkāma), when (his) desires have all been fulfilled (Āpta-kāma), he whose desire is all contained in the Self (Ātma-kāma), and who being Brahman himself, merges into Brahman” (BrhU.4.4.6).

4.2.12 L.5  अतः परविद्या-विषयात् प्रतिषेधात्
Hence, this denial, thus, having reference to the subject of the knowledge of the Highest Brahman,

4.2.12 L.6  न परब्रह्मविदो देहात् प्राणानामुत्क्रान्तिरस्तीति चेत्,
When it is said (by the Vedāntin) that in the case of those who have realized Brahman, his Prāṇas do not go out of the body,


4.2.12 L.7  नेत्युच्यते, यतः शारीरादात्मन एष उत्क्रान्तिप्रतिषेधः प्राणानाम्, न शरीरात्।
(The opponent of Vedānta says) — No, this denial about the going out of the Prāṇas has reference to the going out of the Prāṇas from the embodied Jīva-Self and not from the body.


4.2.12 L.8  कथमवगम्यते? ‘न तस्मात्प्राणा उत्क्रामन्ति’ इति शाखान्तरे
How is it understood (asks the Vedāntin)? Because in the Scriptural passage of the followers of another branch (of the Vedas), thus — “Prāṇas do not go away from him (Tasmāt)”,

4.2.12 L.9  पञ्चमी-प्रयोगात्;
The ablative case (Tasmāt i.e. from him) is used, (and not the genitive, Tasya i.e. of him).

4.2.12 L.10  सम्बन्धसामान्य-विषया हि षष्ठी
The genitive case which refers only to a general relation is thus restricted in its ordinary application in a general way,

4.2.12 L.11  शाखान्तरगतया पञ्चम्या सम्बन्ध-विशेषे व्यवस्थाप्यते;
And is made to govern a special relation by the ablative case used in the other branch of the Scriptures.

4.2.12 L.12  ‘तस्मात्’ इति च प्राधान्यात् अभ्युदयनिःश्रेयसाधिकृतो देही सम्बध्यते, न देहः;
The words “from him” are made to govern the Jīva-Self, which alone is competent as regards secular prosperity and Highest Bliss and which is the chief subject (of the chapter) and not the body.

4.2.12 L.13  न तस्मादुच्चिक्रमिषोः जीवात् प्राणा अपक्रामन्ति, सहैव तेन भवन्ति – इत्यर्थः॥१२॥
Therefore, the meaning is that the Prāṇas do not go away from the Jīva-Self as it leaves the body, but continue to be with it. — 12.

[Go top]

4.2.13 L.1  सप्राणस्य च प्रवसतो भवत्युत्क्रान्तिर्देहादिति एवं प्राप्ते,
Thus, the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) being, that the going away of the Jīva-Self from the body is along with the Prāṇas (i.e. sense-organs),


4.2.13 L.2  प्रत्युच्यते –
The Sūtra-kāra refutes it, thus: —

←PrevNext→
स्पष्टो ह्येकेषाम्॥४.२.१३॥
Spaṣṭo hyekeṣām.

Spaṣṭaḥ: clear; Hi: for; Ekeṣām: of some Śākhās or schools; the statement of some Śrutis.

🔗 (It is not as you say) because, in the case of the followers of one branch, there is a clear denial of the going out of the body (by the Jīva-Self). — 4.2.13.

4.2.13 L.3  नैतदस्ति –
यदुक्तम्,परब्रह्मविदोऽपि देहात् अस्त्युत्क्रान्तिः
उत्क्रान्ति-प्रतिषेधस्य देह्यपादानत्वादिति;

The statement (by the opponent of Vedānta), that there is such going out of the body of the Prāṇas (i.e. sense-organs), even in the case of one who knows the transcendent Brahman,
Because, the denial of such going out, thus — “from him the Prāṇas do not go out”, is with reference to the going out (Apādāna) of the Prāṇas from the embodied Jīva-Self,
Is not correct,

4.2.13 L.4  यतो देहापादान एव उत्क्रान्ति-प्रतिषेध एकेषां समाम्नातॄणां स्पष्ट उपलभ्यते।
Because in the case of some reciters of the Scriptures, that the denial of such going out (Apādāna), is with reference to a body from which such going out takes place, is definitely observed.

4.2.13 L.5  तथा हि – आर्तभागप्रश्ने ‘यत्रायं पुरुषो म्रियत उदस्मात्प्राणाः क्रामन्त्याहो नेति’ (BrhU.3.2.11) इत्यत्र,
Even so, in the question (posed) by Ārta-bhāga, viz., “Whether, when such person dies, the Prāṇas go away from him, or they do not?” (BrhU.3.2.11),

4.2.13 L.6  ‘नेति होवाच याज्ञवल्क्यः’ (BrhU.3.2.11) इत्यनुक्रान्तिपक्षं परिगृह्य,
The view being taken, that there is no such going out, thus — “No, said Yājña-valkya” (BrhU.3.2.11),

4.2.13 L.7  न तर्ह्ययमनुत्क्रान्तेषु प्राणेषु मृतः – इत्यस्यामाशङ्कायाम्
And when a doubt (under such circumstances) is (expressed), that inasmuch as the Prāṇas (of such a man) do not depart, he does not therefore in fact die,

4.2.13 L.8  ‘अत्रैव समवनीयन्ते’ इति प्रविलयं प्राणानां प्रतिज्ञाय,
The Scriptures, having declared the dissolution of the Prāṇas by stating, “The Prāṇas get absorbed even here, (i.e. in the body)”,

4.2.13 L.9  तत्सिद्धये
In order to establish that statement,

4.2.13 L.10  ‘स उच्छ्वयत्याध्मायत्याध्मातो मृतः शेते’ (BrhU.3.2.11) इति
स-शब्दपरामृष्टस्य प्रकृतस्य उत्क्रान्त्यवधेः उच्छ्वयनादीनि समामनन्ति;

Mention the bloating and swelling of him (i.e. Jīva-Self) who is the relevant subject here, and who is thus referred to as ‘He’ in the Scriptural statement —
“He becomes bloated, he swells and lies down dead, thus bloated” (BrhU.3.2.11).

4.2.13 L.11  देहस्य च एतानि स्युः न देहिनः;
Now this can only happen to the body and never to the Jīva-Self.

4.2.13 L.12  तत्सामान्यात्, ‘न तस्मात्प्राणा उत्क्रामन्त्यत्रैव समवनीयन्ते’ इत्यत्रापि –
And in common with that, (in the Scriptural statement) “From him the Prāṇas do not depart but are dissolved even there (in the body)”,

4.2.13 L.13  अभेदोपचारेण देहापादानस्यैव उत्क्रमणस्य प्रतिषेधः –
The denial is, thus, of the going out from the body, from which such going out takes place, the body and the Jīva-Self being metaphorically considered to be one and the same and non-different.

4.2.13 L.14  यद्यपि प्राधान्यं देहिनः – इति व्याख्येयम्,येषां पञ्चमीपाठः।
Even though the Jīva-Self is to be explained as being the chief entity, in the case of those, in whose branch the Scriptures recite the ablative case, even in that case it should be explained that the denial is of the going out of the body, because of such metaphorical treatment of non-difference between the body and the Jīva-Self.

4.2.13 L.15  येषां तु षष्ठीपाठः,
In the case of those in whose Scriptural recital, the genitive case is used,

4.2.13 L.16  तेषां विद्वत्सम्बन्धिनी उत्क्रान्तिः प्रतिषिध्यत इति,
The denial about the going out, which has reference to a man who has attained knowledge (of Brahman), is the denial of the going out from the body,

4.2.13 L.17  प्राप्तोत्क्रान्ति-प्रतिषेधार्थत्वात् अस्य वाक्यस्य,
Inasmuch as the Scriptures here purport to deny the going out which is well-known,

4.2.13 L.18  देहापादानैव सा प्रतिषिद्धा भवति देहादुत्क्रान्तिः प्राप्ता, न देहिनः;
And as it is the going out from the body and not the going out from the Jīva-Self, that is well-known, the denial, therefore, is of the going out from the body.

4.2.13 L.19  अपि च ‘चक्षुष्टो वा मूर्ध्नो वान्येभ्यो वा शरीरदेशेभ्यस्तमुत्क्रामन्तं प्राणोऽनूत्क्रामति प्राणमनूत्क्रामन्तꣳ सर्वे प्राणा अनूत्क्रामन्ति’ (BrhU.4.4.2)
इत्येवमविद्वद्विषये सप्रपञ्चमुत्क्रमणं संसारगमनं च दर्शयित्वा,

Besides having described this going out, and reverting into transmigratory existence, of those who are ignorant (of Brahman), in detail,
By the Scriptural passage “That (this Jīva-Self) goes out by way of the eye or the head or by way of some other region of the body, and as it goes out, the Prāṇa follows in its wake, and as the Prāṇa goes out all the other Prāṇas (i.e. subtle sense-organs) follow suit” (BrhU.4.4.2),

4.2.13 L.20  ‘इति नु कामयमानः’ (BrhU.4.4.6) इति उपसंहृत्य अविद्वत्कथाम्,
And having thus concluded this statement about those who are ignorant (of Brahman) by the passage “This is about one who still has desires (Iti nu Kāmayamānaḥ)” (BrhU.4.4.6) etc.,

4.2.13 L.21  ‘अथाकामयमानः’ (BrhU.4.4.6) इति व्यपदिश्य विद्वांसम् –
And having thereafter indicated those who have realized Brahman, by the passage “Now about those who have no desires (Atha Akāmayamānaḥ)” (BrhU.4.4.6),

4.2.13 L.22  यदि तद्विषयेऽप्युत्क्रान्तिमेव प्रापयेत्,
If the Scriptures were to make one understand this going out, to be of one who has realized Brahman,

4.2.13 L.23  असमञ्जस एव व्यपदेशः स्यात्;
Then such indication by the Scriptures would necessarily be meaningless.

4.2.13 L.24  तस्मात् अविद्वद्विषये प्राप्तयोर्गत्युत्क्रान्त्योः विद्वद्विषये प्रतिषेधः – इत्येवमेव व्याख्येयम्,
व्यपदेशार्थवत्त्वाय।

Therefore, in order that such indication may have meaning,
This movement and going away from the body arrived at in the case of those who are ignorant (of Brahman), should be explained as having been denied (by the Scriptures) in the case of those who have realized Brahman.

4.2.13 L.25  न च ब्रह्मविदः सर्वगत-ब्रह्मात्मभूतस्य प्रक्षीणकामकर्मणः
In the case of one, who has realized Brahman, and to whom his Self is but the all-pervading Brahman itself, and whose desires and actions have come to an end,

4.2.13 L.26  उत्क्रान्तिः गतिर्वा उपपद्यते, निमित्ताभावात्।
Any such movement or going out (of the body) would not be reasonably sustainable, because of the absence of any proper cause for it.

4.2.13 L.27  ‘अत्र ब्रह्म समश्नुते’ इति च एवंजातीयकाः श्रुतयो गत्युत्क्रान्त्योः अभावं सूचयन्ति॥१३॥
Besides Scriptural passages such as “Here (in this very body) he attains Brahma-hood” also indicate the absence of any such movement or going out (on the part of one who has realized Brahman). — 13.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
स्मर्यते च॥४.२.१४॥
Smaryate ca.

Smaryate: the Smṛti says, it is mentioned in the Smṛtis; Ca: and.

🔗 Smṛti also (has said similarly). — 4.2.14.

4.2.14 L.1  स्मर्यतेऽपि च महाभारते गत्युत्क्रान्त्योरभावः –
Besides, the Mahā-bhārata also has mentioned that there is absence of any movement or going out (of the body), (in the case of one who has realized Brahman), thus —

4.2.14 L.2  ‘सर्वभूतात्मभूतस्य सम्यग्भूतानि पश्यतः। देवा अपि मार्गे मुह्यन्त्यपदस्य पदैषिणः’ इति।
“In their search of the path of a man to whom all beings have but become his Self and who has understood all beings correctly by intuition (as being of the nature of the Ātmā) and who has no path (such as the Deva-yāna or Pitṛ-yāṇa) to traverse, even the Gods get perplexed”.


4.2.14 L.3  ननु गतिरपि ब्रह्मविदः सर्वगतब्रह्मात्मभूतस्य स्मर्यते –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta), the Smṛti does speak of such movement even in the case of one who has realized himself to be the all-pervading Brahman, thus —

4.2.14 L.4  ‘शुकः किल वैयासकिर्मुमुक्षुरादित्यमण्डलमभिप्रतस्थे पित्रा चानुगम्याहूतो भो इति प्रतिशुश्राव’ इति –
Śuka the son of Vyāsa, who with a desire for Final Release set forth towards the sphere of the Sun, when called by his father following him, responded with the words — ‘Yes, father?’”.


4.2.14 L.5  न; सशरीरस्यैव अयं योग-बलेन विशिष्टदेशप्राप्ति-पूर्वकः शरीरोत्सर्ग इति द्रष्टव्यम्,
(We reply) — No, it should be understood here, that he (i.e. Śuka) after first having reached a particular region physically by means of the powers of Yoga, thereafter discarded his body,

4.2.14 L.6  सर्वभूतदृश्यत्वाद्युपन्यासात्;
Because, the Smṛti has stated that he was seen by all beings

4.2.14 L.7  न हि अशरीरं गच्छन्तं सर्वभूतानि द्रष्टुं शक्नुयुः;
And all those beings could not have actually seen him going, were he to go in a disembodied condition.

4.2.14 L.8  तथा च तत्रैवोपसंहृतम् – ‘शुकस्तु मारुताच्छीघ्रां गतिं कृत्वान्तरिक्षगः। दर्शयित्वा प्रभावं स्वं सर्वभूतगतोऽभवत्’ इति।
The legend is then wound up with the remark — “Śuka, traversing the stellar region at a speed faster than that of the wind, and having thus displayed his prowess, entered into all beings”.

4.2.14 L.9  तस्मादभावः परब्रह्मविदो गत्युत्क्रान्त्योः।
Therefore, in the case of one who has realized Brahman, there is absence of any movement and going out (of the body).

4.2.14 L.10  गति-श्रुतीनां तु विषयमुपरिष्टाद्व्याख्यास्यामः॥१४॥
We shall explain the subject of those Scriptural passages which speak of movement, later (in BrS.4.3.7). — 14.

– 173. Pratiṣedha-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
तानि परे तथा ह्याह॥४.२.१५॥
Tāni pare tathā hy-āha.

Tāni: those; Pare: in the Supreme Brahman; Tathā: thus, so; Hi: because; Āha: (the Śruti) says.

🔗 Those Prāṇas (i.e. sense-organs) get absorbed in the transcendent Brahman, because, the Scriptures have said so. — 4.2.15.

4.2.15 L.1  तानि पुनः प्राणशब्दोदितानि इन्द्रियाणि भूतानि च परब्रह्मविदः तस्मिन्नेव परस्मिन्नात्मनि प्रलीयन्ते।
Now, the sense-organs of the person who has realized Brahman, which are described by the term “Prāṇa”, and the subtle elements, get absorbed into the Highest Self.

4.2.15 L.2  कस्मात्? तथा हि आह श्रुतिः – ‘एवमेवास्य परिद्रष्टुरिमाः षोडश कलाः पुरुषायणाः पुरुषं प्राप्यास्तं गच्छन्ति’ (PrasU.6.5) इति।
Whence is it so? Because the Scriptures say so, thus — “Even so, in the case of a man who is a seer his sixteen component parts (Kalās) dependent on the Puruṣa, as they approach and reach the Puruṣa merge into Him” (PrasU.6.5).


4.2.15 L.3  ननु ‘गताः कलाः पञ्चदश प्रतिष्ठाः’ (MunU.3.2.7) इति
विद्वद्विषयैवापरा श्रुतिः
परस्मादात्मनोऽन्यत्रापि कलानां प्रलयम्

But (says the opponent of Vedānta) another Scriptural passage with respect to a person who has realized Brahman,
Has spoken about the merger of these component parts, elsewhere than into the Highest Brahman, thus —
“Gone are the fifteen parts into the earth etc. which are their cause i.e. substratum (Pratiṣṭhā)” (MunU.3.2.7).


4.2.15 L.4  आह स्म – न; सा खलु व्यवहारापेक्षा –
(We reply) — No, that passage is only with reference to the point of view of the phenomenal mundane existence,

4.2.15 L.5  पार्थिवाद्याः कलाः पृथिव्यादीरेव स्वप्रकृतीरपियन्तीति;
I.e. that such parts as are the effects of the earth etc., merge into the earth etc. which is their material cause,

4.2.15 L.6  इतरा तु विद्वत्प्रतिपत्त्यपेक्षा –
While the former passage is with respect to a person who has realized Brahman,

4.2.15 L.7  कृत्स्नं कलाजातं परब्रह्मविदो ब्रह्मैव सम्पद्यत इति;
Viz. that this entire set of the component parts of a person who has realized Brahman, attains the Brahmic condition (i.e. merges into Brahman).

4.2.15 L.8  तस्माददोषः॥१५॥
Therefore it is all flawless. — 15.

– 174. Vāg-ādi-laya-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अविभागो वचनात्॥४.२.१६॥
Avibhāgo vacanāt.

A-vibhagaḥ: non-distinction; Vacanāt: on account of the statement (of the scriptures).

🔗 (This absorption of the component parts into the Highest Brahman is a total merger, so that there is non-separateness (Avibhāga) (between them and Brahman) on the strength of Scriptural declarations. — 4.2.16.

4.2.16 L.1  स पुनर्विदुषः कलाप्रलयः किम् इतरेषामिव सावशेषो भवति,
Now, is this absorption of the component parts (Kalā-pralaya), in the case of those who have realized Brahman, incomplete (Sāvaśeṣa) as in the case of the others (i.e. the ignorant)

4.2.16 L.2  आहोस्विन्निरवशेष इति।
Or is it absolute and total (Nir-avaśeṣa)?


4.2.16 L.3  तत्र प्रलय-सामान्यात् शक्त्यवशेषता-प्रसक्तौ ब्रवीति –
With regard to that (the conclusion of the opponent of Vedānta being) that inasmuch as the merger is general i.e. common in its nature, a residue of the potential powers (Śakty-avaśeṣa) continues to subsist,


4.2.16 L.4  अविभागापत्तिरेवेति।
(The Sūtra-kāra) says — The merger is necessarily total i.e. a condition of non-separateness is attained.

4.2.16 L.5  कुतः? वचनात्;
Whence is it so? Because of the Scriptural statement.

4.2.16 L.6  तथा हि कलाप्रलयमुक्त्वा वक्ति –
Because the Scriptures, after mentioning the merger of the component parts, declare —

4.2.16 L.7  ‘भिद्येते तासां नामरूपे पुरुष इत्येवं प्रोच्यते स एषोऽकलोऽमृतो भवति’ (PrasU.6.5) इति।
“Their names and forms (which constitute their power) are obliterated and it is said that he is the Puruṣa alone and he thus becomes one who is without any component parts, and immortal” (PrasU.6.5).

4.2.16 L.8  अविद्या-निमित्तानां च कलानां न विद्या-निमित्ते प्रलये सावशेषत्वोपपत्तिः।
The component parts being but the product of Nescience, that any such merger, having knowledge as its cause, could be incomplete (i.e. retaining a residue), is not reasonably sustainable,

4.2.16 L.9  तस्मादविभाग एवेति॥१६॥
And hence there is non-separateness i.e. the merger is necessarily total. — 16.

– 175. Avibhāga-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
तदोकोऽग्रज्वलनं तत्प्रकाशितद्वारो विद्यासामर्थ्यात्तच्छेषगत्यनुस्मृतियोगाच्च हार्दानुगृहीतः शताधिकया॥४.२.१७॥
Tad-oko'gra-jvalanaṃ tat-prakāśita-dvāro vidyā-sāmarthyāt tac-cheṣa-gaty-anusmṛti-yogāc ca hārdānugṛhītaḥ śatādhikayā.

Tad-okas-agra-jvalanam: the illumining of the top of its (soul’s) abode (the heart); Tat-prakāśita-dvāraḥ: with the passage illumined by this light; Vidyā-sāmarthyāt: by the power of his knowledge; Tat-śeṣa-gati-anusmṛti-yogāt: because of the application of meditation to the way which is part of that knowledge; Ca: and; Hārda-anugṛhītaḥ: being favoured by Him who dwells in the heart; Śata-adhikayā: by one that exceeds a hundred. (Tat: of that; Okas: abode, the heart; Agra-jvalanam: the forepart or the end of the heart being illumined; Tat: by the Lord dwelling in the heart; Prākaśita: illumined; Dvāraḥ: door, the root from which the hundred and first Anusmṛti-yogāt: because of the application of the remembrance or constant thought; Hārda: the Lord who dwells in the heart; Anugṛhītaḥ: being favoured by.)

🔗 (Even though in the case of both i.e. in the case of the ignorant and in the case of one who has realized qualified Brahman), the apex of the nest of the Self (i.e. Hṛdaya) becomes (equally) floodlit and thereby the way-out of the Ātmā also is (equally) floodlit, still, as a result of the power of Vidyā, and on account of meditation on the subordinate part of Vidyā, being prescribed (by the Scriptures), (it is understood that the Self of one who has realized unqualified Brahman issues forth from the head). Therefore, it is established that blessed by the Grace of Him who belongs to the Hṛdaya (i.e. Brahman), the Self of him who has realized qualified Brahman issues forth by way of the hundred and first Nāḍī of the head (viz. Suṣumnā). — 4.2.17.

4.2.17 L.1  समाप्ता प्रासङ्गिकी परविद्या-गता चिन्ता;
The incidental discussion with regard to the Vidyā of the transcendent one (i.e. Nir-guṇa i.e. unqualified Brahman) is now finished.

4.2.17 L.2  सम्प्रति तु अपरविद्या-विषयामेव चिन्तामनुवर्तयति।
The Sūtra-kāra now reverts to the discussion about the lower kind of Vidyā.

4.2.17 L.3  समाना च आ-सृत्युपक्रमात् विद्वदविदुषोः उत्क्रान्तिः – इत्युक्तम्;
It has been stated that the going out, of one who has realized qualified Brahman and of one who is ignorant, is similar (in the case of both). Upto the beginning of the path.

4.2.17 L.4  तम् इदानीं सृत्युपक्रमं दर्शयति।
And the Sūtra-kāra now indicates the entering on that path.

4.2.17 L.5  तस्य उपसंहृत-वागादि-कलापस्योच्चिक्रमिषतो विज्ञानात्मनः, ओकः आयतनं हृदयम् –
The nest (Okas) or abode (Āyatana) of the cognitional Jīva-Self which is desirous of going out, and which has absorbed into itself the powers (Tejo-mātras) of this group of (sense-organs such as) speech etc., is the Hṛdaya,

4.2.17 L.6  ‘स एतास्तेजोमात्राः समभ्याददानो हृदयमेवान्ववक्रामति’ इति श्रुतेः,
On the authority of the Scriptural passage — “Receiving into itself the powers of the sense-organs, it proceeds towards the Hṛdaya”.

4.2.17 L.7  तदग्रप्रज्वलन-पूर्विका चक्षुरादि-स्थानापादाना च उत्क्रान्तिः श्रूयते –
And the Scriptures speak about the going out (of the Self) to be from the abode of the sight etc., after the apex of the Hṛdaya is flood-lit, thus —

4.2.17 L.8  ‘तस्य हैतस्य हृदयस्याग्रं प्रद्योतते तेन प्रद्योतेनैष आत्मा निष्क्रामति चक्षुष्टो वा मूर्ध्नो वान्येभ्यो वा शरीरदेशेभ्यः’ (BrhU.4.4.2) इति।
“The apex of the Hṛdaya of the man becomes flood-lit and his Self goes out by means of this light either by way of the eye or the head or by way of any other region of the body” (BrhU.4.4.2).

4.2.17 L.9  सा किमनियमेनैव विद्वदविदुषोः भवति, अथास्ति कश्चिद्विदुषो विशेषनियमः – इति विचिकित्सायाम्,
Now when the question is whether this going out is the same in the case of both, viz. the one who has realized qualified Brahman and the one who is ignorant,


4.2.17 L.10  श्रुत्यविशेषाद् अनियम-प्राप्तौ,
The conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), being, that it is the same, because the Scriptural statement (about it) is the same,


4.2.17 L.11  आचष्टे – समानेऽपि हि विद्वदविदुषोः हृदयाग्र-प्रद्योतने तत्प्रकाशित-द्वारत्वे च,
The Sūtra-kāra says — Even though the flood-lit condition of the apex of the Hṛdaya and the flood-lighting of the way-out is common both to the ignorant and to one who has realized qualified Brahman,

4.2.17 L.12  मूर्धस्थानादेव विद्वान्निष्क्रामति, स्थानान्तरेभ्यस्तु इतरे।
The Self of him who has realized qualified Brahman, alone, goes out by way of the head, and of the others by other regions (of the body).

4.2.17 L.13  कुतः? विद्या-सामर्थ्यात्;
Whence is it so? Because of the power of the Vidyā.

4.2.17 L.14  यदि विद्वानपि इतरवत् यतः कुतश्चिद्देहदेशात् उत्क्रामेत्,
If, even the Self of one who has realized qualified Brahman, were, like the Self of the ignorant, to go out by any part i.e. by way of some one part of the body or another, (and not by way of the head),

4.2.17 L.15  नैव उत्कृष्टं लोकं लभेत, तत्र अनर्थिकैव विद्या स्यात्।
Then he would not attain the best world (Loka) and such Vidyā would then be rendered useless.

4.2.17 L.16  तच्छेषगत्यनुस्मृति-योगाच्च –
By reason of the circumstance, that meditation on the path subordinate to those Vidyās is prescribed,

4.2.17 L.17  विद्याशेष-भूता च मूर्धन्यनाडी-सम्बद्धा गतिः अनुशीलयितव्या विद्या-विशेषेषु विहिता;
It is meant, that inasmuch as in these several different Vidyās, the path subordinate to those Vidyās and connected with the Nāḍī of the head, have been prescribed,

4.2.17 L.18  तामभ्यस्यन् तयैव प्रतिष्ठत इति युक्तम्।
It is logical to understand that the Self of him who meditates on that path should tend to go out by that way viz. by that Nāḍī (of the head).

4.2.17 L.19  तस्मात् हृदयालयेन ब्रह्मणा सूपासितेन अनुगृहीतः तद्भावं समापन्नो विद्वान्
Therefore, the wise one, to whom the grace of Brahman, which has the Hṛdaya as its abode, has been vouchsafed, and on whom he has meditated well and has thus attained its (Brahman’s) condition,

4.2.17 L.20  मूर्धन्ययैव शताधिकया शतादतिरिक्तया एकशततम्या नाड्या निष्क्रामति,
Goes out by way of the hundred and first Nāḍī which is the one over and above the other hundred Nāḍīs,

4.2.17 L.21  इतराभिरितरे।
And the others (i.e. the ignorant) go out by way of the other hundred Nāḍīs.

4.2.17 L.22  तथा हि हार्दविद्यां प्रकृत्य समामनन्ति –
For even so, the Scriptures declare with reference to the Vidyā of the Hṛdaya thus —

4.2.17 L.23  ‘शतं चैका च हृदयस्य नाड्यस्तासां मूर्धानमभिनिःसृतैका।
तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति विष्वङ्ङन्या उत्क्रमणे भवन्ति’ (ChanU.8.6.6) इति॥१७॥

“There are a hundred and one Nāḍīs of the Hṛdaya, one of which courses up into the head. One who goes up by way of that, attains immortality. All other Nāḍīs are for the ordinary going out” (ChanU.8.6.6). — 17.

– 176. Tad-oko-(A)dhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.2.18 Su..19

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
रश्म्यनुसारी॥४.२.१८॥
Raśmy-anusārī.

Raśmi: the rays; Anusārī: following.

🔗 (Both i.e. the Self of the ignorant as well as the Self of one who has realized Brahman, ascend by) following the way of the ray (of the Sun). — 4.2.18.

4.2.18 L.1  अस्ति हार्दविद्या ‘अथ यदिदमस्मिन्ब्रह्मपुरे दहरं पुण्डरीकं वेश्म’ (ChanU.8.1.1) इत्युपक्रम्य विहिता;
Mention is made by the Scriptures, of the Vidyā of the Hṛdaya (also called Dahara-Vidyā), beginning with “That small lotus-like mansion which is (situated) in Brahma-pura (the city of Brahman, i.e. the body)” (ChanU.8.8.1).

4.2.18 L.2  तत्प्रक्रियायाम्
‘अथ या एता हृदयस्य नाड्यः’ (ChanU.8.6.1) इत्युपक्रम्य
सप्रपञ्चं नाडीरश्मि-सम्बन्धमुक्त्वा उक्तम् –

In the chapter (Prakriyā) about the Vidyā,
The Scriptures, after first mentioning the relation between the Nāḍī and the ray (of the Sun) in detail, thus —
“Now these Nāḍīs of the Hṛdaya”,

4.2.18 L.3  ‘अथ यत्रैतदस्माच्छरीरादुत्क्रामत्यथैतैरेव रश्मिभिरूर्ध्वमाक्रमते’ (ChanU.8.6.5) इति;
Further mention, thus — “Now then, when this i.e. the Self issues forth from the body, it ascends, by following the way of the ray (of the Sun) only” (ChanU.8.6.5).

4.2.18 L.4  पुनश्चोक्तम् – ‘तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति’ (ChanU.8.6.6) इति;
And again, thus — “And ascending thus by following the ray, the Self attains immortality” (ChanU.8.6.6).

4.2.18 L.5  तस्मात् शताधिकया नाड्या निष्क्रामन् रश्म्यनुसारी निष्क्रामतीति गम्यते।
Therefore, it is understood that issuing forth by way of the hundred and first Nāḍī, the Self goes out following the way of the ray (of the Sun).


4.2.18 L.6  तत् किम् अविशेषेणैव अहनि रात्रौ वा म्रियमाणस्य रश्म्यनुसारित्वम्, आहोस्विदहन्येव – इति संशये सति,
And when the doubt arises, as to whether the person dying (i.e. his Self) ascends by following the ray (of the Sun) irrespective of whether such person dies during the day or the night,


4.2.18 L.7  अविशेष-श्रवणात् अविशेषेणैव तावत् रश्म्यनुसारीति प्रतिज्ञायते॥१८॥
It is declared (by the Sūtra-kāra) that inasmuch as the Scriptural statement is general, the Self (whether death occurs by day or by night) without any distinction, ascends by following the way of the ray (of the Sun). — 18.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
निशि नेति चेन्न सम्बन्धस्य यावद्देहभावित्वाद्दर्शयति च॥४.२.१९॥
Niśi neti cen na sambandhasya yāvad-deha-bhāvitvād darśayati ca.

Niśi: at night, in the night; Na: not; Iti: so; Cet: if (if it be objected); Na: not (the objection is not valid); Sambandhasya: of the relation; Yavad-deha-bhāvitvāt: as long as the body lasts; Darśayati: the Śruti shows or declares (this); Ca: and, also. (Yāvad: as long as; Bhāvitvāt: because of the existence.)

🔗 (If it be said that the Self of those who die) during the night, does not go by following the way of the ray (of the Sun), we reply No, because the connection of the Nāḍī with the ray (of the Sun) subsists as long as the body (subsists). The Scriptures also indicate that. — 4.2.19.

4.2.19 L.1  अस्ति अहनि नाडीरश्मि-सम्बन्ध इति
If the opponent were to say that inasmuch as the connection between the Nāḍī and the ray (of the Sun) exists during the day,

4.2.19 L.2  अहनि मृतस्य स्यात् रश्म्यनुसारित्वम्;
The ascent of the Self of one who dies during the day, by following the way of the ray (of the Sun), may be possible,

4.2.19 L.3  रात्रौ तु प्रेतस्य न स्यात्,
But it could not be so, in the case of one who dies during the night,

4.2.19 L.4  नाडीरश्मि-सम्बन्धविच्छेदात् – इति चेत्,
Because (then) the connection between the Nāḍī and the ray (of the Sun) is destroyed,


4.2.19 L.5  न, नाडीरश्मि-सम्बन्धस्य यावद् देहभावित्वात्;
(We reply) — No, because the connection between the Nāḍī and the ray subsists as long as the body subsists.

4.2.19 L.6  यावद् देहभावी हि शिराकिरण-सम्पर्कः;
The connection between the Śirā (i.e. Nāḍī) and the ray subsists as long as the body subsists.

4.2.19 L.7  दर्शयति चैतमर्थं श्रुतिः –
The same is indicated by the Scriptures, thus —

4.2.19 L.8  ‘अमुष्मादादित्यात्प्रतायन्ते ता आसु नाडीषु सृप्ता आभ्यो नाडीभ्यः प्रतायन्ते तेऽमुष्मिन्नादित्ये सृप्ताः’ (ChanU.8.6.2) इति;
“The rays spread out from the Sun and enter the Nāḍīs and again spreading out from the Nāḍīs they enter the Sun” (ChanU.8.6.2).

4.2.19 L.9  निदाघ-समये च निशास्वपि किरणानुवृत्तिरुपलभ्यते,
During summer the existence of the rays is perceived even during nights,

4.2.19 L.10  प्रतापादिकार्य-दर्शनात्;
Because, heat etc., the effects of the rays, are perceived.

4.2.19 L.11  स्तोकानुवृत्तेस्तु दुर्लक्ष्यत्वम् ऋत्वन्तररजनीषु,
शैशिरेष्विव दुर्दिनेषु;

Just as during the cloudy days of the winter (Śiśira) season
The rays are few, they are not perceivable, even so they are not perceivable during the nights of other seasons or on cloudy days.

4.2.19 L.12  ‘अहरेवैतद्रात्रौ दधाति’ इति च एतदेव दर्शयति।
The Scriptural statement “The sun makes a day (of it) even during the night” indicates the same thing.

4.2.19 L.13  यदि च रात्रौ प्रेतः
Were a person dying during the night,

4.2.19 L.14  विनैव रश्म्यनुसारेण ऊर्ध्वमाक्रमेत,
To ascend without following the way of the ray (of the Sun),

4.2.19 L.15  रश्म्यनुसारानर्थक्यं भवेत्;
The Scriptural statement about its i.e. the Self’s following by way of the ray (of the Sun) would be contradicted,

4.2.19 L.16  न ह्येतत् विशिष्य अभिधीयते –
Nor has it been particularly taught (by the Scriptures)

4.2.19 L.17  यो दिवा प्रैति, स रश्मीनपेक्ष्योर्ध्वमाक्रमते, यस्तु रात्रौ सोऽनपेक्ष्यैवेति।
That he who dies during the day, ascends, by following the way of the ray, while he who dies during the night (also ascends) in spite of the absence of rays.

4.2.19 L.18  अथ तु विद्वानपि रात्रिप्रायणापराधमात्रेण नोर्ध्वमाक्रमेत,
Now, if a person who has realized Brahman, were not to ascend, merely because of the offence of dying during the night,

4.2.19 L.19  पाक्षिक-फला विद्येति
(Then in that case) the fruit of the Vidyā would thus be uncertain (i.e. it would be available in some cases and not in others)

4.2.19 L.20  अप्रवृत्तिरेव तस्यां स्यात्। मृत्युकालानियमात्;
And inasmuch as there is no rule about the time of death, no one would be attracted towards the Vidyā.


4.2.19 L.21  अथापि रात्रावुपरतोऽहरागमम् उदीक्षेत,
(The opponent of Vedānta says) — May be, that one who dies during the night may await the advent of the day;


4.2.19 L.22  अहरागमेऽप्यस्य कदाचित् अरश्मि-सम्बन्धार्हं शरीरं स्यात् पावकादि-सम्पर्कात्;
But (we reply) — even if he were to await the advent of the day, may be, on account of the contact with the fire (during cremation) the body may not be in a condition fit for such contact with the ray (of the Sun).

4.2.19 L.23  ‘स यावत्क्षिप्येन्मनस्तावदादित्यं गच्छति’ (ChanU.8.6.5) इति च
श्रुतिः अनुदीक्षां दर्शयति।

Besides the Scriptures indicate, how, there is no such awaiting (the advent of the day), thus —
“As soon as his mind is thrown off (at the time of death) he reaches the Sun” (ChanU.8.6.5).

4.2.19 L.24  तस्मात् अविशेषेणैव इदं रात्रिंदिवं रश्म्यनुसारित्वम्॥१९॥
Therefore, this ascent of the Self, by following the way of the ray (of the Sun) is uniform both during the day as well as during the night.) — 19.

– 177. Raśmy-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.2.20 Su..21

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अतश्चायनेऽपि दक्षिणे॥४.२.२०॥
Ataś cāyane'pi dakṣiṇe.

Ataḥ: for this very reason, therefore, for the same reason; Ca: and; Ayane: during the sun’s course; Api: also, even; Dakṣiṇe: in the southern.

🔗 And hence also (the Self of a man follows the way of the ray of the Sun) even during Dakṣiṇāyana (Southern journey of the Sun). — 4.2.20.

4.2.20 L.1  अत एव च उदीक्षानुपपत्तेः,
And it is precisely because this awaiting (the advent of the Sun) by the Self, is not reasonably substainable,

4.2.20 L.2  अपाक्षिकफलत्वाच्च विद्यायाः,
And also because of the fruit of the Vidyā being uncertain (in such case),

4.2.20 L.3  अनियतकालत्वाच्च मृत्योः,
And also because of there being no regulation of the time of death (of a person),

4.2.20 L.4  दक्षिणायनेऽपि म्रियमाणो विद्वान् प्राप्नोत्येव विद्याफलम्।
That, when a man who has realized Brahman dies even during the Southern journey (of the Sun) he does by all means obtain the fruit of the Vidyā.

4.2.20 L.5  उत्तरायणमरण-प्राशस्त्य-प्रसिद्धेः, भीष्मस्य च प्रतीक्षा-दर्शनात्,
‘आपूर्यमाणपक्षाद्यान्षडुदङ्ङेति मासाꣳस्तान्’ (ChanU.4.15.5) इति च श्रुतेः,
अपेक्षितव्यमुत्तरायणम् – इतीमामाशङ्काम् अनेन सूत्रेणापनुदति;

This Sūtra removes the doubt that the Scriptures mean that one should await the Northern journey (of the Sun),
As death during the Northern journey (of the Sun) is commendable, because, Bhīṣma’s awaiting the advent of the Northern journey (of the Sun) is also observed,
And because of the Scriptural statement — “From the bright half of the month (they go) to the six months of the Sun’s Northern journey” (ChanU.4.15.5).

4.2.20 L.6  प्राशस्त्य-प्रसिद्धिः अविद्वद्विषया;
This well-known thing (about the propriety of death during the Northern journey of the Sun) is with reference to those who are ignorant (of Brahman).

4.2.20 L.7  भीष्मस्य तूत्तरायण-प्रतिपालनम् आचार-परिपालनार्थं पितृप्रसादलब्ध-स्वच्छन्दमृत्युताख्यापनार्थं च।
Bhīṣma’s patient waiting, was for the purpose of observing appropriate conduct, and for demonstrating the gift obtained by him as a favour from his father, of being able to time his death at will (Sva-cchanda-mṛtyutā).

4.2.20 L.8  श्रुतेस्तु अर्थं वक्ष्यति
The meaning of the Scriptural statement (referred to above) would be stated later on by the Sūtra

4.2.20 L.9  ‘आतिवाहिकास्तल्लिङ्गात्’ (BrS.4.3.4) इति॥२०॥
“They (i.e. fire etc.) are the guides (of the person dying) because there is indicatory mark of that” (BrS.4.3.4). — 20.

[Go top]

4.2.21 L.1  ननु च ‘यत्र काले त्वनावृत्तिमावृत्तिं चैव योगिनः। प्रयाता यान्ति तं कालं वक्ष्यामि भरतर्षभ’ (BhG.8.23) इति काल-प्राधान्येन उपक्रम्य
The opponent of Vedānta says: — The Smṛti, beginning thus — “Oh the best amongst the Bhāratas, I shall now tell you the time, dying at which time, the Yogins return and do not return respectively (to this mundane phenomenal existence)” (BhG.8.23), has, specially with reference to time,

4.2.21 L.2  अहरादिकाल-विशेषः स्मृतावनावृत्तये नियमितः;
Determined the day etc. as the particular time, when those who die at that time do not return (to this mundane existence).

4.2.21 L.3  कथं रात्रौ दक्षिणायने वा प्रयातोऽनावृत्तिं यायात् –
How is it then said that those who die during the night or during Dakṣiṇāyana, also do not return?


4.2.21 L.4  इत्यत्रोच्यते –
To this it is said –

←PrevNext→
योगिनः प्रति च स्मर्यते स्मार्ते चैते॥४.२.२१॥
Yoginaḥ prati ca smaryate smārte caite.

Yoginaḥ prati: with respect to the Yogi; Ca: and; Smaryate: the Smṛti declares; Smārte: belonging to the class of Smṛtis; Ca: and; Ete: these two.

🔗 The Smṛtis prescribe a particular time etc. with regard to Yogins only. Sāṅkhya and Yoga are mentioned in the Smṛtis. — 4.2.21.

4.2.21 L.5  योगिनः प्रति च अयम् अहरादिकाल-विनियोगः अनावृत्तये स्मर्यते;
This fixing of the proper time for dying etc. such as dying during day etc. in order that there should be no return (to transmigratory existence) are prescribed for the Yogins.

4.2.21 L.6  स्मार्ते चैते योग-सांख्ये, न श्रौते;
Sāṅkhya and Yoga are mentioned in the Smṛtis and not in the Scriptures.

4.2.21 L.7  अतो विषय-भेदात् प्रमाणविशेषाच्च
Hence, as the subjects are different, and have a special kind of authority (in their own systems),

4.2.21 L.8  नास्य स्मार्तस्य काल-विनियोगस्य श्रौतेषु विज्ञानेषु अवतारः।
The time (of death) fixed in those Smṛtis has no application in a Scriptural Vidyā.


4.2.21 L.9  ननु ‘अग्निर्ज्योतिरहः शुक्लः षण्मासा उत्तरायणम्। धूमो रात्रिस्तथा कृष्णः षण्मासा दक्षिणायनम्’ (BhG.8.24) इति च श्रौतावेतौ देवयान-पितृयाणौ प्रत्यभिज्ञायेते
स्मृतावपीति,

But (says the opponent of Vedānta), the Path of the Gods and the Path of the Manes (Deva-yāna and Pitṛ-yāṇa) such as — “Fire, light, the bright half of a month, and the six months of the Northern journey of the Sun” and “Smoke, night, the dark half of the month, and the six months of the Southern journey of the Sun”, known from the Scriptures,
Are known from the Smṛtis also.


4.2.21 L.10  उच्यते –
The reply is:

4.2.21 L.11  ‘तं कालं वक्ष्यामि’ (BhG.8.23) इति
स्मृतौ काल-प्रतिज्ञानात् विरोधम् आशङ्क्य

It is by assuming a doubt about a contradiction supposed to occur by the mention of time by the Smṛti, thus —
“I shall speak of the time”,

4.2.21 L.12  अयं परिहारः उक्तः।
That the refutation stated above is made.

4.2.21 L.13  यदा पुनः स्मृतावपि अग्न्याद्या देवता एव आतिवाहिक्यो गृह्यन्ते,
तदा न कश्चिद्विरोध इति॥२१॥

But no such contradiction would occur,
If, even in the case of Smṛtis, deities such as fire etc. are understood to be the guides (of the person dying). — 21.

– 178. Dakṣaṇa-ayana-Adhikaraṇam. End of Pāda 4.2

[Go top]

[Go top]

4.3 L.1  आसृत्युपक्रमात् समानोत्क्रान्तिरित्युक्तम्;
That the going out (of the Jīva-Self, out of the body) upto the beginning of the path is common (to the ignorant as well as to one who has acquired the knowledge of Brahman) has been stated, so far.

4.3 L.2  सृतिस्तु श्रुत्यन्तरेष्वनेकधा श्रूयते –
Other Scriptural passages have mentioned the path in various ways.

4.3 L.3  नाडीरश्मिसम्बन्धेनैका ‘अथैतैरेव रश्मिभिरूर्ध्व आक्रमते’ (ChanU.8.6.5) इति;
One (path) is with reference to the connection between the Nāḍī and the ray (of the Sun), thus — “Now he ascends by means of the rays” (ChanU.8.6.5).

4.3 L.4  अर्चिरादिकैका ‘तेऽर्चिषमभिसम्भवन्त्यर्चिषोऽहः’ (BrhU.6.2.15) इति;
Another with reference to Arci (light) etc., is thus — “They reach the Arci (light) and thence the day” (BrhU.6.2.15).

4.3 L.5  ‘स एतं देवयानं पन्थानमासाद्याग्निलोकम् आगच्छति’ (कौ. उ. १-३) इत्यन्या;
Another one thus — “Having reached the Deva-yāna path, he thence reaches the world of Agni” (KausU. 1.3).

4.3 L.6  ‘यदा वै पुरुषोऽस्माल्लोकात्प्रैति स वायुमागच्छति’ (BrhU.5.10.1) इत्यपरा;
Still another one, thus — “Verily, when the Puruṣa departs from this world, he reaches Vāyu” (BrhU.5.10.1).

4.3 L.7  ‘सूर्यद्वारेण ते विरजाः प्रयान्ति’ (MunU.1.2.11) इति च अपरा।
Yet still another one, thus — “Divested of all contamination with sin, they proceed through the Sun-gate” (MunU.1.2.11).

4.3 L.8  तत्र संशयः –
Now, with regard to these, a doubt arises,

4.3 L.9  किं परस्परं भिन्ना एताः सृतयः,
As to whether these paths are all mutually different,

4.3 L.10  किं वा एकैव अनेकविशेषणेति।
Or whether they all together form but one and the same path, particularized by different stages (for resting on the way).


4.3 L.11  तत्र प्राप्तं तावत् – भिन्ना एताः सृतय इति,
The conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) is that these paths are all different from each other

4.3 L.12  भिन्न-प्रकरणत्वात्, भिन्नोपासना-शेषत्वाच्च;
Because the chapters (relating to these paths) are different and they are subordinate parts of different types of meditations.

4.3 L.13  अपि च ‘अथैतैरेव रश्मिभिः’ (ChanU.8.6.5) इत्यवधारणम्
Besides, the final determination (Avadhāraṇa) — “Now just by these rays only” (ChanU.8.6.5) —

4.3 L.14  अर्चिराद्यपेक्षायाम् उपरुध्येत,
Would be contradicted, if the paths of light (Arci) etc. have also to be considered necessary,

4.3 L.15  त्वरा-वचनं च पीड्येत – ‘स यावत्क्षिप्येन्मनस्तावदादित्यं गच्छति’ (ChanU.8.6.5) इति;
And the Scriptural statement about ‘speed’, viz., “As soon as his mind is thrown off (at the time of death), he reaches the Sun” (ChanU.8.6.5), also would be similarly contradicted.

4.3 L.16  तस्मादन्योन्यभिन्ना एवैते पन्थान इति।
Therefore, the paths are of course mutually different.


4.3 L.17  एवं प्राप्ते, अभिदध्महे –
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), we reply —

←PrevNext→
अर्चिरादिना तत्प्रथितेः॥४.३.१॥
Arcir-ādinā tat-prathiteḥ.

Arcir-ādinā: by the path of the rays, etc., by the rays of light and so on, on the path connected with deities, beginning with that of light; Tat-prathiteḥ: that being well-known (from the Śruti).

🔗 (One desirous of Final Release) goes along the path of light (Arci) etc. because that path is well-known. — 4.3.1.

4.3.1 L.1  अर्चिरादिनेति। सर्वो ब्रह्म प्रेप्सुः अर्चिरादिनैवाध्वना रंहतीति प्रतिजानीमहे।
“Along the path of Arci (light) etc.”. We understand that all those who desire to attain Brahman, go only along the path of Arci (light) etc.

4.3.1 L.2  कुतः? तत्प्रथितेः;
Whence is it so? Because of its being so well-known.

4.3.1 L.3  प्रथितो ह्येष मार्गः सर्वेषां विदुषाम्;
This path is well-known to all who have acquired knowledge (of Brahman).

4.3.1 L.4  तथा हि पञ्चाग्निविद्या-प्रकरणे –
Even so in the Vidyā (Lore) of the Five Fires

4.3.1 L.5  ‘ये चामी अरण्ये श्रद्धाꣳ सत्यमुपासते’ (BrhU.6.2.15) इति
विद्यान्तर-शीलिनामपि अर्चिरादिका सृतिः श्राव्यते।

The Scriptures speak of the path of the Arci (light) even for those who study other Vidyās, thus —
“Those also who meditate on the Truth by faith, in the forest” (BrhU.6.2.15).


4.3.1 L.6  स्यादेतत् –
(Says the opponent of Vedānta) — It may well be this way.

4.3.1 L.7  यासु विद्यासु न काचिद्गतिरुच्यते, तासु इयमर्चिरादिका उपतिष्ठताम्;
In the case of those Vidyās, wherein no path is mentioned, the path of the Arci (light) may be accepted,

4.3.1 L.8  यासु तु अन्या श्राव्यते, तासु किमित्यर्चिराद्याश्रयणमिति,
But where another path is specifically mentioned, why should there be the acceptance of the path of Arci (light)?


4.3.1 L.9  अत्रोच्यते – भवेदेतदेवम्, यद्यत्यन्त-भिन्ना एव एताः सृतयः स्युः;
To this, it is replied — This would be so, if these several paths were to be essentially different from each other.

4.3.1 L.10  एकैव त्वेषा सृतिः अनेक-विशेषणा ब्रह्मलोकप्रपदनी क्वचित् केनचित् विशेषणेनोपलक्षितेति वदामः,
We maintain, however, that the Path is but the one and only one path leading up towards Brahma-Loka, which is marked by different characteristics of stages in different places,

4.3.1 L.11  सर्वत्रैकदेश-प्रत्यभिज्ञानात्
And as everywhere the same one path is clearly understood,

4.3.1 L.12  इतरेतरविशेषणविशेष्य-भावोपपत्तेः;
That these different characteristics of stages only serve to indicate the relation of adjectives to the substantive (viz. the path of Arci), is reasonably sustainable.

4.3.1 L.13  प्रकरणभेदेऽपि हि विद्यैकत्वे भवति
Even though the chapters are different, inasmuch as the Vidyā is identical,

4.3.1 L.14  इतरेतरविशेषणोपसंहारवत्
गतिविशेषणानाम् अप्युपसंहारः;

The paths having different characteristics of stages are to be combined into one single path,
Just as different attributes (Guṇas) are to be combined (in the case of different Vidyās i.e. Cognitions).

4.3.1 L.15  विद्याभेदेऽपि तु
Now, even though the Vidyās are different,

4.3.1 L.16  गत्येकदेश-प्रत्यभिज्ञानात्
Inasmuch as the path (in each) is distinctly recognizable as being one and the same,

4.3.1 L.17  गन्तव्याभेदाच्च गत्यभेद एव;
And as the destination (in all cases) also is identical, there is no difference in the paths.

4.3.1 L.18  तथा हि – ‘ते तेषु ब्रह्मलोकेषु पराः परावतो वसन्ति’ (BrhU.6.2.15)
For, in the Scriptural statements — “They have their sojourn in the Brahma-Loka for a period coextensive with the life-span of Brahman” (BrhU.6.2.15),

4.3.1 L.19  ‘तस्मिन्वसन्ति शाश्वतीः समाः’ (BrhU.5.10.1)
And “He has his sojourn there (i.e. in Brahma-Loka) for eternal years” (BrhU.5.10.1),

4.3.1 L.20  ‘सा या ब्रह्मणो जितिर्या व्युष्टिस्तां जितिं जयति तां व्युष्टिं व्यश्नुते’ (कौ. उ. १-४)
“He wins the same victory and attains the same comprehensive greatness, characteristic of Brahman” (KausU. 1.4),

4.3.1 L.21  ‘तद्य एवैतं ब्रह्मलोकं ब्रह्मचर्येणानुविन्दति’ (ChanU.8.4.3) इति च
“That those who through their vow of celibacy (meditate on Brahman) and attain the Brahma-Loka” (ChanU.8.4.3),

4.3.1 L.22  तत्र तत्र तदेव एकं फलं ब्रह्मलोकप्राप्ति-लक्षणं प्रदर्श्यते।
The same one uniform nature of the result, viz. the acquisition of Brahma-Loka, is indicated everywhere.


4.3.1 L.23  यत्तु ‘एतैरेव’ इत्यवधारणम्
With regard to the argument (of the opponent of Vedānta) that the specific determination “By these very (rays) etc.”

4.3.1 L.24  अर्चिराद्याश्रयणे न स्यादिति,
Would not be available, if the path of Arci (light) etc. were to be accepted (as the path in all cases),


4.3.1 L.25  नैष दोषः, रश्मिप्राप्तिपरत्वादस्य;
(Our reply is) — This is no fault, because this (statement) also has the purport of including the ray as one of the stages (to which the Self goes in its journey).

4.3.1 L.26  न हि एक एव शब्दो रश्मींश्च प्रापयितुमर्हति,
The same one word “only” cannot at once establish the rays as a stage,

4.3.1 L.27  अर्चिरादींश्च व्यावर्तयितुम्;
As well as reject the path of Arci (light) etc.

4.3.1 L.28  तस्मात् रश्मि-सम्बन्ध एवायमवधार्यत इति द्रष्टव्यम्।
So it should be understood that it makes only the (Self’s) relation to the rays understood.

4.3.1 L.29  त्वरावचनं तु अर्चिराद्यपेक्षायामपि गन्तव्यान्तरापेक्षया शैघ्र्यार्थत्वात्त् नोपरुध्यते –
The statement about ‘speed’ is not obstructed in its application, even in the case of the path of Arci (light) etc. also, as it merely indicates comparative swiftness, so far as having to reach another place is concerned,

4.3.1 L.30  यथा निमेषमात्रेणात्रागम्यत इति।
Just as in (the sentence) — “I would be returning here in a moment”.

4.3.1 L.31  अपि च ‘अथैतयोः पथोर्न कतरेणचन’ (ChanU.5.10.8) इति
Besides, the Scriptural statement “By neither of those two paths” (ChanU.5.10.8),

4.3.1 L.32  मार्गद्वय-भ्रष्टानां कष्टं तृतीयं स्थानम् आचक्षाणा
Which speaks of the miserable third path of those who have missed the other two paths (i.e. Deva-yāna and Pitṛ-yāṇa),

4.3.1 L.33  पितृयाण-व्यतिरिक्तमेकमेव देवयानम् अर्चिरादिपर्वाणं पन्थानं प्रथयति;
Also establishes the Deva-yāna path having Arci (light) etc. as its various stages as the only other path, as distinguished from the path of the manes (Pitṛ-yāṇa).

4.3.1 L.34  भूयांस्यर्चिरादिसृतौ मार्गपर्वाणि,
Only, there are many stages in the path of the Arci (light) etc.,

4.3.1 L.35  अल्पीयांसि त्वन्यत्र;
And few in the other paths

4.3.1 L.36  भूयसां च आनुगुण्येन अल्पीयसां नयनं न्याय्यमिति
And it is logical to understand the fewer stages as included in the greater number (of stages),

4.3.1 L.37  अतोऽपि अर्चिरादिना तत्प्रथितेरित्युक्तम्॥१॥
And that also is why the Sūtra-kāra has stated the Sūtra as above (BrS.4.3.1). — 1.

– 179. Arcir-ādy-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
वायुमब्दादविशेषविशेषाभ्याम्॥४.३.२॥
Vāyum abdād aviśeṣa-viśeṣābhyām.

Vāyum: the deity of the air; Abdāt: from the deity of the year; A-viśeṣa-viśeṣābhyām: because of non-specification and specification, because it is stated in general in one Śruti and in detail in another.

🔗 (That the Self in its journey goes) from the Saṃvatsara to Vāyu (is understood) from the non-specific and specific (statements). — 4.3.2.

4.3.2 L.1  केन पुनः सन्निवेशविशेषेण गति-विशेषणानाम् इतरेतरविशेषणविशेष्य-भावः –
इति तदेतत् सुहृद्भूत्वा आचार्यो ग्रथयति।

The Ācārya now, in the capacity of a friend, determines (for the pupil) the specific order
Of the arrangement of the particular stages in the path, which mutually have a relation of adjectives to the substantive (viz. the path of Arci).

4.3.2 L.2  ‘स एतं देवयानं पन्थानमासाद्याग्निलोकम् आगच्छति स वायुलोकं स वरुणलोकं स इन्द्रलोकं स प्रजापतिलोकं स ब्रह्मलोकम्’ (कौ. उ. १-३) इति
कौषीतकिनां देवयानः पन्थाः पठ्यते;

As regards the followers of the Kauṣītaki branch of the Scriptures, the Deva-yāna path is recited by them, thus —
“He having reached the Deva-yāna path, thereafter (by that path) reaches the world of Agni, and then the world of Vāyu, thereafter the world of Varuṇa, and from there the worlds of Indra, Prajā-pati and Brahman” (KausU. 1.3).

4.3.2 L.3  तत्र अर्चिरग्निलोकशब्दौ तावत् एकार्थौ ज्वलन-वचनत्वादिति
Now, the words ‘Arci’ (in BrhU.6.2.15) and Agni-Loka (above) both express the same meaning as both of them mean the flaming fire (Jvalana)

4.3.2 L.4  नात्र सन्निवेश-क्रमः कश्चिदन्वेष्यः;
And hence it is unnecessary to look for any specific order of arrangement, in their case.

4.3.2 L.5  वायुस्तु अर्चिरादौ वर्त्मनि कतमस्मिन् स्थाने निवेशयितव्य इति,
Scriptures however have not mentioned the exact position of Vāyu in the path of Arci etc. and hence it has of course to be determined.

4.3.2 L.6  उच्यते – ‘तेऽर्चिषमेवाभिसम्भवन्त्यर्चिषोऽहरह्न आपूर्यमाणपक्षम् आपूर्यमाणपक्षाद्यान्षडुदङ्ङेति मासाꣳस्तान्। नात्र सन्निवेशक्रमः कश्चिदन्वेष्यः; मासेभ्यः संवत्सरं संवत्सरादादित्यम्’ (ChanU.5.10.1, 2) इत्यत्र
We say that, in the Scriptural statement “They reach the Arci, from there the day, thereafter the bright half of the month, and from there the six months during which the Sun journeys towards the North, from thence to the Saṃvatsara and from the Saṃvatsara to the Āditya” (ChanU.5.10.1, 2),

4.3.2 L.7  संवत्सरात् पराञ्चम् आदित्याद् अर्वाञ्चं वायुम् अभिसम्भवन्ति;
It has to be understood, that they accommodate Vāyu after the Saṃvatsara and before the Āditya.

4.3.2 L.8  कस्मात्? अविशेषविशेषाभ्याम्।
Whence is it so? Because of the non-specification and the specification.

4.3.2 L.9  तथा हि ‘स वायुलोकम्’ (कौ. उ. १-३) इत्यत्र अविशेषोपदिष्टस्य वायोः
For, Vāyu, which is mentioned non-specifically (i.e. without reference to its particular position in the order) in the Scriptural passage “He (reaches) the world of Vāyu” (KausU. 1.3),

4.3.2 L.10  श्रुत्यन्तरे विशेषोपदेशो दृश्यते –
Is seen to be specifically so mentioned in another Scriptural passage —

4.3.2 L.11  ‘यदा वै पुरुषोऽस्माल्लोकात्प्रैति स वायुमागच्छति तस्मै स तत्र विजिहीते यथा रथचक्रस्य खं तेन स ऊर्ध्वमाक्रमते स आदित्यमागच्छति’ (BrhU.5.10.1) इति;
“Verily when a person departs from this world, he reaches the world of Vāyu, where Vāyu affords him an exit, like the hole in a wheel, by which he ascends and reaches the Āditya” (BrhU.5.10.1).

4.3.2 L.12  एतस्मात् आदित्यात् वायोः पूर्वत्वदर्शनात् विशेषात्
Now, as the coming of Vāyu earlier in the order than the Āditya, is a specific statement,

4.3.2 L.13  अब्दादित्ययोरन्तराले वायुर्निवेशयितव्यः।
Vāyu’s position has to be fixed in-between the Saṃvatsara and the Āditya.


4.3.2 L.14  कस्मात्पुनरग्नेः परत्वदर्शनाद् विशेषादर्चिषोऽनन्तरं वायुर्न निवेश्यते?
Why (again says the opponent of Vedānta), should not the position of Vāyu be fixed after Arci, because of the specific mention about Vāyu coming later on than Agni?


4.3.2 L.15  नैषोऽस्ति विशेष इति वदामः;
We reply, that here there is no specific mention at all.


4.3.2 L.16  ननूदाहृता श्रुतिः –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) there is the Scriptural statement —

4.3.2 L.17  ‘स एतं देवयानं पन्थानमासाद्याग्निलोकमागच्छति स वायुलोकं स वरुणलोकम्’ (कौ. उ. १-३) इति;
“Having arrived at the Deva-yāna path, he then reaches the world of Agni, the world of Vāyu, the world of Varuṇa” (KausU. 1.3).


4.3.2 L.18  उच्यते – केवलोऽत्र पाठः पौर्वपर्येणावस्थितः,
We reply — Here the statements are merely made, one after another,

4.3.2 L.19  नात्र क्रमवचनः कश्चिच्छब्दोऽस्ति;
But there is no word indicative of any specific order (as between them).

4.3.2 L.20  पदार्थोपदर्शनमात्रं ह्यत्र क्रियते –
Only an indication is made here of the objects reached,

4.3.2 L.21  एतं एतं च आगच्छतीति;
Viz. that the Jīva-Self reaches these particular objects,

4.3.2 L.22  इतरत्र पुनः, वायु-प्रत्तेन रथचक्र-मात्रेण च्छिद्रेण ऊर्ध्वमाक्रम्य आदित्यम् आगच्छतीति – अवगम्यते क्रमः।
But in the other passages a specific order is understood, viz. that the Self, ascending by way of the chariot wheel (-sized hole provided by Āditya), arrives at the Āditya.

4.3.2 L.23  तस्मात् सूक्तम् अविशेषविशेषाभ्यामिति।
Therefore, it is but very properly stated (by the Sūtra-kāra) in the Sūtra — “From the non-specific and specific (statements)”.

4.3.2 L.24  वाजसनेयिनस्तु ‘मासेभ्यो देवलोकं देवलोकादादित्यम्’ (BrhU.6.2.15) इति समामनन्ति;
As regards the Vāja-saneyins, they recite thus — “From the months (the Self) reaches the world of the Gods and from there the world of Āditya” (BrhU.6.2.15).

4.3.2 L.25  तत्र आदित्यानन्तर्याय देवलोकाद् वायुम् अभिसम्भवेयुः;
There, so as to secure Āditya being reached after (Vāyu) it should be understood that the Self reaches Vāyu from the world of the Gods.

4.3.2 L.26  ‘वायुमब्दात्’ इति तु च्छन्दोगश्रुत्यपेक्षयोक्तम्।
The Sūtra-kāra has stated “From the Saṃvatsara (he) reaches the Āditya” with reference to the Chāndogya statement.

4.3.2 L.27  छान्दोग्य-वाजसनेयकयोः तु एकत्र देवलोको न विद्यते, परत्र संवत्सरः;
As between the Chāndogya and the Vāja-saneyaka, the world of the Gods is not mentioned in one statement and the Saṃvatsara is not mentioned in the other.

4.3.2 L.28  तत्र श्रुतिद्वय-प्रत्ययात् उभावपि उभयत्र ग्रथयितव्यौ;
Both, however, being equally authoritative, both the world of the Gods and the Saṃvatsara have to be included in both.

4.3.2 L.29  तत्रापि मास-सम्बन्धात् संवत्सरः पूर्वः पश्चिमो देवलोक इति विवेक्तव्यम्॥२॥
Besides, it should be properly discriminated here that the Saṃvatsara being (as an extension of the month) connected with the month, it comes first and the world of the Gods comes afterwards. — 2.

– 180. Vāyv-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
तडितोऽधि वरुणः सम्बन्धात्॥४.३.३॥
Taḍito'dhi varuṇaḥ sambandhāt.

Taḍitaḥ adhi: after the deity of lightning; Varuṇaḥ: (comes) Varuṇaḥ (rain god); Sambandhāt: on account of connection.

🔗 (In the order of the stages of the path) next after Lightning comes Varuṇa because of the relation (between them). — 4.3.3.

4.3.3 L.1  ‘आदित्याच्चन्द्रमसं चन्द्रमसो विद्युतम्’ (ChanU.4.15.5) इति
There is the Scriptural passage — “From the Sun (the Self goes) to the Moon and from the Moon to the Lightning” (ChanU.4.15.5).

4.3.3 L.2  अस्या विद्युत उपरिष्टात् ‘स वरुणलोकम्’ इत्ययं वरुणः सम्बध्येत;
Now after the Lightning, Varuṇa ought to be connected, because of the (Kauṣītaki) Scriptural statement — “He reaches the world of Varuṇa”,

4.3.3 L.3  अस्ति हि सम्बन्धो विद्युद्वरुणयोः;
Lightning and Varuṇa of course have a mutual relation.

4.3.3 L.4  यदा हि विशाला विद्युतः तीव्र-स्तनित-निर्घोषा जीमूतोदरेषु प्रनृत्यन्ति,
Whenever large lightnings dance about within the bowels of the clouds, with sharp cracking noise,

4.3.3 L.5  अथ आपः प्रपतन्ति;
Rain pours down.

4.3.3 L.6  ‘विद्योतते स्तनयति वर्षिष्यति वा’ (ChanU.7.11.1) इति च ब्राह्मणम्;
A Brāhmaṇa passage also says — “There is Lightning, it is making noise, and then, may be, it will rain” (ChanU.7.11.1).

4.3.3 L.7  अपां च अधिपतिर्वरुण इति श्रुतिस्मृति-प्रसिद्धिः;
It is well-known from the Scriptures and Smṛtis, that Varuṇa is the Lord of Waters.

4.3.3 L.8  वरुणाद् अधि इन्द्र-प्रजापती
After Varuṇa, Indra and Prajā-pati should be successively placed in the order,

4.3.3 L.9  स्थानान्तराभावात् पाठ-सामर्थ्याच्च;
Both because (in Kauṣītaki) the Scriptures recite that way and there is no other position (where they could possibly be placed).

4.3.3 L.10  आगन्तुकत्वाद् अपि
वरुणादीनामन्ते एव निवेशः,

They should be relegated towards the end, after Varuṇa etc.,
Inasmuch as, they are casually mentioned,

4.3.3 L.11  वैशेषिक-स्थानाभावात्;
And have no recognized position in the path,

4.3.3 L.12  विद्युच्च अन्त्या अर्चिरादौ वर्त्मनि॥३॥
Which begins with Arci and ends with Lightning. — 3.

– 181. Taḍid-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.3.4 Su..5 Su..6

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
आतिवाहिकास्तल्लिङ्गात्॥४.३.४॥
Ātivāhikās tal-liṅgāt.

Ātivāhikāḥ: conductors, deities conducting the departed soul; Tad-liṅgāt: on account of indicatory marks to that effect.

🔗 (These stages of the path are) guides (Ātivāhikas), because there is an indicatory mark (about it being so). — 4.3.4.

4.3.4 L.1  तेष्वेव अर्चिरादिषु संशयः – किमेतानि मार्गचिह्नानि,
With regard to the path of Arci etc., there is a doubt as to whether these entities are the signs of the path,

4.3.4 L.2  उत भोगभूमयः,
Or places where the Self experiences the fruits (of action),

4.3.4 L.3  अथवा नेतारो गन्तॄणामिति।
Or whether they are conductors of those who travel (by this path).


4.3.4 L.4  तत्र मार्गलक्षणभूता अर्चिरादय इति तावत्प्राप्तम्,
The conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) is that Arci etc. are the signs i.e. land-marks on the road,

4.3.4 L.5  तत्स्वरूपत्वादुपदेशस्य;
Because the trend of the Scriptural instruction is of that nature.

4.3.4 L.6  यथा हि लोके कश्चिद्ग्रामं नगरं वा प्रतिष्ठासमानोऽनुशिष्यते –
Just as in the ordinary world, when a man starts to go to a village or a town, he is given instructions, thus —

4.3.4 L.7  गच्छ इतस्त्वममुं गिरिं ततो न्यग्रोधं ततो नदीं ततो ग्रामं नगरं वा प्राप्स्यसीति –
“Go thou from here to that hill, thence to that Udumbara tree, thence further on to the river, and from there thou shalt reach the village or town (as the case may be)”,

4.3.4 L.8  एवमिहापि ‘अर्चिषोऽहरह्न आपूर्यमाणपक्षम्’ इत्याद्याह।
Even so, it is stated here by the Scriptures, thus — “From the Arci to the day, from the day to the bright half of a month, etc.”.

4.3.4 L.9  अथवा भोगभूमय इति प्राप्तम्;
Or else, may be, they are the places for experiencing (the fruits of actions)

4.3.4 L.10  तथाहि लोकशब्देन अग्न्यादीननुबध्नाति – ‘अग्निलोकमागच्छति’ (कौ. उ. १-३) इत्यादि;
Inasmuch as the Scriptures have connected Agni etc. with the word ‘Loka’ (world), as for instance, “He reaches the world (Loka) of Agni” (KausU. 1.3),

4.3.4 L.11  लोकशब्दश्च प्राणिनां भोगायतनेषु भाष्यते –
And the word ‘Loka’ is used for a place of enjoyment,

4.3.4 L.12  ‘मनुष्यलोकः पितृलोको देवलोकः’ (BrhU.1.5.16) इति च;
As for instance, “The world of men, the world of the manes and the world of the Gods” (BrhU.1.5.16).

4.3.4 L.13  तथा च ब्राह्मणम् – ‘अहोरात्रेषु ते लोकेषु सज्जन्ते’ इत्यादि।
Even so, says the Brāhmaṇa — “They become attached to the worlds characterized by days and nights” (Śata. Bra. 10.2.6.8).

4.3.4 L.14  तस्मान्नातिवाहिका अर्चिरादयः।
Hence these stages could not possibly be the guides,

4.3.4 L.15  अचेतनत्वाद् अप्येषाम् आतिवाहिकत्वानुपपत्तिः;
Precisely because they are non-sentient and their being guides is not reasonably sustainable.

4.3.4 L.16  चेतना हि लोके राज-नियुक्ताः पुरुषा दुर्गेषु मार्गेष्वतिवाह्यान् अतिवाहयन्तीति।
In the ordinary world, it is the actually living intelligent men that are appointed by the King, to guide the people travelling along a difficult path.


4.3.4 L.17  एवं प्राप्ते, ब्रूमः – आतिवाहिका एवैते भवितुमर्हन्ति।
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), we reply — They of course deserve to be the guides.

4.3.4 L.18  कुतः? तल्लिङ्गात्; तथा हि – ‘चन्द्रमसो विद्युतं तत्पुरुषोऽमानवः स एनान्ब्रह्म गमयति’ (ChanU.4.15.5) इति सिद्धवद्गमयितृत्वं दर्शयति।
Whence is it so? Because, the Scriptural passage “From the moon to the lightning. There, a Puruṣa, who is non-human (Amānuṣa), leads them (the Selfs) up to Brahman” (ChanU.4.15.5) indicates that, that these are guides is spoken of as an established thing.


4.3.4 L.19  तद्वचनं तद्विषयम् एवोपक्षीणमिति चेत्,
(If the opponent of Vedānta says) — But, the use of that statement is exhausted in that particular subject it speaks about (and does not also mean that there is any man as a guide upto the stage of Lightning):


4.3.4 L.20  न, प्राप्तमानवत्वनिवृत्तिपरत्वाद् विशेषणस्य;
(We reply) — No, because the special qualification ‘who is non-human’ has the purpose of excluding an earlier already established idea about these guides being men (Mānava).

4.3.4 L.21  यद्यर्चिरादिषु पुरुषा गमयितारः प्राप्ताः
It is only, if it is understood, that Arci etc. are men that serve as guides,

4.3.4 L.22  ते च मानवाः, ततो युक्तं तन्निवृत्त्यर्थं पुरुष-विशेषणम् –
अमानव इति॥४॥

That this use of the expression ‘who is non-human’
would be justified in its purpose of excluding, in the case of that particular guide, the previously established fact that the guides are human beings. — 4.

[Go top]

4.3.5 L.1  ननु तल्लिङ्गमात्रमगमकम्, न्यायाभावात्;
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) mere indicatory mark, in the absence of any logical reason to support it, is not indicative (of such sentient guides).


4.3.5 L.2  नैष दोषः –
We reply: —

←PrevNext→
उभयव्यामोहात्तत्सिद्धेः॥४.३.५॥
Ubhaya-vyāmohāt tat-siddheḥ.

Ubhaya: both (the path and the traveller); Vyāmohāt: because of unconsciousness; Tat-siddheḥ: that is established.

🔗 Because, by reason of both the path and the Selfs who travel by that path being without any knowledge, it is established (that the Deities Arci etc. are guides). — 4.3.5.

4.3.5 L.3  ये तावदर्चिरादिमार्गगाः ते देह-वियोगात् सम्पिण्डित-करणग्रामा इति अस्वतन्त्राः,
As regards those (Selfs) who traverse the path of Light, in as much as they are not independent, because, all their sense-organs happen to be bunched up together by their having been separated from their body,

4.3.5 L.4  अर्चिरादीनाम् अप्यचेतनत्वादस्वातन्त्र्यम् –
And in as much as Light (Arci) etc. also are equally incapable of any independent activity, because of their being nonsentient,

4.3.5 L.5  इत्यतः अर्चिराद्यभिमानिनश्चेतना देवताविशेषा अतियात्रायां नियुक्ता इति गम्यते;
It is understood that these sentient Deities who preside over Light etc., are appointed (to act as guides) on this special journey.

4.3.5 L.6  लोकेऽपि हि मत्तमूर्छितादयः सम्पिण्डित-करणाः परप्रयुक्त-वर्त्मानो भवन्ति।
In the ordinary world also (it is seen that) people who are either drunk or have fainted, and whose sense-organs happen to be similarly bunched up together (and have become incapable of action), are led along their path by others.

4.3.5 L.7  अनवस्थितत्वाद् अप्यर्चिरादीनां
Again as Light etc. are not permanently available,

4.3.5 L.8  न मार्ग-लक्षणत्वोपपत्तिः;
That they can be characteristic of the path, i.e. that they can be land-marks of the path, is not reasonably sustainable,

4.3.5 L.9  न हि रात्रौ प्रेतस्य
Nor can one, who has departed (this life) during the night,

4.3.5 L.10  अहःस्वरूपाभिसम्भव उपपद्यते।
Ever reach the day,

4.3.5 L.11  न च प्रतिपालनमस्तीत्युक्तं पुरस्तात्;
While it has already been stated, that he cannot possibly await (the advent of) the day.

4.3.5 L.12  ध्रुवत्वात्तु देवतात्मनां नायं दोषो भवति।
But if it is understood that these Arci etc. have Deities etc. as their Selfs, then such Deities having eternal existence, this fault does not occur (in their case).

4.3.5 L.13  अर्चिरादि-शब्दता च एषाम् अर्चिराद्यभिमानादुपपद्यते;
It is reasonably sustainable that they (the Deities) are referred to here as Light etc., because they are supposed to identify themselves with Arci etc.

4.3.5 L.14  ‘अर्चिषोऽहः’ (ChanU.4.15.5, ChanU.5.10.1) इत्यादिनिर्देशस्तु आतिवाहिकत्वेऽपि न विरुध्यते –
The statement “From the Light to the day” (ChanU.4.15.5; ChanU.5.10.1) is not inconsistent even in the case of their being such guides,

4.3.5 L.15  अर्चिषा हेतुना अहरभिसम्भवति,
Because it is possible, that by means of the instrumentality of the Light, the Self reaches the day

4.3.5 L.16  अह्ना हेतुना आपूर्यमाणपक्षमिति;
And by means of the instrumentality of the day, it reaches the bright half of the month.

4.3.5 L.17  तथा च लोके प्रसिद्धेष्वप्यातिवाहिकेषु एवंजातीयक उपदेशो दृश्यते –
It is seen that such instruction is seen to be given to the guides well-known in this ordinary world also, thus —

4.3.5 L.18  गच्छ त्वम् इतो बलवर्माणं ततो जयसिंहं ततः कृष्णगुप्तमिति।
Do thou go from this place to Jaya-varmā, thence to Jaya-siṃha and from thence to Kṛṣṇa-gupta.

4.3.5 L.19  अपि च उपक्रमे ‘तेऽर्चिरभिसम्भवन्ति’ (BrhU.6.2.15) इति सम्बन्धमात्रमुक्तम्,
Besides, in the introductory portion, merely a general relation is stated, in the passage “They arrive at the Light” (BrhU.6.2.15),

4.3.5 L.20  न सम्बन्धविशेषः कश्चित्;
But no special relation (of any kind).

4.3.5 L.21  उपसंहारे तु ‘स एनान्ब्रह्म गमयति’ (ChanU.4.15.6) इति सम्बन्ध-विशेषः अतिवाह्यातिवाहकत्वलक्षण उक्तः;
But in the concluding passage a special relation as that between a guide and a person guided is mentioned, thus — “He conducts them to Brahman”,

4.3.5 L.22  तेन स एवोपक्रमेऽपीति निर्धार्यते।
And from that it is definitely concluded that the same special relation exists in the introductory portion also.

4.3.5 L.23  सम्पिण्डित-करणत्वादेव च गन्तॄणां
In as much as the sense-organs of those who traverse this path are all bunched up together,

4.3.5 L.24  न तत्र भोगसम्भवः;
There is no possibility of any such experiencing (of the fruits of actions).

4.3.5 L.25  लोक-शब्दस्तु अनुपभुञ्जानेष्वपि गन्तृषु गमयितुं शक्यते,
Now, even with respect to those who traverse this path but do not experience the fruits of actions, it is possible to use the word Loka (world),

4.3.5 L.26  अन्येषां तल्लोक-वासिनां भोग-भूमित्वात्।
Because these Lokas (i.e. worlds met with in the path) can well be the places for the experiencing (of the fruit of actions) by those who are residents of these worlds.

4.3.5 L.27  अतः अग्नि-स्वामिकं लोकं प्राप्तः अग्निना अतिवाह्यते,
वायु-स्वामिकं प्राप्तो वायुना –
इति योजयितव्यम्॥५॥

So, it should be construed like this —
One who reaches the Agni-Loka (i.e. where Agni is the Lord) is conducted by Agni
And one who reaches the place where Vāyu is the Lord, is conducted by Vāyu. — 5.

[Go top]

4.3.6 L.1  कथं पुनरातिवाहिकत्वपक्षे वरुणादिषु तत्सम्भवः?
(The opponent of Vedānta raises a doubt.) If the view that these (stages of the path) are but such living sentient guides, how can that properly apply in the case of Varuṇa etc.

4.3.6 L.2  विद्युतो ह्यधि वरुणादय उपक्षिप्ताः,
Inasmuch as, in the arrangement (of the order of the stages) Varuṇa etc. are placed after Lightning,

4.3.6 L.3  विद्युतस्त्वनन्तरम् आ ब्रह्मप्राप्तेः अमानवस्यैव पुरुषस्य गमयितृत्वं श्रुतम् –
While, from the stage of Lightning right up to Brahma-Loka, the Scriptures speak about the conductorship of the Puruṣa who does not belong to the human species (i.e. who is a nonhuman)?


4.3.6 L.4  इत्यत उत्तरं पठति –
Hence, to this, the Sūtra-kāra replies, thus —

←PrevNext→
वैद्युतेनैव ततस्तच्छ्रुतेः॥४.३.६॥
Vaidyutenaiva tatas tac-chruteḥ.

Vaidyutena: by the (superhuman) guide connected with lightning, by the superhuman being who takes his charge from the god of lightning; Eva: alone, only, indeed; Tataḥ: from thence; Tat-sruteh: that being known from the Śruti, as Śruti states so, because of the Vedic text.

🔗 From there, the Selfs are escorted by the Puruṣa in the Lightning, because the Scriptures have said so. — 4.3.6.

4.3.6 L.5  ततो विद्युदभिसम्भवनाद् ऊर्ध्वं विद्युद् अनन्तर-वर्तिनैवामानवेन पुरुषेण वरुणलोकादिष्वतिवाह्यमाना ब्रह्मलोकं गच्छन्तीति अवगन्तव्यम्,
It should be understood that having reached (the stage of) Lightning, (the Selfs) are escorted by a non-human Puruṣa upto the world of Brahman.

4.3.6 L.6  ‘तान्वैद्युतात्पुरुषोऽमानवः स एत्य ब्रह्मलोकं गमयति’ इति तस्यैव गमयितृत्वश्रुतेः।
Because, the Scriptures make you understand that way, thus — “From that stage of Lightning, a non-human Puruṣa comes along and leads the Selfs to the world of Brahman”.

4.3.6 L.7  वरुणादयस्तु तस्यैव अप्रतिबन्ध-करणेन साहाय्यानुष्ठानेन वा केनचित् अनुग्राहका इत्यवगन्तव्यम्।
As regards (deities such as) Varuṇa and others, it should be understood that they favour him, either by not obstructing him or by actually helping him on in some way.

4.3.6 L.8  तस्मात्साधूक्तम् –
Therefore, it is but properly stated (by the Sūtra-kāra)

4.3.6 L.9  आतिवाहिका देवतात्मानोऽर्चिरादय इति॥६॥
That these Light etc., who have the deities as their Selfs, are the guides (of the Jīva-Selfs on their way). — 6.

– 182. Ātivāhika-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.3.7 Su..8 Su..9 Su..10 Su..11 Su..12 Su..13 Su..14

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
कार्यं बादरिरस्य गत्युपपत्तेः॥४.३.७॥
Kāryaṃ bādarir asya gaty-upapatteḥ.

Kāryam: the relative Brahman or Hiraṇya-garbha; Bādariḥ: the sage Bādari (holds); Asya: his; Gati-upapatteḥ: on account of the possibility of being the goal.

🔗 Bādari is of opinion that the Brahman (referred to above) is the qualified Brahman, an effect (Kārya) (of the unqualified transcendent Brahman), because an approach (Gati) towards such qualified Brahman is reasonably sustainable. — 4.3.7.

4.3.7 L.1  ‘स एनान्ब्रह्म गमयति’ (ChanU.4.15.5) इत्यत्र
With regard to the Scriptural passage “He leads them up to Brahman” (ChanU.4.15.5),

4.3.7 L.2  विचिकित्स्यते – किं कार्यम् अपरं ब्रह्म गमयति,
It is now considered, as to whether he leads the Selfs to the lower Brahman (i.e. qualified Brahman), an effect of the unqualified transcendent Brahman,

4.3.7 L.3  आहोस्वित् परमेवाविकृतं मुख्यं ब्रह्मेति।
Or whether he leads the Selfs to the principal transcendent unqualified Brahman which does not undergo any modification.

4.3.7 L.4  कुतः संशयः? ब्रह्मशब्द-प्रयोगात्, गतिश्रुतेश्च।
Whence is there any such doubt? Because of the employment of the word Brahman and the mention of the act of going (implying movement).


4.3.7 L.5  तत्र कार्यमेव सगुणम् अपरं ब्रह्म एनान् गमयति अमानवः पुरुष इति बादरिराचार्यो मन्यते।
With regard to that, Ācārya Bādari is of opinion, that the nonhuman Puruṣa leads the Selfs only to the qualified Brahman, an effect (of the unqualified transcendent Brahman).

4.3.7 L.6  कुतः? अस्य गत्युपपत्तेः –
Whence is it so? Because, an approach (i.e. movement) as such, towards such qualified Brahman is reasonably sustainable.

4.3.7 L.7  अस्य हि कार्य-ब्रह्मणो गन्तव्यत्वमुपपद्यते,
It is only towards qualified Brahman, an effect (of the unqualified Brahman), that any such approach (involving motion) is possible,

4.3.7 L.8  प्रदेशवत्त्वात्;
Because it has a definite local habitation (Loka in Brahma-Loka),

4.3.7 L.9  न तु परस्मिन्ब्रह्मणि गन्तृत्वं गन्तव्यत्वं गतिर्वा अवकल्पते,
While it cannot be imagined, that there can be any approach towards the transcendent unqualified Brahman, or that it can ever be an object of any such approach, or that any such approach (involving movement) towards it, is possible,

4.3.7 L.10  सर्वगतत्वात्
Because the transcendent unqualified Brahman is omnipresent

4.3.7 L.11  प्रत्यगात्मत्वाच्च गन्तॄणाम्॥७॥
And is the universal Self of all those who are supposed so to approach. — 7.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
विशेषितत्वाच्च॥४.३.८॥
Viśeṣitatvāc ca.

Viśeṣitatvāt: because of being specified in Śruti, on account of the qualification; Ca: and.

🔗 Also, because of the specification. — 4.3.8.

4.3.8 L.1  ‘ब्रह्मलोकान्गमयति ते तेषु ब्रह्मलोकेषु पराः परावतो वसन्ति’ (BrhU.6.2.15) इति च श्रुत्यन्तरे
In another Scriptural passage — “He leads them up to the worlds of Brahman, and having attained excellence, they sojourn there for a period coextensive with the life-span of Brahman” (BrhU.6.2.15),

4.3.8 L.2  विशेषितत्वात् कार्यब्रह्मविषयैव गतिरिति गम्यते;
Because of the specification, it is understood that this movement of approach (by the Selfs) is only towards Brahma-the-effect (Kārya-Brahman).

4.3.8 L.3  न हि बहुवचनेन विशेषणं परस्मिन्ब्रह्मण्यवकल्पते;
Any such specification by the plural number (viz. worlds) is not possible in the case of the Highest (unqualified) Brahman,

4.3.8 L.4  कार्ये तु अवस्थाभेदोपपत्तेः सम्भवति बहुवचनम्।
while it is possible in the case of Brahma-the-effect, because, that it can have differences of conditions, is reasonably sustainable.

4.3.8 L.5  लोक-श्रुतिरपि विकारगोचरायामेव सन्निवेश-विशिष्टायां भोग-भूमावाञ्जसी;
Besides, the use of the word Lokas (worlds) by the Scriptures in its direct sense is appropriate in the case of such places as are comprised in the effects (of Brahman) and which have a specific design, and wherein fruits of actions are experienced.

4.3.8 L.6  गौणी त्वन्यत्र ‘ब्रह्मैव लोक एष सम्राट्’ इत्यादिषु।
In other cases its use is in the metaphorical sense, as for instance, in the Scriptural passage (in which Yājña-valkya says to Janaka) — “Oh king, Brahman alone is this world” (BrhU.4.4.23).

4.3.8 L.7  अधिकरणाधिकर्तव्य-निर्देशोऽपि
परस्मिन्ब्रह्मणि अनाञ्जसः स्यात्।

Besides, the Scriptural statement about one entity being a support (Ādhāra), and another entity as something which rests on such support (Ādheya),
Cannot be appropriate in the case of the Highest (transcendent) Brahman.

4.3.8 L.8  तस्मात् कार्यविषयमेवेदं नयनम्॥८॥
Therefore, this movement of approach is of course towards Brahma-the-effect. — 8.

[Go top]

4.3.9 L.1  ननु कार्यविषयेऽपि ब्रह्म-शब्दो नोपपद्यते,
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) the use of the word Brahman is not reasonably sustainable even in the case of Brahma-the-effect (Kārya-Brahman),

4.3.9 L.2  समन्वये हि समस्तस्य जगतो जन्मादिकारणं ब्रह्मेति स्थापितम् –
Because it has been established in the Samanvaya Adhyāya (i.e. BrSEng.1.1.1–2), that Brahman is the cause of the creation etc. of this entire world.


4.3.9 L.3  इत्यत्रोच्यते –
With regard to that, it is said: —

←PrevNext→
सामीप्यात्तु तद्व्यपदेशः॥४.३.९॥
Sāmīpyāt tu tad-vyapadeśaḥ.

Sāmīpyāt: because of the nearness or proximity; Tu: but; Tad: that; Vyapadeśaḥ: designation.

🔗 The reference to it i.e. Brahma-the-effect (Kārya-Brahman), as Brahman, however (Tu), is because of the nearness. — 4.3.9.

4.3.9 L.4  तुशब्द आशङ्काव्यावृत्त्यर्थः;
The word ‘however’ (Tu) has the purpose of refuting the above objection.

4.3.9 L.5  परब्रह्म-सामीप्यात् अपरस्य ब्रह्मणः, तस्मिन्नपि ब्रह्मशब्द-प्रयोगो न विरुध्यते।
The use of the word Brahman for the lower qualified Brahman is not contradictory, by reason of its nearness to the Highest (transcendent) Brahman,

4.3.9 L.6  परमेव हि ब्रह्म
विशुद्धोपाधि-सम्बन्धं क्वचित्कैश्चिद्विकार-धर्मैः मनोमयत्वादिभिः उपासनाय उपदिश्यमानम् अपरम् इति स्थितिः॥९॥

Because it is firmly established, that, in fact it is but the Highest Brahman itself,
Which, when it is in contact with pure limiting adjuncts such as intellect etc.), is described as having the qualities of an effect, such as having the mind as its structure etc., for the purpose of meditation, and is described as the Lower qualified Brahman. — 9.

[Go top]

4.3.10 L.1  ननु कार्यप्राप्तौ
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) the conclusion that it is the qualified Brahman, i.e. Brahma-the-effect, to which the Selfs reach,

4.3.10 L.2  अनावृत्तिश्रवणं न घटते;
Does not fit in properly with the Scriptural declaration about the non-return (to this transmigratory existence).

4.3.10 L.3  न हि परस्माद्ब्रह्मणोऽन्यत्र क्वचिन् नित्यतां सम्भावयन्ति;
It is not accepted (by Scriptures), that there can ever be any eternal existence (to the Jīva-Self) elsewhere than in the Highest transcendent Brahman.

4.3.10 L.4  दर्शयति च देवयानेन पथा प्रस्थितानामनावृत्तिम् –
(If it be said) that it is indicated by the Scriptures that those who go along the Deva-yāna path do not again return (to this transmigratory existence), thus —

4.3.10 L.5  ‘एतेन प्रतिपद्यमाना इमं मानवमावर्तं नावर्तन्ते’ (ChanU.4.15.6) इति,
“Those who traverse this path do not ever return to this recurring human existence” (ChanU.4.15.6),

4.3.10 L.6  तेषामिह न पुनरावृत्तिरिति –
And that they do not return again because it is also said —

4.3.10 L.7  ‘तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति’ (ChanU.8.6.6, KathU.2.3.16) इति च;
“One who ascends by that path attains immortality” (ChanU.8.6.6; KathU.2.3.16),


4.3.10 L.8  अत्र ब्रूमः –
We reply: —

←PrevNext→
कार्यात्यये तदध्यक्षेण सहातः परमभिधानात्॥४.३.१०॥
Kāryātyaye tad-adhyakṣeṇa sahātaḥ param abhidhānāt.

Kārya-atyaye: on the dissolution of the Brahma-loka (Kārya: of the effect, i.e., the universe, the relative Sa-guṇa Brahman); Tad: of that; Adhyakṣeṇa: with the ruler-president, i.e., Hiraṇya-garbha or the four-faced Brahmā; Saha: with; Ataḥ param: higher than that, i.e., the Supreme Brahman; Abhidhānāt: on account of the declaration of the Śruti.

🔗 When there is a dissolution of the worlds of Brahma-the-effect, (the Selfs) along with the presiding deity, attain the Highest Brahman, because the Scriptures have so declared. — 4.3.10.

4.3.10 L.9  कार्यब्रह्मलोकप्रलय-प्रत्युपस्थाने सति तत्रैव उत्पन्न-सम्यग्दर्शनाः सन्तः,
When the dissolution of the worlds of Brahma-the-effect, is imminent, the Selfs, in whom correct i.e. perfect knowledge is generated there,

4.3.10 L.10  तदध्यक्षेण हिरण्यगर्भेण सह अतः परं परिशुद्धं विष्णोः परमं पदं प्रतिपद्यन्ते –
Attain the highest place of Viṣṇu, which is pure, and is even higher than this world of Brahma-the-effect (Kārya-Brahman), along with its presiding entity, the Hiraṇya-garbha.

4.3.10 L.11  इतीत्थं क्रम-मुक्तिः अनावृत्त्यादि-श्रुत्यभिधानेभ्योऽभ्युपगन्तव्या।
This should be understood to be so from the Scriptural statements about Final Release by stages (Krama-mukti), and non-return (to this transmigratory existence) etc.

4.3.10 L.12  न ह्यञ्जसैव गतिपूर्विका पर-प्राप्तिः सम्भवतीत्युपपादितम्॥१०॥
It has been expounded (already) that the attainment of the Highest Brahman, as preceded by a movement of approach (Gati-pūrvikā) towards it, is properly not possible. — 10.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
स्मृतेश्च॥४.३.११॥
Smṛteś ca.

Smṛteḥ: on account of the statement of the Smṛti, as Smṛti agrees with the view, according to the Smṛti; Ca: and.

🔗 On account of the Smṛti, also. — 4.3.11.

4.3.11 L.1  स्मृतिरप्येतमर्थमनुजानाति –
The Smṛti also is in agreement with this view, thus —

4.3.11 L.2  ‘ब्रह्मणा सह ते सर्वे सम्प्राप्ते प्रतिसञ्चरे। परस्यान्ते कृतात्मानः प्रविशन्ति परं पदम्’ इति।
“When the final dissolution (of this world) along with Hiraṇya-garbha, is imminent, all these (Jīva-Selfs), purified in mind, attain the Highest Brahman, along with Brahman, the Hiraṇya-garbha.”

4.3.11 L.3  तस्मात् कार्यब्रह्म-विषया एव गति-श्रुतयः इति सिद्धान्तः॥११॥
Therefore, the conclusion is that the Scriptural statement about the movement of approach, is with respect to the Brahman, i.e. Brahma-the-effect. — 11.

[Go top]

4.3.12 L.1  कं पुनः पूर्वपक्षमाशङ्क्य अयं सिद्धान्तः प्रतिष्ठापितः ‘कार्यं बादरिः’ (BrS.4.3.7) इत्यादिनेति,
But (says the opponent of.Vedānta), by raising what primo facie doubt, is this conclusion, viz. “Bādari is of opinion that the Brahman referred to, is Brahma-the-effect” (BrS.4.3.7) arrived at?


4.3.12 L.2  स इदानीं सूत्रैरेवोपदर्श्यते –
The Sūtra-kāra now sets forth the same i.e. the prima facie doubt by the following Sūtra:

←PrevNext→
परं जैमिनिर्मुख्यत्वात्॥४.३.१२॥
Paraṃ jaiminir mukhyatvāt.

Param: the Supreme (Brahman); Jaiminiḥ: the sage Jaimini (opines or holds); Mukhyatvāt: on account of that being the primary meaning (of the word ‘Brahman’).

🔗 Jaimini is of opinion that he (the Puruṣa) leads them to the Highest Brahman, because, that is the principal meaning (of the word, Brahman). — 4.3.12.

4.3.12 L.3  जैमिनिस्त्वाचार्यः ‘स एनान्ब्रह्म गमयति’ (ChanU.4.15.6) इत्यत्र परमेव ब्रह्म प्रापयतीति मन्यते।
Ācārya Jaimini is of opinion, that the Scriptural passage “He leads them on to Brahman” (ChanU.4.15.6) means that he leads them to the Highest transcendent Brahman.

4.3.12 L.4  कुतः? मुख्यत्वात्। परं हि ब्रह्म ब्रह्म-शब्दस्य मुख्यमालम्बनम्,
Whence is it so? Because, the principal meaning of the word ‘Brahman’ is the Highest transcendent Brahman,

4.3.12 L.5  गौणमपरम्;
And Brahma-the-effect is its secondary meaning,

4.3.12 L.6  मुख्यगौणयोश्च मुख्ये सम्प्रत्ययो भवति॥१२॥
And as between the principal and the secondary meanings the principal meaning is to be preferred. — 12.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
दर्शनाच्च॥४.३.१३॥
Darśanāc ca.

Darśanāt: on account of the Śruti texts; Ca: and, also.

🔗 Also, because of the Scriptures. — 4.3.13.

4.3.13 L.1  ‘तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति’ (ChanU.8.6.6, KathU.2.3.16) इति च
The Scriptural passage “One ascending by that path, attains immortality” (ChanU.8.6.6 and KathU.2.3.16),

4.3.13 L.2  गतिपूर्वकममृतत्वं दर्शयति;
Indicates that this immortality (referred to therein) is preceded by a movement of approach (to it).

4.3.13 L.3  अमृतत्वं च परस्मिन्ब्रह्मण्युपपद्यते, न कार्ये,
Immortality is reasonably sustainable in the case of the Highest transcendent Brahman, and not in the case of Brahma-the-effect,

4.3.13 L.4  विनाशित्वात्कार्यस्य –
Inasmuch as every effect, as such, is liable to destruction,

4.3.13 L.5  ‘अथ यत्रान्यत्पश्यति ... तदल्पं ... तन्मर्त्यम्’ (ChanU.7.24.1) इति वचनात्।
Because of the Scriptures, which declare — “Where one sees things different (from each other) that is insignificant and mortal” (ChanU.7.24.1).

4.3.13 L.6  परविषयैव च एषा गतिः कठ-वल्लीषु पठ्यते;
It is with respect to the Highest (Brahman) that in the Kaṭha-Valli, such movement of approach is mentioned.

4.3.13 L.7  न हि तत्र विद्यान्तर-प्रक्रमोऽस्ति –
No other Vidyā is introduced there,

4.3.13 L.8  ‘अन्यत्र धर्मादन्यत्राधर्मात्’ (KathU.1.2.14) इति
परस्यैव ब्रह्मणः प्रक्रान्तत्वात्॥१३॥

Because by the Scriptural passage “Different from meritorious action (Dharma), different from unmeritorious action (Adharma) etc.” (KathU.1.2.14),
It is the Highest transcendent Brahman that is introduced (KathU.1.2.14). — 13.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
न च कार्ये प्रतिपत्त्यभिसन्धिः॥४.३.१४॥
Na ca kārye pratipatty-abhisandhiḥ.

Na: not; Ca: and; Kārye: in the Sa-guṇa Brahman; Pratipatti: realisation of Brahman; Abhisandhiḥ: desire. (Pratipatti-abhisandhiḥ: the desire to attain or realise Brahman.)

🔗 This determinate belief (Abhisandhi) about the attainment (of Brahman), is not with respect to Brahma-the-effect (i.e. qualified Brahman). — 4.3.14.

4.3.14 L.1  अपि च ‘प्रजापतेः सभां वेश्म प्रपद्ये’ (ChanU.8.14.1) इति
नायं कार्यविषयः प्रतिपत्त्यभिसन्धिः,

Besides, this determinate belief about the attainment (of Brahman), thus —
“May I reach the assembly hall of the mansion of Prajā-pati” (ChanU.8.14.1),
Is not with respect to Brahma-the-effect (Kārya-Brahman),

4.3.14 L.2  ‘नामरूपयोर्निर्वहिता ते यदन्तरा तद्ब्रह्म’ (ChanU.8.14.1) इति
Because, in the (preceding) Scriptural passage — “That which makes names and form manifest, and in whom they abide, that is Brahman” (ChanU.8.14.1),

4.3.14 L.3  कार्य-विलक्षणस्य परस्यैव ब्रह्मणः प्रकृतत्वात्;
The Highest Brahman, which is dissimilar to Brahma-the-effect, is understood to be the relevant subject matter.

4.3.14 L.4  ‘यशोऽहं भवामि ब्राह्मणानाम्’ (ChanU.8.14.1) इति च
Similarly, in the Scriptural passage — “I shall be the Self (Yaśas) of the Brāhmaṇas (and of the Kṣatriyas and Vaiśyas)” (ChanU.8.14.1),

4.3.14 L.5  सर्वात्मत्वेनोपक्रमणात्;
It is understood to be the Self of all,

4.3.14 L.6  ‘न तस्य प्रतिमाऽस्ति यस्य नाम महद्यशः’ (SvetU.4.19) इति च
Inasmuch as in the Scriptural passage “That, whose name is the great Self (Yaśas), has no equal” (SvetU.4.19),

4.3.14 L.7  परस्यैव ब्रह्मणो यशोनामत्व-प्रसिद्धेः।
That Highest Brahman alone is known to bear the name ‘Yaśas’ (the Self).

4.3.14 L.8  सा चेयं वेश्मप्रतिपत्तिः गतिपूर्विका हार्द-विद्यायामुदिता –
Because of this attainment of the mansion which is preceded by a movement of approach towards it and which is mentioned in the Vidyā of the Hṛdaya (Daharā-vidyā) thus —

4.3.14 L.9  ‘तदपराजिता पूर्ब्रह्मणः प्रभुविमितꣳ हिरण्मयम्’ (ChanU.8.5.3) इत्यत्र।
“That city of Brahman, called Aparā-jitā, having a golden canopy built by the Lord, Brahman (to which, the one who knows the Daharā-vidyā, goes)” (ChanU.8.5.3),

4.3.14 L.10  पदेरपि च गत्यर्थत्वात्
And also, because the root-verb ‘Pad’ also means movement,

4.3.14 L.11  मार्गापेक्षता अवसीयते।
It is concluded, that there is an expectation of some path (along which such movement can take place).

4.3.14 L.12  तस्मात्परब्रह्म-विषया गति-श्रुतय इति पक्षान्तरम्।
Therefore, the Scriptural statements about ‘movement’ are with respect to the Highest Brahman, is the other view (Pakṣāntaram, i.e. the opponent’s view i.e. Pūrva-Pakṣa).

4.3.14 L.13  तावेतौ द्वौ पक्षावाचार्येण सूत्रितौ –
These are the two views which have been detailed by the Ācārya in the form of Sūtras.

4.3.14 L.14  गत्युपपत्त्यादिभिरेकः,
One view (in Sūtras 7 to 11) shows movement to be reasonably sustainable,

4.3.14 L.15  मुख्यत्वादिभिरपरः।
And the other view (in Sūtras 12 to 14), shows that it is the principal meaning (of the word Brahman) that is feasible.

4.3.14 L.16  तत्र गत्युपपत्त्यादयः प्रभवन्ति मुख्यत्वादीनाभासयितुम्,
Now, here, the view that ‘movement is reasonably sustainable’, is capable of rendering the view that ‘the principal meaning (of Brahman) is feasible’ fallacious,

4.3.14 L.17  न तु मुख्यत्वादयो गत्युपपत्त्यादीन् –
But not vice versa.

4.3.14 L.18  इति आद्य एव सिद्धान्तो व्याख्यातः,
The first view therefore is explained as being the final conclusion (Siddhānta)

4.3.14 L.19  द्वितीयस्तु पूर्वपक्षः।
And the latter one as being the Pūrva-Pakṣa (i.e. the view of the opponent of Vedānta).

4.3.14 L.20  न ह्यसत्यपि सम्भवे मुख्यस्यैवार्थस्य ग्रहणमिति
When it is not so possible (to understand the word Brahman to be used in the principal sense here)

4.3.14 L.21  कश्चिदाज्ञापयिता विद्यते।
We know of no one, who can dictate to us that it should be so understood.

4.3.14 L.22  परविद्या-प्रकरणेऽपि च
Besides, even in the chapter relating to the Vidyā of the Highest Brahman,

4.3.14 L.23  तत्-स्तुत्यर्थं
विद्यान्तराश्रयगत्यनुकीर्तनमुपपद्यते –
‘विष्वङ्ङन्या उत्क्रमणे भवन्ति’ (ChanU.8.6.6) इतिवत्।

It is reasonably sustainable to understand that, the reference to the movement implied in another Vidyā,
Such as — “Very many other Nāḍīs are for the purpose of the going up (of the Jīva-Selfs)” (ChanU.8.6.6),
Is for the glorification of the Vidyā of the Highest Brahman.

4.3.14 L.24  ‘प्रजापतेः सभां वेश्म प्रपद्ये’ (ChanU.8.14.1) इति तु पूर्ववाक्य-विच्छेदेन
By separating the passage “May I reach the hall of the mansion of Prajā-pati” (ChanU.8.14.1) (from the passage preceding it),

4.3.14 L.25  कार्येऽपि प्रतिपत्त्यभिसन्धिर्न विरुध्यते।
It would even not be contradictory (to understand) that this determinate belief (in reaching) is with reference to Brahma-the-effect.

4.3.14 L.26  सगुणेऽपि च ब्रह्मणि सर्वात्मत्व-सङ्कीर्तनम् ‘सर्वकर्मा सर्वकामः’ इत्यादिवत् अवकल्पते।
Just as the qualified Brahman is spoken of as one to whom all actions and all desires belong, it is also possible to describe it, as being the Self of all.

4.3.14 L.27  तस्मादपर-विषया एव गति-श्रुतयः॥
Therefore, the Scriptural statements about ‘movement’ are with reference to Apara-Vidyā i.e. the Vidyā of qualified Brahman (Kārya-Brahman i.e. Brahma-the-effect).


4.3.14 L.28  केचित्पुनः पूर्वाणि पूर्वपक्ष-सूत्राणि भवन्ति
Some others again adhering to the usual arrangement, viz., that the earlier Sūtras here (7 to 11) represent the Pūrva-Pakṣa view (i.e. the view of the opponent of Vedānta)

4.3.14 L.29  उत्तराणि सिद्धान्तसूत्राणि –
And the later Sūtras here (12-13) represent the final conclusion (i.e. the Siddhānta view),

4.3.14 L.30  इत्येतां व्यवस्थाम् अनुरुध्यमानाः पर-विषया एव गति-श्रुतीः प्रतिष्ठापयन्ति;
Baintain that the Scriptural statements about ‘movement’ are with reference to the Highest Brahman.


4.3.14 L.31  तत् अनुपपन्नम्,
That however is not proper,

4.3.14 L.32  गन्तव्यत्वानुपपत्तेः ब्रह्मणः;
Because, that Brahman could ever be the object of any such ‘movement’ is not reasonably sustainable.

4.3.14 L.33  यत्सर्वगतं सर्वान्तरं सर्वात्मकं च परं ब्रह्म
‘आकाशवत् सर्वगतश्च नित्यः’ (शत. ब्रा. १०-६-३-२) ‘यत्साक्षादपरोक्षाद्ब्रह्म’ (BrhU.3.4.1)
‘य आत्मा सर्वान्तरः’ (BrhU.3.4.1)
‘आत्मैवेदꣳ सर्वम्’ (ChanU.7.25.2)
‘ब्रह्मैवेदं विश्वमिदं वरिष्ठम्’ (MunU.2.2.11)
इत्यादिश्रुति-निर्धारित-विशेषम् –

[That the highest Brahman is present everywhere within everything, the Self of everything – Trans. adapted from Panoli]
As particularized in the Scriptural passages
“All-pervading and eternal, like the Ākāśa”,
And “That which is Brahman, directly and immediately” (BrhU.3.4.1),
“That Self which is inside all” (BrhU.3.4.1),
“All this, verily, is the Self” (ChanU.7.25.1),
Brahman verily, is all this and is the best” (MunU.2.2.11),

4.3.14 L.34  तस्य गन्तव्यता न कदाचिदप्युपपद्यते;
Is something, towards which this movement of approach is possible.

4.3.14 L.35  न हि गतमेव गम्यते;
What has already been reached cannot again be sought to be reached.

4.3.14 L.36  अन्यो ह्यन्यद्गच्छतीति प्रसिद्धं लोके।
As is well-known in the ordinary world, it is one thing that goes towards some other thing, (i.e. there always are two different things involved in such a case).


4.3.14 L.37  ननु लोके गतस्यापि गन्तव्यता देशान्तर-विशिष्टस्य दृष्टा –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) — It is seen in the ordinary world that something which has already been arrived at, can still be something towards which movement is possible, having regard to its relation with specific different environment,

4.3.14 L.39  यथा पृथिवीस्थ एव पृथिवीं देशान्तर-द्वारेण गच्छति,
As for instance, one who already is on this earth can be described as going to this very same earth by way of going from one part of it to another.

4.3.14 L.40  तथा अनन्यत्वेऽपि बालस्य कालान्तर-विशिष्टं वार्धकं स्वात्म-भूतमेव गन्तव्यं दृष्टम्,
Similarly, a child being itself (i.e. without being different), can be seen to be progressing towards its own old age, which of course pertains to its own Self, but is characterized by a different period of time.

4.3.14 L.41  तद्वत् ब्रह्मणोऽपि सर्वशक्त्युपेतत्वात्
Even so, inasmuch as, Brahman equipped as it is with all kinds of power,

4.3.14 L.42  कथञ्चित् गन्तव्यता स्यादिति –
May still be something which can somehow admit of being approached.


4.3.14 L.43  न, प्रतिषिद्धसर्व-विशेषत्वाद् ब्रह्मणः;
(We reply) — No, because in the case of Brahman all special characteristics are denied.

4.3.14 L.44  ‘निष्कलं निष्क्रियं शान्तं निरवद्यं निरञ्जनम्’ (SvetU.6.19)
‘अस्थूलमनण्वह्रस्वमदीर्घम्’ (BrhU.3.8.8)
‘सबाह्याभ्यन्तरो ह्यजः’ (MunU.2.1.2)
‘स वा एष महानज आत्माजरोऽमरोऽमृतोऽभयो ब्रह्म’ (BrhU.4.4.25)
‘स एष नेति नेत्यात्मा’ (BrhU.3.9.26) इत्यादिश्रुति-
-स्मृति-न्यायेभ्यः
न देशकालादि-विशेषयोगः परमात्मनि कल्पयितुं शक्यते,

It is not possible to imagine any special relation (to subsist) as between the Highest Self and any such special circumstance as a particular environment or time etc.,
Because of such Scriptural passages as “(Brahman is) without parts, and without activity and it is tranquil, faultless and untainted” (SvetU.6.19),
“Neither gross nor subtle, nor short nor long” (BrhU.3.8.8),
“He who is without and within, and is not liable to be born” (MunU.2.1.2),
“The great unborn Self, ageless, deathless, immortal, fearless, Brahman” (BrhU.4.4.25),
“He that can only be described (negatively) as ‘not so, not so’” (BrhU.3.9.26),
And also as well by Smṛtis and reasoning,

4.3.14 L.45  येन भूप्रदेश-वयोवस्थान्यायेनास्य गन्तव्यता स्यात्;
So that, on the ground of any such relation to particular environment in space or condition, it (the Highest Self) could be said to be something towards which movement is possible.

4.3.14 L.46  भूवयसोस्तु प्रदेशावस्थादि-विशेषयोगाद्
As regards the earth and a person’s age, because of their having a relation to special conditions of environment of space and time respectively,

4.3.14 L.47  उपपद्यते देशकाल-विशिष्टा गन्तव्यता।
The possibility of their being approached by movement towards them as being related to some specific conditions of environment and time, is reasonably sustainable.


4.3.14 L.48  जगदुत्पत्तिस्थितिप्रलयहेतुत्वश्रुतेः अनेकशक्तित्वं ब्रह्मण इति चेत्,
If it be said (by the opponent of Vedānta), that because of the Scriptural declarations, about Brahman being the material cause of the creation, preservation and dissolution of the world, it (the Highest Brahman) possesses manifold powers,


4.3.14 L.49  न, विशेषनिराकरण-श्रुतीनाम् अनन्यार्थत्वात्।
(We reply) — No, because those other Scriptural statements which purport to deny any special attributes to Brahman, cannot have any other interpretation.


4.3.14 L.50  उत्पत्त्यादि-श्रुतीनामपि समानम् अनन्यार्थत्वमिति चेत्,
If it be said (by the opponent of Vedānta) that the Scriptural statements about creation etc. also, cannot have any other interpretation,


4.3.14 L.51  न, तासामेकत्वप्रतिपादन-परत्वात्;
(We reply) — No, because they have the purpose of propounding the oneness (i.e. unity) of Brahman.

4.3.14 L.52  मृदादि-दृष्टान्तैः हि सतो ब्रह्मण एकस्य सत्यत्वं विकारस्य च अनृतत्वं प्रतिपादयत् शास्त्रं
The Śāstra, which by means of the simile about clay etc. purports to propound the oneness of Brahman as the only existing reality, and the unreality of everything that is an effect (as from a cause),

4.3.14 L.53  नोत्पत्त्यादि-परं भवितुमर्हति॥
Does not deserve to have the aim of propounding creation etc.


4.3.14 L.54  कस्मात्पुनरुत्पत्त्यादिश्रुतीनां विशेष-निराकरणश्रुति-शेषत्वम्,
(The opponent of Vedānta says) — But, why again (should it be), that the Scriptural statements about creation etc. should be in a subordinate position to those which aim at denying differences in Brahman,

4.3.14 L.55  न पुनः इतरशेषत्वम् इतरासामिति,
And why should not the latter be in a subordinate position to the former?


4.3.14 L.56  उच्यते – विशेष-निराकरण-श्रुतीनां निराकाङ्क्षार्थत्वात्;
It is replied — Because Scriptural statements which deny any special differences (in Brahman) have the purport of not leaving any further unsatisfied curiosity (Nirākaṅkṣatvāt).

4.3.14 L.57  न हि आत्मन एकत्वनित्यत्व-शुद्धत्वाद्यवगतौ सत्यां भूयः काचिदाकाङ्क्षा उपजायते,
On the realization of the Self as being the only one, eternal and pure entity, no further curiosity ever again arises,

4.3.14 L.58  पुरुषार्थसमाप्ति-बुद्ध्युत्पत्तेः,
Because of the generation of a complete conviction (in a person), that the final aim of man is thus achieved,

4.3.14 L.59  ‘तत्र को मोहः कः शोक एकत्वमनुपश्यतः’ (IsU.7)
‘अभयं वै जनक प्राप्तोऽसि’ (BrhU.4.2.4)
‘विद्वान्न बिभेति कुतश्चन। एतꣳ ह वाव न तपति। किमहꣳ साधु नाकरवम्। किमहं पापमकरवम्’ (TaitU.2.9.1)
इत्यादिश्रुतिभ्यः,

By reason of such Scriptural passages as —
“How can there be any confusion or sorrow, in the case of a person, who realizes the unity (of Brahman)” (IsU.7),
“Oh Janaka, thou hast attained fearlessness” (BrhU.4.2.4),
“One who knows (the bliss of Brahman) is unafraid, and is not tormented (by the doubt) as to whether he has performed a good action or whether he has performed a sinful action” (TaitU.2.9.1).

4.3.14 L.60  तथैव च विदुषां तुष्ट्यनुभवादि-दर्शनात्,
Similarly, because it is also observed that those who have realized Brahman experience contentment (of mind),

4.3.14 L.61  विकारानृताभिसन्ध्यपवादाच्च –
And because the Scriptures have also censured the notion of considering the unreal effect, as being real, thus —

4.3.14 L.62  ‘मृत्योः स मृत्युमाप्नोति य इह नानेव पश्यति’ इति;
“He who sees things as different goes from death to death”.

4.3.14 L.63  अतो न विशेष-निराकरणश्रुतीनाम् अन्यशेषत्वम् अवगन्तुं शक्यम्।
Hence it is not possible to consider the Scriptural statements which deny differences, to be in a subordinate position to the other Scriptural statements.

4.3.14 L.64  नैवमुत्पत्त्यादि-श्रुतीनां निराकाङ्क्षार्थप्रतिपादन-सामर्थ्यमस्ति;
Scriptural statements about creation etc. (of the world) have no such power to propound a meaning which results in allaying any further curiosity,

4.3.14 L.65  प्रत्यक्षं तु तासाम् अन्यार्थत्वं समनुगम्यते;
While it is directly understood that they have a different meaning.

4.3.14 L.66  तथा हि – ‘तत्रैतच्छुङ्गमुत्पतितꣳ सोम्य विजानीहि नेदममूलं भविष्यति’ (ChanU.6.8.3) इत्युपन्यस्य
Even so, after stating the following passage, viz., “Oh mild one, know that this sprout which has thus sprung up, cannot be without its root” (ChanU.6.8.3),

4.3.14 L.67  उदर्के सत एवैकस्य जगन्मूलस्य विज्ञेयत्वं दर्शयति;
The Scriptures later on indicate, how the ‘Sat’ (being) is the one and the only one root of this world, which deserves to be known, thus —

4.3.14 L.68  ‘यतो वा इमानि भूतानि जायन्ते। येन जातानि जीवन्ति। यत्प्रयन्त्यभिसंविशन्ति। तद्विजिज्ञासस्व। तद्ब्रह्म’ (TaitU.3.1.1) इति च;
“That from which these beings are created, that by which they are preserved and that in which they are ultimately absorbed, that you should desire to know. That is Brahman” (TaitU.3.1.1).

4.3.14 L.69  एवमुत्पत्त्यादि-श्रुतीनाम् ऐकात्म्यावगम-परत्वात्
In this way, inasmuch as the Scriptural statements about creation etc. have the purpose of making the oneness (unity) of the Self understood,

4.3.14 L.70  नानेकशक्ति-योगो ब्रह्मणः;
Brahman cannot possibly have a relation with many powers.

4.3.14 L.71  अतश्च गन्तव्यत्वानुपपत्तिः।
Hence, that Brahman is something which can be approached, is not reasonably sustainable.

4.3.14 L.72  ‘न तस्य प्राणा उत्क्रामन्ति’ (BrhU.4.4.6) ‘ब्रह्मैव सन्ब्रह्माप्येति’ इति च
The Scriptural passages — “His Prāṇas do not depart (from the body)”, “Being himself but Brahman, he merges into Brahman” (BrhU.4.4.6)

4.3.14 L.73  परस्मिन्ब्रह्मणि गतिं निवारयति;
Repudiate the notion of any movement towards the Highest Brahman.

4.3.14 L.74  तद्व्याख्यातम् ‘स्पष्टो ह्येकेषाम्’ (BrS.4.2.13) इत्यत्र॥
That has been explained in the Sūtra — “For (the denial of the departure) is clearly made (in the texts) of some (schools)” (BrS.4.2.13).

4.3.14 L.75  गतिकल्पनायां च गन्ता जीवो गन्तव्यस्य ब्रह्मणः अवयवः विकारः
As regards the assumption of a movement (towards Brahman), the Jīva-Self which is supposed to be the one that so approaches, can either be a part of, or an effect of, that which is to be so approached, viz. Brahman,

4.3.14 L.76  अन्यो वा ततः स्यात्,
Or it may be something absolutely different from it,

4.3.14 L.77  अत्यन्त-तादात्म्ये गमनानुपपत्तेः।
Because if (they were to be) totally identical, movement (of the Jīva-Self) would not be reasonably sustainable.


4.3.14 L.78  यद्येवम्, ततः किं स्यात्?
(Says the opponent of Vedānta) — Supposing it is so, so what?


4.3.14 L.79  उच्यते – यद्येकदेशः,
The reply is — If, it (i.e. the Jīva-Self) is a part (of Brahman)

4.3.14 L.80  तेन एकदेशिनो नित्य-प्राप्तत्वात्
Then inasmuch as a part is always in contact with the whole, of which it is such a part,

4.3.14 L.81  न पुनर्ब्रह्मगमनमुपपद्यते;
That a part such as Jīva-Self can approach Brahman cannot be reasonably sustainable.

4.3.14 L.82  एकदेशैकदेशित्व-कल्पना च ब्रह्मण्यनुपपन्ना,
निरवयवत्व-प्रसिद्धेः।

Besides inasmuch as Brahman is well-known as being devoid of any parts,
The assumption that anything (such as the Jīva-Self) can be a part of it, is not reasonably sustainable.

4.3.14 L.83  विकारपक्षेऽप्येतत्तुल्यम्,
As regards the view that it (the Jīva-Self) is an effect of Brahman, also, it would be equally so,

4.3.14 L.84  विकारेणापि विकारिणो नित्य-प्राप्तत्वात्;
Because an effect is always in contact with or present in the cause.

4.3.14 L.85  न हि घटो मृदात्मतां परित्यज्य अवतिष्ठते,
An earthen pot cannot subsist (as such pot) if it were to divest itself (of the nature) of its having the clay as its Self,

4.3.14 L.86  परित्यागे वा अभाव-प्राप्तेः।
And were it to give up (the nature of having such clay as its Self), there would be the predicament of its ceasing to exist altogether.

4.3.14 L.87  विकारावयव-पक्षयोश्च तद्वतः स्थिरत्वात्
As regards both the views about the Jīva-Self being either a part of or an effect of Brahman,

4.3.14 L.88  ब्रह्मणः संसार-गमनमपि अनवकॢप्तम्।
Brahman, of which the Jīva-Self is supposed to be such a part or effect, being itself unchanging,

4.3.14 L.89  व्यापित्वे गमनानुपपत्तिः;
Its entering into a condition of transmigratory existence is not feasible.

4.3.14 L.90  अथ अन्य एव जीवो ब्रह्मणः,
If a Jīva-Self is different from Brahman,

4.3.14 L.91  सोऽणुः व्यापी मध्यम-परिमाणो वा भवितुमर्हति;
It would deserve to be, either an atom (Aṇu) or all-pervading, or of a dimension in-between these two.

4.3.14 L.92  व्यापित्वे गमनानुपपत्तिः;
If all-pervading, any movement on its part would not be reasonably sustainable

4.3.14 L.93  मध्यमपरिमाणत्वे च अनित्यत्व-प्रसङ्गः;
And if of an intermediate dimension, there would be the predicament of its being non-eternal,

4.3.14 L.94  अणुत्वे कृत्स्नशरीर-वेदनानुपपत्तिः;
And if it has the dimension of an atom, perception (Vedanā) over the whole body would not be reasonably sustainable.

4.3.14 L.95  प्रतिषिद्धे च अणुत्वमध्यम-परिमाणत्वे विस्तरेण पुरस्तात्।
Besides, the view about its being either an atom or of an intermediate dimension, has been fully refuted earlier (in BrSEng.2.3.29).

4.3.14 L.96  परस्माच्च अन्यत्वे जीवस्य
If the Jīva-Self is supposed to be different from the transcendent Self,

4.3.14 L.97  ‘तत्त्वमसि’ (ChanU.6.8.7) इत्यादिशास्त्रबाध-प्रसङ्गः।
There would be the predicament of the Śāstra “That thou art” (ChanU.6.8.7) being contradicted.

4.3.14 L.98  विकारावयव-पक्षयोरपि समानोऽयं दोषः।
The same fault would be common to both the views about its being a part or an effect (of Brahman).


4.3.14 L.99  विकारावयवयोः तद्वतोऽनन्यत्वात् अदोष इति चेत्,
If it be said, that inasmuch as such a part or an effect (of Brahman) being non-different from Brahman of which it is such a part or an effect, there would be no such fault,


4.3.14 L.100  न, मुख्यैकत्वानुपपत्तेः।
(We reply) — No, because, in that case, their being the same one entity in the principal sense of the term, is not reasonably sustainable.

4.3.14 L.101  सर्वेषु च एतेषु पक्षेषु अनिर्मोक्ष-प्रसङ्गः,
In the case of all these views, there is the predicament of there being no Final Release (for the Jīva-Self)

4.3.14 L.102  संसार्यात्मत्वानिवृत्तेः;
Because of the non-effacement of the notion of its being the Self in a transmigratory condition,

4.3.14 L.103  निवृत्तौ वा स्वरूपनाश-प्रसङ्गः,
And if there is such effacement, there would be the predicament of its own innate nature perishing,

4.3.14 L.104  ब्रह्मात्मत्वानभ्युपगमाच्च॥
Because it is not understood (by those who hold such a view) that Brahman is the Jīva-Self’s Self.


4.3.14 L.105  यत्तु कैश्चिज्जल्प्यते –
With regard to what is maintained by some people foolishly,

4.3.14 L.106  नित्यानि नैमित्तिकानि च कर्माण्यनुष्ठीयन्ते प्रत्यवायानुत्पत्तये,
Viz., that, inasmuch as, permanently obligatory actions and actions performed on special occasions are performed (by people) so that no sin (on their part) should result,

4.3.14 L.107  काम्यानि प्रतिषिद्धानि च परिह्रियन्ते स्वर्गनरकानवाप्तये,
And actions meant to be performed with some special desire, or actions which are prohibited, are avoided in order that they may neither attain heaven nor hell respectively,

4.3.14 L.108  साम्प्रतदेहोपभोग्यानि च कर्माण्युपभोगेनैव क्षप्यन्ते –
And actions whose results are to be experienced in the present existing body, are duly exhausted by the experiencing of their fruits,

4.3.14 L.109  इत्यतो वर्तमानदेहपातादूर्ध्वं देहान्तरप्रतिसन्धान-कारणाभावात्
Therefore, (in the case of persons so circumstanced), in the absence of there being any cause for their attaining another body after the present body has fallen,

4.3.14 L.110  स्वरूपावस्थान-लक्षणं कैवल्यं
विनापि ब्रह्मात्मतया एवंवृत्तस्य सेत्स्यतीति –

They may well attain complete identification with the Supreme Spirit (Kaivalya) having the characteristic of their Selfs abiding in their own innate nature,
Even without their having acquired the knowledge that Brahman is their Self,


4.3.14 L.111  तदसत्, प्रमाणाभावात्।
(We reply) — This is not correct (Asat), because of the absence of any means-of-proof (for such a view).

4.3.14 L.112  न ह्येतत् शास्त्रेण केनचित्प्रतिपादितम् – मोक्षार्थी इत्थं समाचरेदिति।
No Śāstra has ever propounded, that a person desirous of Final Release should behave in this particular way.

4.3.14 L.113  स्वमनीषया तु एतत्तर्कितम् –
It has been inferred by such people as a result of their own wishful thinking,

4.3.14 L.114  यस्मात्कर्मनिमित्तः संसारः
That inasmuch as transmigratory existence results from actions,

4.3.14 L.115  तस्मान्निमित्ताभावान्न भविष्यतीति।
It would not so result, in the absence of such a cause.

4.3.14 L.116  न च एतत् तर्कयितुं शक्यते,
निमित्ताभावस्य दुर्ज्ञानत्वात्।

Besides, as it is extremely difficult to understand that there is in fact an absence of any such cause,
It is not possible even to infer so.

4.3.14 L.117  बहूनि हि कर्माणि जात्यन्तर-सञ्चितानि इष्टानिष्ट-विपाकानि एकैकस्य जन्तोः सम्भाव्यन्ते।
It is possible that each living being has amassed a store of actions having desirable and undesirable fruits, in its previous birth (Jāty-antara),

4.3.14 L.118  तेषां विरुद्ध-फलानां युगपदुपभोगासम्भवात्
And because of the impossibility of experiencing the fruits of actions having such dissimilar fruits simultaneously,

4.3.14 L.119  कानिचिल्लब्धावसराणि इदं जन्म निर्मिमते,
Some of them which get an opportunity, cause one birth,

4.3.14 L.120  कानिचित्तु देशकालनिमित्तप्रतीक्षाण्यासते –
While some others stand by, and await favourable environment, time and cause,

4.3.14 L.121  इत्यतः तेषामवशिष्टानां साम्प्रतेनोपभोगेन क्षपणासम्भवात्
And as there is no possibility of these remaining actions being exhausted,

4.3.14 L.122  न यथावर्णित-चरितस्यापि वर्तमानदेह-पाते देहान्तर-निमित्ताभावः शक्यते निश्चेतुम्।
It is not possible to determine, even in the case of a person behaving in the manner described (above), that when his present body falls, there positively is an absence of any cause for the attainment of a new body.

4.3.14 L.123  कर्मशेष-सद्भावसिद्धिश्च
The existence of such residuary actions, is proved

4.3.14 L.124  ‘तद्य इह रमणीयचरणाः’ ‘ततः शेषेण’ इत्यादिश्रुतिस्मृतिभ्यः।
By Scriptural and Smṛti passages, such as — “Those whose conduct here has been good etc.” (ChanU.5.10.7) and “Thereafter, by means of the residuary actions”.


4.3.14 L.125  स्यादेतत् – नित्य-नैमित्तिकानि तेषां क्षेपकाणि भविष्यन्तीति –
(Says the opponent of Vedānta) — It may be that permanently obligatory actions and those which have to be performed because of some special cause, may exhaust such residuary actions.


4.3.14 L.126  तत् न, विरोधाभावात्;
(We reply) — No, because of the absence of any incompatibility between them.

4.3.14 L.127  सति हि विरोधे
It is only in the presence of such incompatibility,

4.3.14 L.128  क्षेप्यक्षेपक-भावो भवति;
That there is reciprocity of destroying and being destroyed between them (i.e. one action can exhaust or neutralize another action, and the other action can get itself exhausted or neutralized by the first).

4.3.14 L.129  न च जन्मान्तर-सञ्चितानां सुकृतानां नित्य-नैमित्तिकैरस्ति विरोधः,
Good actions thus stored up in a former birth are however not antagonistic to the permanently obligatory actions or actions performed because of some special cause,

4.3.14 L.130  शुद्धि-रूपत्वाविशेषात्;
Because ‘purity of such actions’ is a factor common to both (these sets of actions).

4.3.14 L.131  दुरितानां तु अशुद्धि-रूपत्वात् सति विरोधे भवतु क्षपणम्;
Sinful actions, inasmuch as they are of an impure nature, when they thus are incompatible may well exhaust actions,

4.3.14 L.132  न तु तावता देहान्तर-निमित्ताभावसिद्धिः,
But even so, they won’t be able to bring about the absence of a cause for the attainment of another body,

4.3.14 L.133  सुकृत-निमित्तत्वोपपत्तेः,
Because, that subsisting good actions do furnish such a cause, is reasonably sustainable.

4.3.14 L.134  दुरितस्याप्यशेष-क्षपणानवगमात्।
Also because it is not possible to determine, that the destruction of all bad actions without leaving any residue (un-destroyed) has taken place.

4.3.14 L.135  न च नित्य-नैमित्तिकानुष्ठानात् प्रत्यवायानुत्पत्तिमात्रम्,
न पुनः फलान्तरोत्पत्तिः इति प्रमाणम् अस्ति,

There is no means-of-proof to determine
That the performance of permanently obligatory actions, and actions which have to be performed because of some special cause, would merely prevent the accruing of sin,
And would not generate some other ancillary fruit,

4.3.14 L.136  फलान्तरस्याप्यनुनिष्पादिनः सम्भवात्;
Because along with it (i.e. the prevention of the accrual of sin) such other fruit may possibly result side by side.

4.3.14 L.137  स्मरति हि आपस्तम्बः – ‘तद्यथा आम्रे फलार्थे निमित्ते छायागन्धावनूत्पद्येते एवं धर्मं चर्यमाणम् अर्था अनूत्पद्यन्ते’ इति।
For the Āpastamba Smṛti says — When a mango tree is planted for its fruit only, its shade and fragrance also become available along with the fruit, similarly, when religious duties are performed, other benefits also can accrue side by side.

4.3.14 L.138  न च असति सम्यग्दर्शने
सर्वात्मना काम्य-प्रतिषिद्ध-वर्जनं जन्मप्रायणान्तराले
केनचित्प्रतिज्ञातुं शक्यम्,

It is not possible for any body, who has not attained true i.e. perfect knowledge, to be able to assert confidently,
That during his whole life between his birth and death, he would avoid performing acts performed with a desire (Kāmya-Karma) and avoid the performance of acts prohibited (Pratiṣiddha),

4.3.14 L.139  सुनिपुणानामपि सूक्ष्मापराध-दर्शनात्;
Because it is observed that even the most clever (persons) are guilty of performing some such venial acts.

4.3.14 L.140  संशयितव्यं तु भवति;
May be, all this can be justifiably doubted,

4.3.14 L.141  तथापि निमित्ताभावस्य दुर्ज्ञानत्वमेव।
Still it certainly is difficult to be sure that no cause (for rebirth) exists.

4.3.14 L.142  न च अनभ्युपगम्यमाने ज्ञानगम्ये ब्रह्मात्मत्वे
Without realizing the unity of the Jīva-Self and the Highest Brahman, which can only be realized by true knowledge,

4.3.14 L.143  कर्तृत्वभोक्तृत्व-स्वभावस्य आत्मनः कैवल्यम् आकाङ्क्षितुं शक्यम्,
It is not possible to expect, that the Jīva-Self, whose nature is to be an agent and an experiencer, can wish for complete identification with the Supreme Spirit,

4.3.14 L.144  अग्न्यौष्ण्यवत् स्वभावस्यापरिहार्यत्वात्।
Because it is impossible (for one) to overcome one’s own nature as (for instance) it is impossible for Agni to overcome its own nature of heat.


4.3.14 L.145  स्यादेतत् –
(The opponent of Vedānta says) — It may perhaps be like this.

4.3.14 L.146  कर्तृत्वभोक्तृत्व-कार्यम् अनर्थः,
The actual effect of a Jīva-Self being in fact an agent and an experiencer (i.e. its being in a transmigratory condition) is something which is detrimental to it,

4.3.14 L.147  न तच्छक्तिः,
But not its potential power of being such an agent or an experiencer,

4.3.14 L.148  तेन शक्त्यवस्थानेऽपि कार्य-परिहारादुपपन्नो मोक्ष इति –
And hence, when the operation of such potential power is avoided by avoiding action, then, even if such potential power exists, Final Release may be reasonably sustainable.


4.3.14 L.149  तच्च न। शक्तिसद्भावे कार्य-्रसवस्य दुर्निवारत्वात्।
(We reply) — That cannot be so, because when such potentiality subsists, it is extremely difficult to avoid such potentiality producing its effect.


4.3.14 L.150  अथापि स्यात् –
(The opponent of Vedānta says again) — It may be this way:

4.3.14 L.151  न केवला शक्तिः कार्यमारभते अनपेक्ष्य अन्यानि निमित्तानि;
Mere potential power, independently of other causes, does not begin to produce its effect,

4.3.14 L.152  अत एकाकिनी सा स्थितापि नापराध्यतीति –
And so, even if such potential power subsists, being isolated, it would not offend in any way.


4.3.14 L.153  तच्च न, निमित्तानामपि शक्ति-लक्षणेन सम्बन्धेन नित्य-सम्बद्धत्वात्।
(We reply) — Even that could not be so, because causes also are in relationship with the Jīva-Self by way of this permanent relation with such potential power.

4.3.14 L.154  तस्मात् कर्तृत्वभोक्तृत्व-स्वभावे सति आत्मनि,
Hence when the Jīva-Self’s nature of being an agent and an experiencer subsists,

4.3.14 L.155  असत्यां विद्यागम्यायां ब्रह्मात्मतायाम्,
And the identity of the Jīva-Self and Brahman which is to be understood through Vidyā, is not so understood,

4.3.14 L.156  न कथञ्चन मोक्षं प्रति आशा अस्ति।
There is not even the least little hope of Final Release.

4.3.14 L.157  श्रुतिश्च – ‘नान्यः पन्था विद्यतेऽयनाय’ (SvetU.3.8) इति
The Scriptures which declare — “There is no other path (to salvation)” (SvetU.3.8),

4.3.14 L.158  ज्ञानादन्यं मोक्षमार्गं वारयति॥
Thus rule out any other path to Final Release than that of perfect knowledge.


4.3.14 L.159  परस्मादनन्यत्वेऽपि जीवस्य सर्वव्यवहारलोप-प्रसङ्गः,
(If the opponent of Vedānta says) that, supposing the Jīva-Self to be non-different from the Highest Self, there would be the predicament of the cessation of all phenomenal activity i.e. practical existence,

4.3.14 L.160  प्रत्यक्षादि-प्रमाणाप्रवृत्तेरिति चेत् –
Because there would be no scope for the operation of such means-of-proof as direct perception etc.,


4.3.14 L.161  न, प्राक्प्रबोधात् स्वप्न-व्यवहारवत् तदुपपत्तेः;
(We reply) — No, because prior to the realization of Brahman, like the transactions in a dream prior to awakening, the continuance (i.e. the operation of the means-of-proof) would be reasonably sustainable.

4.3.14 L.162  शास्त्रं च ‘यत्र हि द्वैतमिव भवति तदितर इतरं पश्यति’ (BrhU.2.4.14, BrhU.4.5.15) इत्यादिना
The Śāstra also, by the passage “For when there is duality as it were then one sees another” (BrhU.2.4.14; BrS.4.5.15) etc.,

4.3.14 L.163  अप्रबुद्धविषये प्रत्यक्षादि-व्यवहारमुक्त्वा,
Having spoken about the operation of such means-of-proof as direct perception etc. in the case of those who have not realized the truth (i.e. Brahman),

4.3.14 L.164  पुनः प्रबुद्धविषये –
‘यत्र त्वस्य सर्वमात्मैवाभूत्तत्केन कं पश्येत्’ (BrhU.2.4.14, BrhU.4.5.15) इत्यादिना
तदभावं दर्शयति।

Again indicates the absence of it (i.e. the operation of such means-of-proof),
In the case of those who have realized such truth (i.e. Brahman),
By the passage “When every thing has, to him, become but the Self only, by what can he see and whom?” (BrhU.2.4.14; BrhU.4.5.15).

4.3.14 L.165  तदेवं परब्रह्म-विदो गन्तव्यादि-विज्ञानस्य वाधितत्वात्
Thus in the case of one who has realized the transcendent Brahman, inasmuch as the notion that Brahman is something which has to be approached is obliterated,

4.3.14 L.166  न कथञ्चन गतिरुपपादयितुं शक्या।
It is not possible in any way to propound any movement (of approach towards Brahman).


4.3.14 L.167  किंविषयाः पुनर्गतिश्रुतय इति,
(The opponent of Vedānta says) — With respect to whom, then, are the Scriptural declarations about such a movement?


4.3.14 L.168  उच्यते – सगुणविद्या-विषया भविष्यन्ति।
It is replied — They may well be, with regard to the Vidyā of qualified Brahman,

4.3.14 L.169  तथा हि – क्वचित्पञ्चाग्निविद्यां प्रकृत्य गतिरुच्यते, क्वचित्पर्यङ्क-विद्याम्,
For even so, is such movement occasionally mentioned, in the Pañcāgni-Vidyā (the Vidyā of the Five Fires), and the Paryaṅka-Vidyā (Vidyā of the Couch of Brahman),

4.3.14 L.170  क्वचिद्वैश्वानर-विद्याम्;
And the Vaiśvā-nara-Vidyā (Vidyā of the Vaiśvā-nara Fire).

4.3.14 L.171  यत्रापि ब्रह्म प्रकृत्य गतिरुच्यते –
Wherever such movement is spoken of even with respect to Brahman,

4.3.14 L.172  यथा ‘प्राणो ब्रह्म कं ब्रह्म खं ब्रह्म’ (ChanU.4.10.5) इति
As in the Scriptural passages “Prāṇa is Brahman, Joy is Brahman, Ākāśa is Brahman” (ChanU.4.10.5),

4.3.14 L.173  ‘अथ यदिदमस्मिन्ब्रह्मपुरे दहरं पुण्डरीकं वेश्म’ (ChanU.8.1.1) इति च,
“Now this lotus-like hall of the mansion in the city of Brahman (i.e. the body) which is there” (ChanU.8.1.1),

4.3.14 L.174  तत्रापि वामनीत्वादिभिः सत्यकामादिभिश्च
Even there, because of the attribute of being Vāmanī (carrier of blessings) and of having true desires,

4.3.14 L.175  गुणैः सगुणस्यैव उपास्यत्वात्
As it is only the qualified Brahman (Sa-guṇa Brahman) that has to be meditated upon,

4.3.14 L.176  सम्भवति गतिः।
Movement (of approach towards such qualified Brahman) is possible.

4.3.14 L.177  न क्वचित्परब्रह्म-विषया गतिः श्राव्यते।
The Scriptures, however, do not ever mention any such movement with respect to the transcendent Brahman,

4.3.14 L.178  तथा गति-प्रतिषेधः श्रावितः – ‘न तस्य प्राणा उत्क्रामन्ति’ (BrhU.4.4.6) इति।
As they have specifically denied it by the passage “His Prāṇas do not depart” (BrhU.4.4.6).

4.3.14 L.179  ‘ब्रह्मविद् आप्नोति परम्’ (TaitU.2.1.1) इत्यादिषु तु,
Even though, in the Scriptural passage “One who has realized Brahman, attains the Highest” (TaitU.2.1.1),

4.3.14 L.180  सत्यपि आप्नोतेर्गत्यर्थत्वे,
The root “to attain” implies a movement,

4.3.14 L.181  वर्णितेन न्यायेन देशान्तरप्राप्त्य-सम्भवात्
It should be understood, that, as described above, inasmuch as there is no possibility of reaching some other region,

4.3.14 L.182  स्वरूपप्रतिपत्तिः एवेयम्
It should be looked upon as meaning, that the attainment (by the Jīva-Self) of its own nature,

4.3.14 L.183  अविद्याध्यारोपित-नामरूप-प्रविलयापेक्षया अभिधीयते –
By way of the dissolution of the names and forms superimposed by Nescience, is spoken of,

4.3.14 L.184  ‘ब्रह्मैव सन्ब्रह्माप्येति’ (BrhU.4.4.6) इत्यादिवत् इति द्रष्टव्यम्।
As in the Scriptural passage “Being but Brahman, he merges into Brahman” (BrhU.4.4.7) etc.

4.3.14 L.185  अपि च पर-विषया गतिर्व्याख्यायमाना प्ररोचनाय वा स्यात्, अनुचिन्तनाय वा;
Even if it is supposed that such movement is mentioned in connection with the transcendent Brahman, it ought to be understood as mentioned either for creating a taste, or for meditation.

4.3.14 L.186  तत्र प्ररोचनं तावत् ब्रह्मविदो न गत्युक्त्या क्रियते,
Now, in the case of one who has realized Brahman no such taste is possibly created by mentioning any such movement,

4.3.14 L.187  स्वसंवेद्येनैव अव्यवहितेन विद्या-समर्पितेन स्वास्थ्येन तत्सिद्धेः;
Because it happens to have been already brought about by the peace (of mind) which is vouchsafed to him by the knowledge (of Brahman), of which he is immediately and not distantly conscious in himself.

4.3.14 L.188  न च नित्य-सिद्धनिःश्रेयस-निवेदनस्य असाध्य-फलस्य विज्ञानस्य
गत्यनुचिन्तने काचिदपेक्षा उपपद्यते;

Nor is it reasonably sustainable, that there can be any necessity of thinking about any such movement (on the part of the Jīva-Self)
With respect to knowledge, which is not something capable of being acquired (as a fruit of some action) and which speaks of the Final Release which is always ready at hand.

4.3.14 L.189  तस्मादपरविषया गतिः।
Therefore this ‘movement’ is only with respect to qualified Brahman (i.e. Sa-guṇa Brahman).

4.3.14 L.190  तत्र परापरब्रह्म-विवेकानवधारणेन
Under these circumstances, because of the inability to grasp the distinction between the Highest Brahman and the qualified Lower Brahman,

4.3.14 L.191  अपरस्मिन्ब्रह्मणि वर्तमाना गति-श्रुतयः परस्मिन्नध्यारोप्यन्ते।
Scriptural statements about movement with respect to qualified Brahman, are superimposed on the transcendent Brahman.


4.3.14 L.192  किं द्वे ब्रह्मणी परमपरं चेति?
(Here, the opponent of Vedānta says) — What? Are there then two kinds of Brahman, the Highest or unqualified Brahman and the Lower or qualified Brahman?


4.3.14 L.193  बाढं द्वे –
(We reply) — Well, of course there are these two kinds of Brahman,

4.3.14 L.194  ‘एतद्वै सत्यकाम परं चापरं च ब्रह्म यदोंकारः’ (PrasU.5.2) इत्यादिदर्शनात्।
Because there is this Scriptural passage, “Oh Satya-kāma, what this syllable ‘Om’ is, is the Highest and the Lower Brahman” (PrasU.5.2).


4.3.14 L.195  किं पुनः परं ब्रह्म किमपरमिति,
What again is the Highest Brahman and what the lower Brahman (asks the opponent of Vedānta)?


4.3.14 L.196  उच्यते –
यत्र अविद्याकृत-नामरूपादि-विशेष-प्रतिषेधात्
अस्थूलादि-शब्दैः ब्रह्मोपदिश्यते,

The reply is —
Wherever there is instruction about Brahman by means of such words as “not gross etc.”,
By denying the distinctions of names and forms brought about by Nescience,

4.3.14 L.197  तत्परम्;
That is the Highest transcendent Brahman.

4.3.14 L.198  तदेव यत्र
नामरूपादि-विशेषेण केनचिद् विशिष्टम् उपासनायोपदिश्यते –
‘मनोमयः प्राणशरीरो भारूपः’ (ChanU.3.14.2) इत्यादिशब्दैः,

Where, as in the Scriptural passage “Which has the structure of the mind, which has Prāṇa as the body, and which has the form (Rūpa) of brightness” (ChanU.3.14.2),
Instruction is given about Brahman as having the distinction of names and forms for the purpose of meditation,

4.3.14 L.199  तदपरम्।
That is the Lower i.e. qualified Brahman.


4.3.14 L.200  ननु एवमद्वितीय-श्रुतिरुपरुध्येत –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta), in this way, the Scriptural declarations about non-duality would be contradicted.


4.3.14 L.201  न, अविद्याकृत-नामरूपोपाधिकतया परिहृतत्वात्।
(We reply) — No, because, it is refuted by the fact that it is affected by the limiting adjuncts such as names and forms which are brought about by Nescience.

4.3.14 L.202  तस्य च अपर-ब्रह्मोपासनस्य
Of the meditation on the Lower Brahman,

4.3.14 L.203  तत्सन्निधौ श्रूयमाणम् ‘स यदि पितृलोककामो भवति’ (ChanU.8.2.1) इत्यादि
जगदैश्वर्य-लक्षणं संसार-गोचरमेव
फलं भवति,

There is the fruit,
As mentioned in the Scriptural passage “If he is desirous of the world of the manes” (ChanU.8.2.1),
Which is characterized by Lordship over the earth, and which is available in this transmigratory existence,

4.3.14 L.204  अनिवर्तितत्वाद् अविद्यायाः;
Because of the ignorance (of one who knows qualified Brahman only) not having been yet removed.

4.3.14 L.205  तस्य च देशविशेषावबद्धत्वात्
As such fruit is confined to a particular environment,

4.3.14 L.206  तत्प्राप्त्यर्थं गमनमविरुद्धम्।
A movement for the attainment of it, is not contradictory.

4.3.14 L.207  सर्वगतत्वेऽपि च आत्मनः,
Even though the Self is all-pervading,

4.3.14 L.208  आकाशस्येव घटादिगमने,
बुद्ध्याद्युपाधिगमने गमन-प्रसिद्धिः

That, like the movement of Ākāśa when a pot moves,
It is well-known that the Jīva-Self is said to depart along with the movement of the limiting adjuncts of intelligence etc.,

4.3.14 L.209  इत्यवादिष्म ‘तद्गुणसारत्वात्’ (BrS.2.3.29) इत्यत्र।
Has been stated by us in the Sūtra) — “On account of its having for its essence the qualities of that” (BrSEng.2.3.29).

4.3.14 L.210  तस्मात् ‘कार्यं बादरिः’ (BrS.4.3.7) इत्येष एव स्थितः पक्षः;
Therefore it should be seen that the view of Bādari in BrS.4.3.7, is the final conclusion (Siddhānta view),

4.3.14 L.211  ‘परं जैमिनिः’ (BrS.4.3.12) इति तु पक्षान्तर-प्रतिभानमात्र-प्रदर्शनं प्रज्ञा-विकासनायेति द्रष्टव्यम्॥१४॥
And the view of Jaimini in BrS.4.3.12 is merely an indication of the Pūrva-Pakṣa view, for the purpose of the development of the intelligence (of the pupil). — 14.

– 183. Kārya-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.3.15 Su..16

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अप्रतीकालम्बनान्नयतीति बादरायण उभयथाऽदोषात्तत्क्रतुश्च॥४.३.१५॥
Apratīkālambanān nayatīti bādarāyaṇa ubhayathā'doṣāt tat-kratuś ca.

A-pratīka-ālambanāt: those who do not have recourse to the symbols for the meditation of Brahman; Nayati: (the superhuman being) leads or takes; Iti Bādarāyaṇaḥ: so says Bādarāyaṇa; Ubhayathā: both ways; A-doṣāt: there being no defects; Tat-kratuh: as is the meditation on that, (so does one become); Ca: and.

🔗 Bādarāyaṇa (is of opinion) that he (the non-human being) conducts these who do not take their resort upon the symbol (of Brahman). No fault arises either way, because, only he who wishes for it (reaches Brahman). — 4.3.15.

4.3.15 L.1  स्थितमेतत् – कार्य-विषया गतिः,
It is firmly established so far, that (the Jīva-Self’s) movement is with respect to Brahma-the-effect (i.e. Sa-guṇa Brahman),

4.3.15 L.2  न पर-विषयेति।
And not with respect to the Highest Brahman.

4.3.15 L.3  इदमिदानीं सन्दिह्यते – किं सर्वान्विकारालम्बनान् अविशेषेणैव अमानवः पुरुषः प्रापयति ब्रह्म-लोकम्,
It is now doubted whether, the non-human being, leads all those who depend upon Brahma-the-effect, without any exception, to the world of Brahman,

4.3.15 L.4  उत कांश्चिदेवेति।
Or some of them only.


4.3.15 L.5  किं तावत्प्राप्तम्?
What then is the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta)?

4.3.15 L.6  सर्वेषामेव एषां विदुषाम् अन्यत्र परस्माद्ब्रह्मणः गतिः स्यात्;
It is, that all those who have acquired the knowledge (of Brahman) move towards Brahma-the-effect, which is different from the Highest Brahman,

4.3.15 L.7  तथा हि ‘अनियमः सर्वासाम्’ (BrS.3.3.31) इत्यत्र अविशेषेणैव एषा विद्यान्तरेष्ववतारितेति।
Because in BrSEng.3.3.31, such movement (towards qualified Brahman) has been stated in the case of all other Vidyās generally.


4.3.15 L.8  एवं प्राप्ते, प्रत्याह –
This being the condition (of the opponent of Vedānta) the Sūtra-kāra replies: —

4.3.15 L.9  अप्रतीकालम्बनानिति;
“Those who do not take their resort upon a symbol”.

4.3.15 L.10  प्रतीकालम्बनान् वर्जयित्वा सर्वानन्यान् विकारालम्बनान् नयति ब्रह्म-लोकम् – इति बादरायण आचार्यो मन्यते;
Bādarāyaṇa Ācārya is of opinion that the non-human being leads all those who take their resort upon Brahma-the-effect, except those who depend on a symbol, to the world of Brahman.

4.3.15 L.11  न हि एवम् उभयथाभावाभ्युपगमे कश्चिद्दोषोऽस्ति,
No fault arises even if it is understood that there are both these ways.

4.3.15 L.12  अनियम-न्यायस्य प्रतीक-व्यतिरिक्तेष्वप्युपासनेषूपपत्तेः।
It is reasonably sustainable to say that the argument about there being no rule, holds good in all meditations, except those on symbols.

4.3.15 L.13  तत्क्रतुश्च अस्य उभयथाभावस्य समर्थको हेतुर्द्रष्टव्यः;
It should be understood that the sentence ‘a man who entertains a desire for Brahman’ furnishes the reason which justifies there being those two ways.

4.3.15 L.14  यो हि ब्रह्मक्रतुः, स ब्राह्ममैश्वर्यम् आसीदेत् – इति श्लिष्यते,
It is but proper (to say) that he who entertains a desire for Brahman reaches Brahmic Lordship,

4.3.15 L.15  ‘तं यथा यथोपासते तदेव भवति’ इति श्रुतेः,
Because of the Scriptural statement — “In whatever way he meditates, even so he becomes”.

4.3.15 L.16  न तु प्रतीकेषु ब्रह्मक्रतुत्वमस्ति,
In the case of a symbol, no desire for Brahman is entertained,

4.3.15 L.17  प्रतीक-प्रधानत्वादुपासनस्य।
Because in such meditations, the symbol is the principal thing.


4.3.15 L.18  ननु, अब्रह्म-क्रतुरपि ब्रह्म गच्छतीति श्रूयते;
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) the Scriptures declare that even those who do not entertain a desire for Brahman do also go towards Brahman,

4.3.15 L.19  यथा पञ्चाग्नि-विद्यायाम् –
As in the passage in the Vidyā of the Five Fires,

4.3.15 L.20  ‘स एनान्ब्रह्म गमयति’ (ChanU.4.15.5) इति –
Viz. “He leads them on to Brahman” (ChanU.4.15.5).


4.3.15 L.21  भवतु, यत्र एवम् आहत्यवाद उपलभ्यते;
(The reply is) — It may be, no such discussion is justified where it is so specifically mentioned,

4.3.15 L.22  तदभावे तु औत्सर्गिकेण
But where there is no mention of any such specific exception,

4.3.15 L.23  तत्क्रतु-न्यायेन ब्रह्म-क्रतूनामेव तत्प्राप्तिः, न इतरेषाम् – इति गम्यते॥१५॥
It is possible to determine, according to the ordinary rule about those who entertain a desire for Brahman, that it is only those who entertain a desire for Brahman that reach it and no others. — 15.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
विशेषं च दर्शयति॥४.३.१६॥
Viśeṣaṃ ca darśayati.

Viseṣam: difference; Ca: and; Darśayati: the scripture declares.

🔗 (The Scriptures) indicate that there is something special (about the fruit). — 4.3.16.

4.3.16 L.1  नामादिषु प्रतीकोपासनेषु
With respect to meditations on symbols (of Brahman) such as Nāman (name) etc.,

4.3.16 L.2  पूर्वस्मात्पूर्वस्मात् फल-विशेषम् उत्तरस्मिन्नुत्तरस्मिन् उपासने दर्शयति –
The Scriptures indicate a specially greater and greater fruit of each succeeding meditation than the one in the case of an earlier meditation,

4.3.16 L.3  ‘यावन्नाम्नो गतं तत्रास्य यथाकामचारो भवति’ (ChanU.7.1.5)
By such passages as “He (who meditates on a Nāman as a symbol of Brahman) is free to go about at his pleasure, as far as the Nāman is capable of going” (ChanU.7.1.5),

4.3.16 L.4  ‘वाग्वाव नाम्नो भूयसी’ (ChanU.7.2.1)
“Speech (Vāk), indeed is greater than a Nāman” (ChanU.7.2.1),

4.3.16 L.5  ‘यावद्वाचो गतं तत्रास्य यथाकामचारो भवति’ (ChanU.7.2.2)
“He is free to go about as far as speech (Vāk) can go” (ChanU.7.2.2),

4.3.16 L.6  ‘मनो वाव वाचो भूयः’ (ChanU.7.3.1) इत्यादिना।
“Mind, indeed is greater than speech” (ChanU.7.3.1) etc.

4.3.16 L.7  स च अयं फल-विशेषः प्रतीक-तन्त्रत्वाद् उपासनानाम् उपपद्यते।
This specially greater and greater nature of the fruit is reasonably sustainable, because meditations depend upon the technique of the symbols.

4.3.16 L.8  ब्रह्म-तन्त्रत्वे तु ब्रह्मणोऽविशिष्टत्वात्
If they were to depend upon Brahman, in as much as Brahman is but one and one only,

4.3.16 L.9  कथं फल-विशेषः स्यात्।
How could there be any speciality (of greater and greater) fruit?

4.3.16 L.10  तस्मात् न प्रतीकालम्बनानाम् इतरैः तुल्यफलत्वमिति॥
Therefore, it is, that meditations which depend upon symbols (of Brahman) have not the same fruit as the other meditations. — 16.

– 184. Apratīka-ālambana-Adhikaraṇam. End of Pāda 4.3

[Go top]

Su.4.4.1 Su..2 Su..3

[Go top]

4.4 L.1  ‘एवमेवैष सम्प्रसादोऽस्माच्छरीरात् समुत्थाय परं ज्योतिरुपसम्पद्य स्वेन रूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यते’ इति श्रूयते।
The Scriptures declare — “It is thus that the serene Jīva-Self (Samprasāda), having thus risen from this body and having attained unity with the Highest light (Jyotis) manifests itself in its own nature” (ChanU.8.12.3).

4.4 L.2  तत्र संशयः –
With regard to this a doubt arises,

4.4 L.3  किं देवलोकाद्युपभोगस्थानेष्विव
आगन्तुकेन केनचिद्विशेषेण अभिनिष्पद्यते,

As to whether it manifests itself in some particular adventitious (Āgantuka) form,
As it does in a place where fruits of actions are experienced, such as the world of the Gods etc.,

4.4 L.4  आहोस्वित् आत्ममात्रेणेति।
Or whether it manifests itself only in its own form as the Self.


4.4 L.5  किं तावत्प्राप्तम्?
What then is the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta)?

4.4 L.6  स्थानान्तरेष्विव आगन्तुकेन केनचिद्रूपेण अभिनिष्पत्तिः स्यात्,
It is, that, may be, such manifestation is in an adventitious form, as in the other places,

4.4 L.7  मोक्षस्यापि फलत्व-प्रसिद्धेः,
Inasmuch as Final Release also is known to be a sort of a fruit,

4.4 L.8  अभिनिष्पद्यत इति च उत्पत्ति-पर्यायत्वात्;
And also because the word ‘to become manifest’ is an alternative (synonym) for the word ‘to be born’.

4.4 L.9  स्वरूपमात्रेण चेदभिनिष्पत्तिः,
Were such manifestation to be but in its own form,

4.4 L.10  पूर्वास्वप्यवस्थासु स्वरूपानपायात् विभाव्येत;
Then it would manifest itself equally so in its earlier conditions also, because the form of an entity never perishes,

4.4 L.11  तस्मात् विशेषेण केनचिदभिनिष्पद्यत इति।
And therefore this manifestation (of the Jīva-Self) must be in some particular adventitious manner.


4.4 L.12  एवं प्राप्ते, ब्रूमः –
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta), 'we reply: —

←PrevNext→
सम्पद्याविर्भावः स्वेनशब्दात्॥४.४.१॥
Sampadyāvirbhāvaḥ svenaśabdāt.

Sampadya: having attained; Āvir-bhāvaḥ: there is manifestation; Svena-śabdāt: from the word ‘own’. (Svena: by one’s own; Śabdāt: inferred from the word.)

🔗 (When the Jīva-Self) has attained (unity with Brahman), there is manifestation of it (in its own form as Ātmā), because of the word ‘Sva’ (one’s own). — 4.4.1.

4.4.1 L.1  केवलेनैव आत्मना आविर्भवति,
It manifests itself in the pure form of its own Self,

4.4.1 L.2  न धर्मान्तरेणेति।
And not in some other adventitious form.

4.4.1 L.3  कुतः? ‘स्वेन रूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यते’ इति स्व-शब्दात्;
Whence is it so? Because of the word ‘Sva’ (one’s own) in the Scriptural statement — “It manifests itself in its own Ātmā form”,

4.4.1 L.4  अन्यथा हि स्व-शब्देन विशेषणम् अनवकॢप्तं स्यात्।
Otherwise, the special qualifying adjective ‘Sva’ (one’s own) would not be appropriate.


4.4.1 L.5  ननु, आत्मीयाभिप्रायः स्व-शब्दो भविष्यति –
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) the word ‘Sva’ may merely convey the meaning of the form of the Self.


4.4.1 L.6  न, तस्यावचनीयत्वात्;
(We reply) — No, because it is not necessary to say so in so many words,

4.4.1 L.7  येनैव हि केनचिद्रूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यते, तस्यैव आत्मीयत्वोपपत्तेः,
Inasmuch as it is reasonably sustainable that whatever particular form any thing manifests itself in, it, all the same, is its own form

4.4.1 L.8  स्वेनेति विशेषणमनर्थकं स्यात्;
And therefore (in that case) the qualifying word ‘Sva’ would be meaningless,

4.4.1 L.9  आत्म-वचनतायां तु अर्थवत् –
But if the word is construed to mean the Self (Ātmā), the qualifying word has a meaning,

4.4.1 L.10  केवलेनैव आत्मरूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यते,
In as much as the Jīva-Self manifests itself purely as its own Ātmā-Self

4.4.1 L.11  न आगन्तुकेनापररूपेणापीति॥१॥
And not in some other adventitious form. — 1.

[Go top]

4.4.2 L.1  कः पुनर्विशेषः
पूर्वास्ववस्थासु, इह च स्वरूपानपाय-साम्ये सतीति

But (says the opponent of Vedānta) this non-liability of the form of a thing to perish both in the former and present condition being common,
What is the difference (between the Jīva-Self’s earlier condition and its later condition) contemplated here?


4.4.2 L.2  अत आह –
The Sūtra-kāra replies: —

←PrevNext→
मुक्तः प्रतिज्ञानात्॥४.४.२॥
Muktaḥ pratijñānāt.

Muktaḥ: the liberated one, released, freed; Pratijñānāt: according to the promise.

🔗 (The Jīva-Self now) attains Final Release, because the Scriptures have made a declaration (to that effect). — 4.4.2.

4.4.2 L.3  योऽत्र अभिनिष्पद्यत इत्युक्तः,
That (Jīva-Self) which is here spoken of, as manifesting itself (in its own Ātmā form),

4.4.2 L.4  स सर्वबन्ध-विनिर्मुक्तः शुद्धेनैव आत्मना अवतिष्ठते;
Is one, that now is released from all bondage, and which subsists as its own pure Self,

4.4.2 L.5  पूर्वत्र तु – ‘अन्धो भवति’ ‘अपि रोदितीव’ ‘विनाशमेवापीतो भवति’ – इति च
अवस्थात्रय-कलुषितेन आत्मना – इत्ययं विशेषः।

The special distinction being, that before, its Ātmā-Self was obscured by the three conditions,
Referred to in the Scriptural passage — “He happens to become blind, he weeps as it were, and is, as it were, destroyed” (ChanU.8.9.10–11, in which Indra points out these defects in the Self as taught him by Prajā-pati).


4.4.2 L.6  कथं पुनरवगम्यते – मुक्तोऽयमिदानीं भवतीति?
(The opponent of Vedānta asks) — How again is it known, that it has now attained Final Release?


4.4.2 L.7  प्रतिज्ञानादित्याह –
(We reply) — Because the Scriptures have so declared.

4.4.2 L.8  तथा हि – ‘एतं त्वेव ते भूयोऽनुव्याख्यास्यामि’ (ChanU.8.9.3, ChanU.8.10.4, ChanU.8.11.3) इति
अवस्थात्रय-दोषविहीनम् आत्मानम् व्याख्येयत्वेन प्रतिज्ञाय,

Because, the Scriptures having declared that the Self which is free from the defect of these three conditions, is the one that has to be explained (to the pupil),
By the passage “I shall explain this same (Self) to you again” (ChanU.8.9.3; ChanU.8.10.4; ChanU.8.11.3),

4.4.2 L.9  ‘अशरीरं वाव सन्तं न प्रियाप्रिये स्पृशतः’ (ChanU.8.12.1) इति च उपन्यस्य,
And having stated further on, that “Neither pleasure nor pain touch that Self which indeed has become disembodied” (ChanU.8.12.1),

4.4.2 L.10  ‘स्वेन रूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यते स उत्तमः पुरुषः’ (ChanU.8.12.3) इति च उपसंहरति;
They ultimately conclude thus — “(It) manifests itself in its own Ātmā form, that is the Highest Puruṣa” (ChanU.8.12.3).

4.4.2 L.11  तथा आख्यायिकोपक्रमेऽपि
Similarly, in the introductory portion of the legend (of Indra and Prajā-pati) also,

4.4.2 L.12  ‘य आत्मापहतपाप्मा’ (ChanU.8.7.1) इत्यादि
मुक्तात्म-विषयमेव प्रतिज्ञानम्।

The declaration is with respect to the Self which has attained Final Release, thus —
“That Self which is free from sin” (ChanU.8.7.1) etc.

4.4.2 L.13  फलत्व-प्रसिद्धिरपि मोक्षस्य बन्ध-निवृत्तिमात्रापेक्षा,
Besides, Final Release which is known to be the fruit, is dependent upon merely the cessation from bondage

4.4.2 L.14  न अपूर्वोपजनापेक्षा।
And not on the accrual of some extraordinary new condition altogether.


4.4.2 L.15  यदपि अभिनिष्पद्यत इत्युत्पत्ति-पर्यायत्वम्,
As regards the argument (of the opponent of Vedānta) that ‘to be manifest’ is synonymous with ‘to be born’,

4.4.2 L.16  तदपि न अपूर्वावस्थापेक्षम् –
That also, is with reference to the earlier condition (of the Jīva-Self),

4.4.2 L.17  यथा रोग-निवृत्तौ अरोगोऽभिनिष्पद्यत इति, तद्वत्।
Even as a person, who, after being cured of his malady, emerges from it (i.e. out of the illness), is a person who now is free from such malady.

4.4.2 L.18  तस्माददोषः॥२॥
Therefore there is no fault. — 2.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
आत्मा प्रकरणात्॥४.४.३॥
Ātmā prakaraṇāt.

Ātmā: the Supreme Self; Prakaraṇāt: on account of the subject matter of the discourse or context.

🔗 Because of the chapter, (by the word Jyotis) the Self is understood here. — 4.4.3.

4.4.3 L.1  कथं पुनर्मुक्त इत्युच्यते,
(The opponent of Vedānta says) how is it said here (i.e. in BrS.4.4.2 above), ‘that (the Jīva-Self) attains Final Release’,

4.4.3 L.2  यावता ‘परं ज्योतिरुपसम्पद्य’ (ChanU.8.12.3) इति
Even though, by the passage “Having attained the Highest Light” (ChanU.8.12.3),

4.4.3 L.3  कार्य-गोचरमेव एनं श्रावयति,
The Scriptures mention the Jīva-Self to have become that, which is perceived to be an effect (from the cause, Brahman),

4.4.3 L.4  ज्योतिः-शब्दस्य भौतिके ज्योतिषि रूढत्वात्?
And inasmuch as the word Light (Jyotis) is by established usage positively understood to mean the physical light (the element created by Brahman)?

4.4.3 L.5  न च अनतिवृत्तो विकारविषयात् कश्चिन्मुक्तो भवितुमर्हति,
Now, one who has not transcended the condition of being an effect, can never deserve to have attained Final Release,

4.4.3 L.6  विकारस्य आर्तत्व-प्रसिद्धेरिति –
Inasmuch as, an effect is well-known to be perishable.


4.4.3 L.7  नैष दोषः,
(We reply) — This is no fault,

4.4.3 L.8  यतः आत्मैवात्र ज्योतिःशब्देन आवेद्यते, प्रकरणात्;
Inasmuch as, the chapter makes it understood that by the word ‘Light’ (Jyotis), the Self (Ātmā) alone is meant,

4.4.3 L.9  ‘य आत्मापहतपाप्मा विजरो विमृत्युः’ (ChanU.8.7.1) इति
And when, in the Scriptural passage ‘This Self which is free from sin, and is ageless and deathless” (ChanU.8.7.1),

4.4.3 L.10  प्रकृते परस्मिन्नात्मनि
The supreme transcendent Self is the relevant entity,

4.4.3 L.11  न अकस्माद्भौतिकं ज्योतिः शक्यं ग्रहीतुम्,
It is not possible to understand the word Jyotis capriciously, as the physical light,

4.4.3 L.12  प्रकृत-हानाप्रकृत-प्रक्रिया-प्रसङ्गात्;
As there would be the predicament of the abandonment of what is relevant (viz. the transcendent Self), and the acceptance of that which is irrelevant (viz. Tejas, an effect).

4.4.3 L.13  ज्योतिःशब्दस्तु आत्मन्यपि दृश्यते –
Besides, the word ‘Light’ (Jyotis) is observed to be used for the Self,

4.4.3 L.14  ‘तद्देवा ज्योतिषां ज्योतिः’ (BrhU.4.4.16) इति।
As in the Scriptural passage “That, the Gods (meditate upon) as the Light of Lights” (BrhU.4.4.16).

4.4.3 L.15  प्रपञ्चितं च एतत् ‘ज्योतिर्दर्शनात्’ (BrS.1.3.40) इत्यत्र॥३॥
This has also been fully elaborated (in BrS.1.3.40). — 3.

– 185. Sampadya-Āvirbhāva-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अविभागेन दृष्टत्वात्॥४.४.४॥
Avibhāgena dṛṣṭatvāt.

Avibhāgena: as inseparable; Dṛṣṭatvāt: for it is so seen from the scriptures.

🔗 (The Jīva-Self in the condition of Final Release) subsists in a condition of non-separateness (from Brahman), because it is so seen (from the Scriptures). — 4.4.4.

4.4.4 L.1  परं ज्योतिरुपसम्पद्य स्वेन रूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यते यः,
When the doubt is, as to whether, the Jīva-Self which attains the highest light, and manifests itself in its own Ātmā form,

4.4.4 L.2  स किं परस्मादात्मनः पृथगेव भवति,
Is separate from the Supreme Self

4.4.4 L.3  उत अविभागेनैवावतिष्ठत इति वीक्षायाम्,
Or subsists in a condition of non-separateness from it,


4.4.4 L.4  ‘स तत्र पर्येति’ (ChanU.8.12.3)
इत्यधिकरणाधिकर्तव्य-निर्देशात्

And when the opponent of Vedānta, because of the Scriptural passage “He moves about in that condition” (ChanU.8.12.3),
Which indicates something in which something else subsists, and something which so subsists in such something,

4.4.4 L.5  ‘ज्योतिरुपसम्पद्य’ (ChanU.8.12.3) इति च
And “Having attained the light” (ChanU.8.12.3),

4.4.4 L.6  कर्तृकर्म-निर्देशात्
Which indicates an agent (Kartṛ) and an object (Karma) (of such agent’s activity),

4.4.4 L.7  भेदेनैवावस्थानमिति यस्य मतिः,
Is of opinion that it continues to subsist separate (from Brahman),


4.4.4 L.8  तं व्युत्पादयति – अविभक्त एव परेण आत्मना मुक्तोऽवतिष्ठते।
(The Sūtra-kāra) explains it (to the opponent of Vedānta) and declares that the Jīva-Self which has attained Final Release, subsists in a condition of non-separateness from the Supreme Self.

4.4.4 L.9  कुतः? दृष्टत्वात्;
Whence is it so? Because, it is so seen (from the Scriptures).

4.4.4 L.10  तथा हि – ‘तत्त्वमसि’ (ChanU.6.8.7), ‘अहं ब्रह्मास्मि’ (BrhU.1.4.10)
For, the Scriptural passages “That thou art” (ChanU.6.8.7), “I am Brahman” (BrhU.1.4.10),

4.4.4 L.11  ‘यत्र नान्यत्पश्यति’ (ChanU.7.24.1)
“Where (he) sees nothing as separate” (ChanU.7.24.1),

4.4.4 L.12  ‘न तु तद्द्वितीयमस्ति ततोऽन्यद्विभक्तं यत्पश्येत्’ (BrhU.4.3.23) इत्येवमादीनि वाक्यानि
“There is nothing which makes itself a second to it, so that it may see something as separate” (BrhU.4.4.23)

4.4.4 L.13  अविभागेनैव परमात्मानं दर्शयन्ति;
Indicate the Supreme Self to be non-separate (from the Jīva-Self).

4.4.4 L.14  यथादर्शनमेव च फलं युक्तम्, तत्क्रतु-न्यायात्;
Now following the reasoning (Nyāya) “Whatever his desire is etc.” (BrS.4.3.15), it is logical that, the fruit is, as is the knowledge.

4.4.4 L.15  ‘यथोदकं शुद्धे शुद्धमासिक्तं तादृगेव भवति। एवं मुनेर्विजानत आत्मा भवति गौतम’ (KathU.2.1.15) इति च एवमादीनि
Also, Scriptural passages such as “Oh Gautama, just as pure water thrown into pure water, becomes one and the same and all-alike, even so, the Self of a sage who knows, becomes” (KathU.2.1.15),

4.4.4 L.16  मुक्तस्वरूप-निरूपण-पराणि वाक्यानि
Which purport to expound the nature of the Jīva-Self which has attained Final Release,

4.4.4 L.17  अन्यविभागमेव दर्शयन्ति;
Indicate the non-separateness (of the Jīva-Self and the Supreme Self).

4.4.4 L.18  नदीसमुद्रादि-निदर्शनानि च।
Similarly, also the illustrations of the river and the sea etc.

4.4.4 L.19  भेद-निर्देशस्तु अभेदेऽप्युपचर्यते
As to the reference to separateness, even when non-separateness is there, it can be described to be so in a figurative sense,

4.4.4 L.20  ‘स भगवः कस्मिन्प्रतिष्ठित इति स्वे महिम्नि’ (ChanU.7.24.1) इति,
As indicated in such Scriptural passages as “Oh Bhagavān, in what does it abide? It abides in its own glory” (ChanU.7.24.1).

4.4.4 L.21  ‘आत्मरतिरात्मक्रीडः’ (ChanU.7.25.2) इति च एवमादि-दर्शनात्॥४॥
It is so seen also in “In love with itself”, “Sporting with one’s own Self” (ChanU.7.25.2). — 4.

– 186. Avibhāgena Dṛṣṭatva-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.4.5 Su..6 Su..7

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
ब्राह्मेण जैमिनिरुपन्यासादिभ्यः॥४.४.५॥
Brāhmeṇa jaiminir upanyāsādibhyaḥ.

Brāhmeṇa: as possessed of the attributes of Brahman; Jaiminiḥ: Jaimini (holds); Upanyāsa-ādibhyaḥ: on account of the reference etc.

🔗 Jaimini (is of opinion) that, because of the statement (Upanyāsa) (in the Scriptures) etc., (the Jīva-Self) manifests itself in the Brahmic form. — 4.4.5.

4.4.5 L.1  स्थितमेतत्
It is now settled that the Jīva-Self,

4.4.5 L.2  ‘स्वेन रूपेण’ (ChanU.8.3.4) इत्यत्र –
According to the Scriptural statement “In its own Atmic nature” (ChanU.8.3.4),

4.4.5 L.3  आत्ममात्र-रूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यते,
Manifests itself only in the form of the Supreme Self

4.4.5 L.4  न आगन्तुकेनापर-रूपेणेति।
And not in any other adventitious lower (Apara) form.

4.4.5 L.5  अधुना तु तद्विशेषबुभुत्सायाम्
Now, when the desire is to know the particular speciality of the form,

4.4.5 L.6  अभिधीयते –
स्वम् अस्य रूपं ब्राह्मम्
अपहतपाप्मत्वादि-सत्यसङ्कल्पत्वावसानं
तथा सर्वज्ञत्वं सर्वेश्वरत्वं च,
तेन स्वरूपेणाभिनिष्पद्यत इति जैमिनिराचार्यो मन्यते।

It is stated (by the Sūtra-kāra)
that Ācārya Jaimini is of opinion that it manifests itself
In its own Brahmic form (comprising of the whole gamut of attributes)
Beginning with the nature of being free from all sin, and ending with the attribute of having true desires,
As also (the attributes) of omniscience and lordship over all.

4.4.5 L.7  कुतः? उपन्यासादिभ्यः तथात्वावगमात्;
Whence is it so? Because, it is so understood from the statements (Upanyāsa) etc. in the Scriptures.

4.4.5 L.8  तथा हि ‘य आत्मापहतपाप्मा’ (ChanU.8.7.1) इत्यादिना
For the statements, beginning with “He who is free from all sin” (ChanU.8.7.1),

4.4.5 L.9  ‘सत्यकामः सत्यसङ्कल्पः’ (ChanU.8.7.1) इत्येवमन्तेन उपन्यासेन
And ending with “Having desires which are true and having true resolutions” (ChanU.8.7.1),

4.4.5 L.10  एवम् आत्मकताम् आत्मनो बोधयति;
Inform us that the Self has the nature of its own Self.

4.4.5 L.11  तथा ‘स तत्र पर्येति जक्षत्क्रीडन्रममाणः’ (ChanU.8.12.3) इति
Again the passage “He moves about there, eating, sporting, and being completely engrossed in enjoying” (ChanU.8.12.3),

4.4.5 L.12  ऐश्वर्यरूपमावेदयति,
Intimates its attribute of lordly power,

4.4.5 L.13  ‘तस्य सर्वेषु लोकेषु कामचारो भवति’ (ChanU.7.25.2) इति च;
As also the passage “He has complete liberty of movement in all the worlds” (ChanU.7.25.2).

4.4.5 L.14  ‘सर्वज्ञः सर्वेश्वरः’ इत्यादिव्यपदेशाश्च
And, it is only in this manner, that the references about it, as being omniscient and the Lord of all,

4.4.5 L.15  एवमुपपन्ना भविष्यन्तीति॥५॥
Become reasonably sustainable. — 5.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
चितितन्मात्रेण तदात्मकत्वादित्यौडुलोमिः॥४.४.६॥
Citi-tanmātreṇa tad-ātmakatvād ity auḍulomiḥ.

Citi-tad-mātreṇa: solely as pure consciousness (Tad-mātreṇa: solely); Tad-ātmakatvāt: that being its true nature or essence; Iti: thus, so; Auḍulomiḥ: Auḍulomi (thinks).

🔗 Auḍulomi (is of opinion) that (the Jīva-Self manifests itself) only as pure sentiency, as that is its Self. — 4.4.6.

4.4.6 L.1  यद्यपि अपहत-पाप्मत्वादयो भेदेनैव धर्मा निर्दिश्यन्ते,
Even though attributes such as those of being free from sin etc. are indicated (by the Scriptures) as being of separate forms,

4.4.6 L.2  तथापि शब्द-विकल्पजा एव एते;
Still they have their origin merely in the imaginary conceptions that arise (in the mind) by words,

4.4.6 L.3  पाप्मादि-निवृत्तिमात्रं हि तत्र गम्यते;
Because, that they merely indicate the absence of sin etc., is understood (from the words),

4.4.6 L.4  चैतन्यमेव तु अस्य आत्मनः स्वरूपमिति तन्मात्रेण स्वरूपेण अभिनिष्पत्तिर्युक्ता;
While, inasmuch as, ‘sentiency’ alone is the nature of this Self, it is but logical that the manifestation (of the Jīva-Self) should be, merely in its own nature of sentiency.

4.4.6 L.5  तथा च श्रुतिः ‘एवं वा अरेऽयमात्मानन्तरोऽबाह्यः कृत्स्नः प्रज्ञानघन एव’ (BrhU.4.5.13)
For even so it is, that the Scriptural statements “Thus, oh (Maitreyī), this Self which has no inside or outside but which is wholly a solid mass of sentiency” (BrhU.4.5.13)

4.4.6 L.6  इत्येवंजातीयका अनुगृहीता भविष्यति;
Happen to be in consonance with the Scriptures.

4.4.6 L.7  सत्यकामत्वादयस्तु यद्यपि वस्तु-स्वरूपेणैव धर्मा उच्यन्ते – सत्याः कामा अस्येति,
Even though such attributes as “Having desires which are true etc.” are spoken of as being the attributes of an entity (dissolving the compound word ‘Satya-kāma’ as ‘he whose desires are true’),

4.4.6 L.8  तथापि उपाधि-सम्बन्धाधीनत्वात् तेषां
Yet, inasmuch as they are dependent upon contact with limiting adjuncts

4.4.6 L.9  न चैतन्यवत् स्वरूपत्व-सम्भवः,
They cannot possibly be, like Sentiency, the Selfs own nature,

4.4.6 L.10  अनेकाकारत्व-प्रतिषेधात्;
Because in the case of Brahman, there is a denial of its having more than one i.e. several aspects.

4.4.6 L.11  प्रतिषिद्धं हि ब्रह्मणोऽनेकाकारत्वम् ‘न स्थानतोऽपि परस्योभयलिङ्गम्’ (BrS.3.2.11) इत्यत्र।
In the case of Brahman, this i.e. its having more than one aspect is denied in BrSEng.3.2.11.

4.4.6 L.12  अत एव च जक्षणादि-सङ्कीर्तनमपि दुःखाभावमात्राभिप्रायं स्तुत्यर्थम्
Hence, the mention about it of eating etc. is meant merely to convey the absence of any misery, for the purpose of glorification,

4.4.6 L.13  ‘आत्मरतिः’ इत्यादिवत्।
As it is, in the attribute of ‘loving its own Self’ (Ātma-ratiḥ) etc.

4.4.6 L.14  न हि मुख्यान्येव रतिक्रीडा-मिथुनानि
आत्मनि शक्यन्ते वर्णयितुम्,

It is not possible to describe Brahman (alone by itself)
As having the attributes of love, sport and love-play, in the principal meaning of the terms,

4.4.6 L.15  द्वितीय-विषयत्वात् तेषाम्।
As they presuppose the existence of two entitles.

4.4.6 L.16  तस्मान्निरस्ताशेष-प्रपञ्चेन प्रसन्नेन अ-व्यपदेश्येन बोधात्मना अभिनिष्पद्यत इत्यौडुलोमिराचार्यो मन्यते॥६॥
Therefore, Ācārya Auḍulomi is of opinion that the Jīva-Self manifests itself in a way in which all phenomenal duality is effaced from it, and that it is serene, and as one having a nature of serene sentiency, which is not possible of being indicated (by any term). — 6.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
एवमप्युपन्यासात्पूर्वभावादविरोधं बादरायणः॥४.४.७॥
Evam apy upanyāsāt pūrva-bhāvād avirodhaṃ bādarāyaṇaḥ.

Evam: thus; Api: even; Upanyāsāt: on account of reference; Pūrva-bhāvāt: owing to attribution of properties mentioned before; A-virodham: there is no contradiction; Bādarāyaṇaḥ: Bādarāyaṇa (thinks).

🔗 Bādarāyaṇa (is of opinion) that even if it he so (i.e. even though the Jīva-Self attains Brahmic form of sentiency only), because of the Scriptural statement (Upanyāsa) (it is understood) that the Jīva-Self still retains its previous attributes also and there is thus no contradiction. — 4.4.7.

4.4.7 L.1  एवमपि पारमार्थिकचैतन्यमात्रस्वरूपाभ्युपगमेऽपि
Even if it is understood that the Jīva-Self has this transcendental attribute of pure sentiency only,

4.4.7 L.2  व्यवहारापेक्षया पूर्वस्यापि उपन्यासादिभ्योऽवगतस्य ब्राह्मस्य ऐश्वर्यरूपस्य अप्रत्याख्यानाद्
अविरोधं बादरायण आचार्यो मन्यते॥७॥

Still, inasmuch as, considering the phenomenal point of view, it is not denied that the Jīva-Self still retains its previous attribute of possessing Lordly powers also, as understood from the Scriptures,
Ācārya Bādarāyaṇa is of opinion that there is no contradiction. — 7.

– 187. Brāhma-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.4.8 Su..9

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
सङ्कल्पादेव तु तच्छ्रुतेः॥४.४.८॥
Saṅkalpād eva tu tac-chruteḥ.

Saṅkalpāt: by the exercise of will; Eva: only; Tu: but; Tat-śruteḥ: because Śruti says so.

🔗 But, a person who has attained Final Release, (attains his desires) merely by his volition, because the Scriptures have stated so. — 4.4.8.

4.4.8 L.1  हार्दविद्यायां श्रूयते –
The Scriptures have stated in the Vidyā of the Hṛdaya, thus —

4.4.8 L.2  ‘स यदि पितृलोककामो भवति सङ्कल्पादेवास्य पितरः समुत्तिष्ठन्ति’ (ChanU.8.2.1) इत्यादि।
“If he is desirous of the world of the manes, then by his mere volition alone, his manes appear before him” (ChanU.8.2.1) etc.

4.4.8 L.3  तत्र संशयः – किं सङ्कल्प एव केवलः पित्रादि-समुत्थाने हेतुः,
With regard to that the doubt is, whether mere volition itself is the only cause by which the manes etc. so appear (before him)

4.4.8 L.4  उत निमित्तान्त-रसहित इति।
Or whether it has any other means combined with it.


4.4.8 L.5  तत्र सत्यपि ‘सङ्कल्पादेव’ इति श्रवणे
(The opponent of Vedānta says) even though the Scriptures mention mere volition alone (as the cause),

4.4.8 L.6  लोकवत् निमित्तान्तरापेक्षता युक्ता;
Still, as is observed in the ordinary world, it is logical, that there is need of other means also.

4.4.8 L.7  यथा लोके अस्मदादीनां सङ्कल्पात् गमनादिभ्यश्च हेतुभ्यः पित्रादि-सम्पत्तिर्भवति
Just as in the ordinary world, a man, like myself (for instance), meets his father etc. by a volition coupled with other means, such as approaching his father,

4.4.8 L.8  एवं मुक्तस्यापि स्यात्;
Even so, it may similarly be in the case of a person who has attained Final Release.

4.4.8 L.9  एवं दृष्ट-विपरीतं न कल्पितं भविष्यति;
It is only in this way that, nothing contrary to what is usually observed, will have been imagined.

4.4.8 L.10  ‘सङ्कल्पादेव’ इति तु राज्ञ इव सङ्कल्पितार्थ-सिद्धिकरीं साधनान्तर-सामग्रीं सुलभामपेक्ष्य उच्यते;
The expression ‘merely by his volition’ is used by taking it for granted, that as in the case of a king, the other equipment of means, by which the desired object is attained, is easy to obtain.

4.4.8 L.11  न च सङ्कल्पमात्र-समुत्थानाः पित्रादयः
मनोरथ-विजृम्भितवत् चञ्चलत्वात्
पुष्कलं भोगं समर्पयितुं पर्याप्ताः स्युरिति।

Because, were the manes to appear (before the person who has attained Final Release) as a result of mere volition alone,
Because of their being of as unstable a nature as the display of mere volition,
They would not be capable of affording much enjoyment.


4.4.8 L.12  एवं प्राप्ते, ब्रूमः –
This being the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta) we reply: The manes would of course appear (before the person who has attained Final Release) merely as a result of his volition alone.

4.4.8 L.13  कुतः? तच्छ्रुतेः;
Whence is it so? Because of the Scriptural statement about it.

4.4.8 L.14  ‘सङ्कल्पादेवास्य पितरः समुत्तिष्ठन्ति’ (ChanU.8.2.1) इत्यादिका हि श्रुतिः
The Scriptural passage “His manes appear merely through his volition alone” (ChanU.8.2.1) etc.

4.4.8 L.15  निमित्तान्तरापेक्षायां पीड्येत;
Would be contradicted, if it is understood that other means also are necessary (for that purpose).

4.4.8 L.16  निमित्तान्तरमपि तु यदि सङ्कल्पानुविधाय्येव स्यात्, भवतु;
If the other means also happen to be available by volition, may it well be so,

4.4.8 L.17  न तु प्रयत्नान्तर-सम्पाद्यं निमित्तान्तरमिष्यते,
But such means can never be understood to have been brought about by a separate effort of volition,

4.4.8 L.18  प्राक्सम्पत्तेः वन्ध्य-सङ्कल्पत्व-प्रसङ्गात्;
As, otherwise before such other means become available, there would be the predicament of mere volition alone being rendered unfruitful.

4.4.8 L.19  न च श्रुत्यवगम्येऽर्थे लोकवदिति सामान्यतो दृष्टं क्रमते;
It is not possible to apply (the test of) what is ordinarily seen in the world, to things which can only be understood from the Scriptures.

4.4.8 L.20  सङ्कल्प-बलादेव च एषां यावत्प्रयोजनं स्थैर्योपपत्तिः,
प्राकृत-सङ्कल्प-विलक्षणत्वान्मुक्त-सङ्कल्पस्य॥८॥

Inasmuch as the volition of a person who has attained Final Release, is different by nature, to the volition of the people in the ordinary world,
It is through mere volition alone, that their (i.e. of manes etc.) being steady by nature till the attainment of the result desired, is understandable. — 8.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अत एव चानन्याधिपतिः॥४.४.९॥
Ata eva cānanyādhipatiḥ.

Ataḥ eva: for the very reason, therefore, so; Ca: and; An-anya-adhipatiḥ: without any other Lord.

🔗 It is just because of this (i.e. that a person has attained Final Release) that he has no other Lord (to lord it over him). — 4.4.9.

4.4.9 L.1  अत एव च अवन्ध्य-सङ्कल्पत्वात् अनन्याधिपतिः विद्वान् भवति –
It is precisely because of this, i.e. because the volitions of a person who has attained Final Release are not unfructuous,

4.4.9 L.2  नास्यान्योऽधिपतिः भवतीत्यर्थः।
That he has no other Lord to lord it over him. The meaning is, that there is no one else who is his Lord.

4.4.9 L.3  न हि प्राकृतोऽपि सङ्कल्पयन् अन्य-स्वामिकत्वमात्मनः सत्यां गतौ सङ्कल्पयति।
Even an ordinary man, when he forms any resolution, does not, if he can help it, care to be dominated by another.

4.4.9 L.4  श्रुतिश्चैतद्दर्शयति –
‘अथ य इहात्मानमनुविद्य व्रजन्त्येताꣳश्च सत्यान्कामाꣳस्तेषाꣳ सर्वेषु लोकेषु कामचारो भवति’ (ChanU.8.1.6) इति॥९॥

The Scriptural passage “Now, those who depart (from this world), after having realized the Self, and having desires which are true i.e. sure of fulfilment, can move about the worlds with perfect freedom” (ChanU.8.1.6)
Also indicates the same thing. — 9.

– 188. Saṅkalpa-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.4.10 Su..11 Su..12 Su..13 Su..14

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
अभावं बादरिराह ह्येवम्॥४.४.१०॥
Abhāvaṃ bādarir āha hy evam.

A-bhāvam: absence (of body and organs); Bādariḥ: the sage Bādari (asserts); Āha: (the Śruti) says; Hi: because; Evam: thus.

🔗 Bādari (is of opinion) that there is absence (of a body and sense-organs of a Jīva-Self, which has attained Final Release), the Scriptures also have declared similarly. — 4.4.10.

4.4.10 L.1  ‘सङ्कल्पादेवास्य पितरः समुत्तिष्ठन्ति’ (ChanU.8.2.1) इत्यतः श्रुतेः
Because of the Scriptural statement “By mere volition alone his manes appear (before him)” (ChanU.8.2.1) etc.,

4.4.10 L.2  मनः तावत् सङ्कल्प-साधनं सिद्धम्।
The existence of the mind at least, as a means of volition, is proved.

4.4.10 L.3  शरीरेन्द्रियाणि पुनः प्राप्तैश्वर्यस्य विदुषः सन्ति, न वा सन्ति – इति समीक्ष्यते।
It is now being considered whether a person who has attained Final Release and has acquired lordly power, possesses a body and sense-organs.


4.4.10 L.4  तत्र बादरिस्तावदाचार्यः शरीरस्येन्द्रियाणां च अभावं महीयमानस्य विदुषो मन्यते।
With regard to that Ācārya Bādari is of opinion, that in the case of a man who has attained such advancement, there is absence of a body and sense-organs.

4.4.10 L.5  कस्मात्? एवं हि आह आम्नायः –
Whence is it so? Because of the Scriptural statement —

4.4.10 L.6  ‘मनसैतान्कामान्पश्यन्रमते’ (ChanU.8.12.5) ‘य एते ब्रह्मलोके’ (ChanU.8.13.1) इति;
“By visualising the desires of this world of Brahman with the mind alone, he becomes engrossed (in them)” (ChanU.8.12.5).

4.4.10 L.7  यदि मनसा शरीरेन्द्रियैश्च विहरेत,
Were he to be so engrossed while possessing a body and sense-organs also, in addition to a mind,

4.4.10 L.8  मनसेति विशेषणं न स्यात्;
There could not have been the specific particular mention (in the Scriptures) of the mind alone.

4.4.10 L.9  तस्मादभावः शरीरेन्द्रियाणां मोक्षे॥१०॥
Therefore, during the condition of Final Release there is absence of a body and sense-organs. — 10.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
भावं जैमिनिर्विकल्पामननात्॥४.४.११॥
Bhāvaṃ jaiminir vikalpāmananāt.

Bhāvam: existence; Jaiminiḥ: Jaimini (holds); Vikalpa-āmananāt: because the scripture declares (the capacity to assume) divine forms. (Vikalpa: option, diversity in manifestation; Āmananāt: from statement in Śruti.)

🔗 Jaimini (is of opinion) that body and sense-organs do exist for him, because the Scriptures speak of an option (about them). — 4.4.11.

4.4.11 L.1  जैमिनिस्त्वाचार्यः मनोवत् शरीरस्यापि सेन्द्रियस्य भावं मुक्तं प्रति मन्यते;
Ācārya Jaimini is of opinion that a person who has attained Final Release does possess a body together with the sense-organs quite as surely as the mind,

4.4.11 L.2  यतः ‘स एकधा भवति त्रिधा भवति’ (ChanU.7.26.2) इत्यादिना
Inasmuch as by the Scriptural passage “He becomes onefold, he becomes three-fold etc.” (ChanU.7.26.2)

4.4.11 L.3  अनेकधाभाव-विकल्पम् आमनन्ति।
The option of being manifold is mentioned,

4.4.11 L.4  न हि अनेकविधता विना शरीर-भेदेन आञ्जसी स्यात्।
And in the absence of different bodies, such manifoldness cannot be feasible.

4.4.11 L.5  यद्यपि निर्गुणायां भूम-विद्यायाम् अयमनेकधाभाव-विकल्पः पठ्यते,
Even though, this option of becoming manifold is mentioned in the Vidyā of the Bhūmā (the great one) referring to the unqualified Brahman,

4.4.11 L.6  तथापि विद्यमानमेवेदं सगुणावस्थायाम् ऐश्वर्यं भूमविद्या-स्तुतये सङ्कीर्त्यत इति
Still this lordly power which exists in the condition of qualified Brahman, is referred to for the purpose of the glorification of the Vidyā of the Bhūmā,

4.4.11 L.7  अतः सगुणविद्या-फलभावेन उपतिष्ठत इत्युच्यते॥११॥
And hence, there, it must be understood as being the fruit of the Vidyā of qualified Brahman. It is said (here, by the Sūtra-kāra). — 11.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
द्वादशाहवदुभयविधं बादरायणोऽतः॥४.४.१२॥
Dvā-daśāhavad ubhaya-vidhaṃ bādarāyaṇo'taḥ.

Dvā-daśa-ahavat: like the twelve days’ sacrifice; Ubhaya-vidham: (is) of both kinds; Bādarāyaṇaḥ: Bādarāyaṇa (thinks); Ataḥ: so, therefore, from this, from this very reason.

🔗 Bādarāyaṇa is of opinion that (the finally released Jīva-Self) has both the characteristics. It is like (for instance) the “Dvā-daśa-aha” (Twelve-day Sacrifice). — 4.4.12.

4.4.12 L.1  बादरायणः पुनराचार्यः अत एव उभय-लिङ्गश्रुतिदर्शनात् उभयविधत्वं साधु मन्यते –
Ācārya Bādarāyaṇa again considers this two-fold condition to be proper, because, it is seen that there are indicatory marks of both the kinds,

4.4.12 L.2  यदा सशरीरतां सङ्कल्पयति तदा सशरीरो भवति, यदा तु अशरीरतां तदा अशरीर इति;
Viz., that he becomes embodied or disembodied, just as he desires to have such a body or desires to be without such a body,

4.4.12 L.3  सत्य-सङ्कल्पत्वात्, सङ्कल्प-वैचित्र्याच्च।
Because his determinate desires are true and because of the variety of his volition.

4.4.12 L.4  द्वादशाहवत् – यथा द्वादशाहः सत्रम् अहीनश्च भवति,
This is like the Twelve-day Sacrifice (Dvā-daśa-aha) which is both a ‘Satra’ and an ‘Ahīna’,

4.4.12 L.5  उभयलिङ्गश्रुति-दर्शनात् –
Because the indicatory marks are of both the kinds (viz. the verbs ‘Upayanti’ (used in a Satra) and ‘Yajayet’ (used in an Ahīna) are used, which indicate it to be both a Satra and an Ahīna).

4.4.12 L.6  एवमिदमपीति॥१२॥
It is so in this case also. — 12.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
तन्वभावे सन्ध्यवदुपपत्तेः॥४.४.१३॥
Tanv-abhāve sandhyavad upapatteḥ.

Tanu-a-bhāve: in the absence of a body; Sandhyavad: just as in dreams (which stand midway between waking and deep sleep); Upapatteḥ: this being reasonable.

🔗 In the absence of a body, it becomes reasonably sustainable, as (it is) in a dream-condition. — 4.4.13.

4.4.13 L.1  यदा तनोः सेन्द्रियस्य शरीरस्य अभावः
When there is absence of a body and sense-organs,

4.4.13 L.2  तदा, यथा सन्ध्ये स्थाने शरीरेन्द्रिय-विषयेष्वविद्यमानेष्वपि उपलब्धिमात्रा एव पित्रादि-कामा भवन्ति,
Then as in a dream-condition a body and sense-organs do not exist, and objects of desire, such as the manes etc., are only of the nature of a mere perception (and hence merely unsubstantial),

4.4.13 L.3  एवं मोक्षेऽपि स्युः; एवं हि एतदुपपद्यते॥१३॥
Even so, during the condition of Final Release also, it is reasonably sustainable, only in that way. — 13.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
भावे जाग्रद्वत्॥४.४.१४॥
Bhāve jāgradvat.

Bhāve: when the body exists; Jāgradvat: just as in the waking state.

🔗 When the finally released Jīva-Self, is in an embodied condition, it is, as it is, in a waking condition. — 4.4.14.

4.4.14 L.1  भावे पुनः तनोः, यथा जागरिते विद्यमाना एव पित्रादिकामा भवन्ति,
When a body does exist, as for instance in the waking condition, a father or such other entities are actually in existence (and are not mere perceptions only)

4.4.14 L.2  एवं मुक्तस्याप्युपपद्यते॥१४॥
Even so it is during the condition of Final Release, when a body still exists. — 14.

– 189. Abhāva-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.4.15 Su..16

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
प्रदीपवदावेशस्तथा हि दर्शयति॥४.४.१५॥
Pradīpavad āveśas tathā hi darśayati.

Pradīpavat: like the flame of a lamp; Āveśaḥ: entering, animating; Tathā: thus, so; Hi: because; Darśayati: the scripture shows (or declares).

🔗 The entering (Āveśa) (of the Jīva-Self that has attained Final Release, into several bodies) is like a lamp, because the Scriptures indicate it to be so. — 4.4.15.

4.4.15 L.1  ‘भावं जैमिनिर्विकल्पामननात्’ (BrS.4.4.11) इत्यत्र
In BrS.4.4.11 — “Jaimini (is of opinion) that body and sense-organs do exist, because the Scriptures mention an option (about them)” —

4.4.15 L.2  सशरीरत्वं मुक्तस्योक्तम्;
It has been stated, that a person who has attained Final Release does possess a body.

4.4.15 L.3  तत्र त्रिधा-भावादिषु अनेक-शरीरसर्गे
So, it has to be seen here, whether, with respect to his becoming three-fold etc., when many different bodies are created,

4.4.15 L.4  किं निरात्मकानि शरीराणि दारु-यन्त्रवत् सृज्यन्ते,
The bodies so created are as if they are mere wooden figures devoid of the Self,

4.4.15 L.5  किं वा सात्मकानि अस्मदादि-शरीरवत् – इति भवति वीक्षा।
Or whether they are created like our bodies along with the Jīva-Self,


4.4.15 L.6  तत्र च आत्म-मनसोः भेदानुपपत्तेः
एकेन शरीरेण योगात्
इतराणि शरीराणि निरात्मकानि –
इत्येवं प्राप्ते,

(And when the conclusion of the opponent of Vedānta is) that,
Inasmuch as any division of the Self and the mind is not reasonably sustainable,
And as they have already a connection with one body,
The other bodies are (necessarily) without the Self,


4.4.15 L.7  प्रतिपद्यते – प्रदीपवद् आवेश इति;
We reply — “The entering into (Āveśa), is like the lamp”, just as a lamp,

4.4.15 L.8  यथा प्रदीप एकः अनेकप्रदीप-भावम् आपद्यते,
One as it is, becomes many (lamps)

4.4.15 L.9  विकारशक्ति-योगात्,
On account of its possessing the power to modify itself into an effect.

4.4.15 L.10  एवमेकोऽपि सन् विद्वान्
In this way, a man that has attained knowledge, single as he is,

4.4.15 L.11  ऐश्वर्ययोगाद् अनेकभावम् आपद्य
Having attained the condition of being many, by means of his lordly power,

4.4.15 L.12  सर्वाणि शरीराण्याविशति।
Enters into all the bodies.

4.4.15 L.13  कुतः? तथा हि दर्शयति शास्त्मम् एकस्यानेकभावम् –
Whence is it so? Because the Śāstra indicates that one becomes many, by the Scriptural passage —

4.4.15 L.14  ‘स एकधा भवति त्रिधा भवति पञ्चधा सप्तधा नवधा’ (ChanU.7.26.2) इत्यादि;
“He becomes one-fold, three-fold, five-fold, seven-fold, and ninefold etc.” (ChanU.7.26.2).

4.4.15 L.15  नैतद् दारुयन्त्रोपमाभ्युपगमेऽवकल्पते,
This cannot be imagined to be so, if the simile of the wooden figures is accepted,

4.4.15 L.16  नापि जीवान्तरावेशे;
Or if this entering into all the bodies, is by some other Jīva-Selfs.

4.4.15 L.17  न च निरात्मकानां शरीराणां प्रवृत्तिः सम्भवति।
Nor is any movement on the part of bodies devoid of Selfs, possible.


4.4.15 L.18  यत्तु आत्म-मनसोः भेदानुपपत्तेः
With regard to the objection (of the opponent of Vedānta) that, inasmuch as any division of the Self or the mind is not reasonably sustainable,

4.4.15 L.19  अनेकशरीर-योगासम्भव इति –
There is no possibility of the Jīva-Self having several separate bodies,


4.4.15 L.20  नैष दोषः;
(We reply) — This is no fault,

4.4.15 L.21  एकमनोनुवर्तीनि समनस्कान्येवापराणि शरीराणि सत्य-सङ्कल्पत्वात् स्रक्ष्यति;
Inasmuch as the desires of a man who has attained knowledge are true, and he can very well create bodies equipped with minds which would follow the lead of one mind.

4.4.15 L.22  सृष्टेषु च तेषु उपाधिभेदात्
And when they are so created, because of the differences in the limiting adjuncts (in the form of bodies),

4.4.15 L.23  आत्मनोऽपि भेदेनाधिष्ठातृत्वं योक्ष्यते;
The Selfs also will be different (from each other), and would be able to preside over the different bodies.

4.4.15 L.24  एषैव च योगशास्त्रेषु योगिनाम् अनेकशरीरयोग-प्रक्रिया॥१५॥
The Yoga-Śāstra also speaks of the use of the same technique with regard to the Yogins having simultaneous connection with several bodies. — 15.

[Go top]

4.4.16 L.1  कथं पुनः मुक्तस्य अनेकशरीरावेशादि-लक्षणम् ऐश्वर्यम् अभ्युपगम्यते,
(The opponent of Vedānta says) — How again is it understood that a person that has attained Final Release, can have the lordly power of entering into several different bodies,

4.4.16 L.2  यावता ‘तत्केन कं विजानीयात्’ (BrhU.4.5.15)
When Scriptural passages, such as — “Whereby and whom would one see” (BrhU.4.5.15),

4.4.16 L.3  ‘न तु तद्द्वितीयमस्ति ततोऽन्यद्विभक्तं यद्विजानीयात्’ (BrhU.4.3.30)
“There is nothing, however, that is other than himself, so that he can know of something which is separate from him” (BrhU.4.3.30),

4.4.16 L.4  ‘सलिल एको द्रष्टाऽद्वैतो भवति’ (BrhU.4.3.32) इति च एवंजातीयका श्रुतिः
“He then is (clear) like water, is the only one that is a seer and is without a second” (BrhU.4.3.32),

4.4.16 L.5  विशेषविज्ञानं वारयति –
Deny any special knowledge?


4.4.16 L.6  इत्यत उत्तरं पठति –
Hence the reply is given, thus:

←PrevNext→
स्वाप्ययसम्पत्त्योरन्यतरापेक्षमाविष्कृतं हि॥४.४.१६॥
Svāpyaya-sampattyor anyatarāpekṣam āviṣ-kṛtaṃ hi.

Sva-apyaya-sampattyoḥ: of deep sleep and absolute union (with Brahman); Anyatara-apekṣam: having in view either of these two; Āviṣ-kṛtam: this is made clear (by the Śruti); Hi: because. (Sv-apyaya: deep sleep (entering into oneself); Anyatara: either, any of the two; Apekṣam: with reference to, with regard to.)

🔗 (That the Jīva-Self that has attained Final Release has no special cognition, is spoken of by the Scriptures) with reference to either complete merger or the attainment of unity, because it is so made clear. — 4.4.16.

4.4.16 L.7  स्वाप्ययः सुषुप्तम्,
By complete merger, deep sleep is meant,

4.4.16 L.8  ‘स्वमपीतो भवति तस्मादेनꣳ स्वपितीत्याचक्षते’ (ChanU.6.8.1) इति श्रुतेः;
Because the Scriptural passage says — “He becomes merged into himself, therefore, it is said that he sleeps” (ChanU.6.8.1).

4.4.16 L.9  सम्पत्तिः कैवल्यम्,
Attainment (of unity) means a pure isolated condition (Kaivalya),

4.4.16 L.10  ‘ब्रह्मैव सन्ब्रह्माप्येति’ (BrhU.4.4.6) इति श्रुतेः;
Because of the Scriptural passage — “Himself being Brahman in fact, he becomes merged in Brahman” (BrhU.4.4.6).

4.4.16 L.11  तयोः अन्यतराम् अवस्थाम् अपेक्ष्य
It is with reference to one of these two conditions

4.4.16 L.12  एतत् विशेष-संज्ञाऽभाव-वचनम् –
That the Scriptures speak of the condition of the absence of any special cognition.

4.4.16 L.13  क्वचित् सुषुप्तावस्थाम् अपेक्ष्योच्यते,
Sometimes it is spoken of with reference to the condition of deep sleep,

4.4.16 L.14  क्वचित्कैवल्यावस्थाम्।
And sometimes with reference to the pure isolated condition.

4.4.16 L.15  कथमवगम्यते?
Whence is it so understood?

4.4.16 L.16  यतस्तत्रैव एतदधिकारवशात् आविष्कृतम् –
Because wherever this absence of special cognition is referred to, the chapter deals with either of these two conditions,

4.4.16 L.17  ‘एतेभ्यो भूतेभ्यः समुत्थाय तान्येवानु विनश्यति न प्रेत्य संज्ञास्तीति’ (BrhU.2.4.14)
As in the Scriptural passages — “Having emanated from the elements, it perishes after them, having departed (i.e. having died) there is no further cognition” (BrhU.2.4.14),

4.4.16 L.18  ‘यत्र त्वस्य सर्वमात्मैवाभूत्’ (BrhU.2.4.14)
“Where every thing has become but the Self only” (BrhU.2.4.14),

4.4.16 L.19  ‘यत्र सुप्तो न कञ्चन कामं कामयते न कञ्चन स्वप्नं पश्यति’ (BrhU.4.3.19), (ManU.5) इत्यादिश्रुतिभ्यः।
“Where being in deep sleep he does not desire any thing and sees no dreams” (BrhU.4.3.19, (ManU.5).

4.4.16 L.20  सगुणविद्या-विपाकस्थानं तु एतत् स्वर्गादिवत् अवस्थान्तरम्,
यत्रैतदैश्वर्यमुपवर्ण्यते।

Where however this lordly power is spoken of,
It is with reference to a different condition, similar to the condition of the heavenly world etc., where the Vidyā of the qualified Brahman ripens into fruition.
[Such that we hear of gods like Indra and Vāyu, and the other lesser deities, functionaries, and Siddhas, who are all exalted Jīvas, not yet liberated and thus within Saṃsāra - ED]

4.4.16 L.21  तस्माददोषः॥१६॥
Therefore, there is no fault. — 16.

– 190. Pradīpa-Adhikaraṇam.

[Go top]

Su.4.4.17 Su..18 Su..19 Su..20 Su..21 Su..22

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
जगद्व्यापारवर्जं प्रकरणादसन्निहितत्वाच्च॥४.४.१७॥
Jagad-vyāpāra-varjaṃ prakaraṇād asannihitatvāc ca.

Jagad-vyāpāra-varjam: except the power of creation, etc., Prakaraṇāt: (on account of the Lord being) the subject matter, because of the general topic of the chapter; A-sannihitattvāt: on account of (liberated souls) not being mentioned on account of non-proximity; Ca: and. (Jagat: world; Vyāpāra: creation etc.; Varjam: excepted.)

🔗 (Those who have attained Final Release possess all the lordly powers) barring the operation of running this world, (is understood) from the chapter (having the Lord as the relevant subject) and also because of the absence of proximity (of the person finally released). — 4.4.17.

4.4.17 L.1  ये सगुण-ब्रह्मोपासनात् सहैव मनसा ईश्वर-सायुज्यं व्रजन्ति,
Now, with regard to those, who, through meditation on qualified Brahman, attain unity with the Lord, along with the mind,

4.4.17 L.2  किं तेषां निरवग्रहमैश्वर्यं भवति, आहोस्वित् सावग्रहमिति संशयः।
The doubt arises, whether they have unlimited power or have only a limited power.


4.4.17 L.3  किं तावत्प्राप्तम्?
What then is the conclusion (of the opponent of Vedānta)?

4.4.17 L.4  निरङ्कुशमेव एषामैश्वर्यं भवितुमर्हति,
‘आप्नोति स्वाराज्यम्’ (TaitU.1.6.2)
‘सर्वेऽस्मै देवा बलिमावहन्ति’ (TaitU.1.5.3)
‘तेषां सर्वेषु लोकेषु कामचारो भवति’ (ChanU.7.25.2, ChanU.8.1.6) इत्यादिश्रुतिभ्य इति।

It is, that because of the Scriptural passages “He attains the Self’s Lordship” (TaitU.1.6.2),
“All deities carry offerings to him” (TaitU.1.5.3),
“They move freely in all the worlds” (ChanU.7.25.2, ChanU.8.1.6),
They deserve to have unlimited powers.


4.4.17 L.5  एवं प्राप्ते, पठति – जगद्व्यापार-वर्जमिति;
This being the conclusion, the reply is — They have all the powers, barring that of the operation of running the world.

4.4.17 L.6  जगदुत्पत्त्यादि-व्यापारं वर्जयित्वा
Barring the creation etc. of the world,

4.4.17 L.7  अन्यत् अणिमाद्यात्मकमैश्वर्यं मुक्तानां भवितुमर्हति,
They deserve to possess all other powers, such as Aṇimā (the power to reduce one’s Self to the dimension of an atom) etc.,

4.4.17 L.8  जगद्व्यापारस्तु नित्य-सिद्धस्यैव ईश्वरस्य।
The operation of running this world however being the exclusive power of the eternally perfect lord.

4.4.17 L.9  कुतः? तस्य तत्र प्रकृतत्वात्;
Whence is it so? Because of the Lord being the relevant subject there

4.4.17 L.10  असन्निहितत्वाच्चेतरेषाम्;
And the others not being anywhere in proximity.

4.4.17 L.11  पर एव हि ईश्वरो जगद्व्यापारेऽधिकृतः,
It is the Highest Lord who has jurisdiction over the operation of running this world.

4.4.17 L.12  तमेव प्रकृत्य उत्पत्त्याद्युपदेशात्,
It is with reference to him that the Scriptures speak of the creation etc.,

4.4.17 L.13  नित्यशब्द-निबन्धनत्वाच्च;
And also because the word ‘eternal’ is confined to him only.

4.4.17 L.14  तदन्वेषणविजिज्ञासन-पूर्वकं तु
इतरेषाम् अणिमाद्यैश्वर्यं श्रूयते;

The Scriptures speak of the lordly power of the other Jīva-Selfs such as assuming the dimensions of an atom etc.
As a result of the antecedent search for Him (the Lord) and a desire to know him.

4.4.17 L.15  तेनासन्निहितास्ते जगद्व्यापारे।
They are not in proximity with the operation of running this world.

4.4.17 L.16  स-मनस्कत्वादेव च एतेषामनैकमत्ये,
Besides, each of them (i.e. the Jīva-Selfs) precisely because of having a separate mind of its own, when they are not all of one mind,

4.4.17 L.17  कस्यचित् स्थित्यभिप्रायः कस्यचित् संहाराभिप्राय
One of them may wish that the world should subsist, while another may desire its destruction,

4.4.17 L.18  इत्येवं विरोधोऽपि कदाचित्स्यात्;
And thus there may perhaps be a conflict (as between them).

4.4.17 L.19  अथ कस्यचित् सङ्कल्पम् अनु अन्यस्य सङ्कल्प इत्यविरोधः समर्थ्येत,
If, however, it is sought to uphold that there would be no such conflict, on the assumption that the intention of one may follow the intention of the other,

4.4.17 L.20  ततः परमेश्वराकूत-तन्त्रत्वम् एवेतरेषामिति व्यवतिष्ठते॥१७॥
Then that would just establish straight off, that all the Jīva-Selfs depend upon the will of the Highest Lord. — 17.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
प्रत्यक्षोपदेशादिति चेन्नाधिकारिकमण्डलस्थोक्तेः॥४.४.१८॥
Pratyakṣopadeśād iti cen nādhikārika-maṇḍala-sthokteḥ.

Pratyakṣa-upadeśāt: on account of direct teaching; Iti: so, thus; Cet: if; (Iti cet: if it be said); Na: not; Adhikārika-maṇḍala-stha-ukteḥ: because the scripture declares that the soul attains Him who entrusts the sun, etc., with their offices and abodes in those spheres. (Adhikārika: the master of a world, a world-ruler; Maṇḍala-stha: existing in spheres, i.e., those abiding in the spheres, of those entrusted with the special functions; Ukteḥ: as it is clearly stated in Śruti.)

🔗 If it be said (that the lordly power of the Jīva-Selfs that have attained Final Release is unlimited) because of direct Scriptural statement, (we say) — No, because the Scriptures declare (that the Jīva-Selfs attain Him who holds command over the Sun etc. and who resides in their spheres). — 4.4.18.

4.4.18 L.1  अथ यदुक्तम् – ‘आप्नोति स्वाराज्यम्’ (TaitU.1.6.2) इत्यादिप्रत्यक्षोपदेशात्
The argument (of the opponent of Vedānta) that because of the direct statement of the Scriptures, thus — “He attains unity with the Self” (TaitU.1.6.2),

4.4.18 L.2  निरवग्रहमैश्वर्यं विदुषां न्याय्यमिति, तत्परिहर्तव्यम्;
It is logical (to understand) that the lordly power of those who have attained Final Release is unlimited, has to be refuted.


4.4.18 L.3  अत्रोच्यते – नायं दोषः,
With regard to that, it is said — This is no fault.

4.4.18 L.4  आधिकारिक-मण्डलस्थोक्तेः।
Because this attainment of unity with the Self (Svā-rājya) depends upon the statement about him who holds command over the Sun etc. and who resides in those spheres.

4.4.18 L.5  आधिकारिको यः सवितृ-मण्डलादिषु विशेषायतनेष्ववस्थितः पर ईश्वरः,
तदायत्तैव इयं स्वाराज्य-प्राप्तिरुच्यते;

It is stated that the unity with the Self, attained (by the Jīva-Selfs), is dependent upon him who holds command over and resides in the particular abodes of the spheres of the Sun etc. (viz. the Highest Lord),

4.4.18 L.6  यत्कारणम् अनन्तरम् ‘आप्नोति मनसस्पतिम्’ (TaitU.1.6.2) इत्याह;
Because it is stated later on that “He attains the Lord of the mind” (TaitU.1.6.2).

4.4.18 L.7  यो हि सर्व-मनसां पतिः पूर्वसिद्ध ईश्वरः तं प्राप्नोतीत्येतदुक्तं भवति;
It means that the Jīva-Self attains the Lord of the mind i.e. the eternally existing Īśvara.

4.4.18 L.8  तदनुसारेणैव च अनन्तरम् ‘वाक्पतिश्चक्षुष्पतिः। श्रोत्रपतिर्विज्ञानपतिः’ च भवति इत्याह।
And following the same lead, it is stated later on — “He becomes the Lord of the speech, the Lord of the eye, the Lord of the ear and the Lord of the knowledge” (TaitU.1.6.2).

4.4.18 L.9  एवमन्यत्रापि यथासम्भवं नित्यसिद्धेश्वरायत्तम् एव इतरेषामैश्वर्यं योजयितव्यम्॥१८॥
Thus in this context also, it should be construed as far as possible that the lordly power of the others is dependent upon the eternal perfect Lord. — 18.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
विकारावर्ति च तथा हि स्थितिमाह॥४.४.१९॥
Vikārāvarti ca tathā hi sthitim āha.

Vikāra-avarti: which is beyond all effected things, becomes incapable of transformation by birth, decay, death, etc.; Ca: and; Tathā: so; Hi: because; Sthitim: status, condition, existence; Āha: (Śruti) declares.

🔗 There is another form of the Highest Lord which does not abide in the effect (Vikārāvarti), for the Scriptures declare his existence in that manner. — 4.4.19.

4.4.19 L.1  विकारावर्त्यपि च नित्य-मुक्तं पारमेश्वरं रूपम्,
There is also a form of the Highest Lord which is eternally free and which does not abide in the effect,

4.4.19 L.2  न केवलं विकारमात्र-गोचरं सवितृ-मण्डलाद्यधिष्ठानम्;
And it is not that it has only that one form which is perceptible in the effect and which resides in the sphere of the Sun etc.

4.4.19 L.3  तथा हि अस्य द्विरूपां स्थितिमाह आम्नायः –
Thus is its existence in two forms spoken by the Scriptures in the passage —

4.4.19 L.4  ‘तावानस्य महिमा ततो ज्यायाꣳश्च पूरुषः। पादोऽस्य सर्वा भूतानि त्रिपादस्यामृतं दिवि’ (ChanU.3.12.6) इत्येवमादिः।
“Such is his greatness, and the Puruṣa is even greater than that. All beings collectively form but one foot (i.e. part) of Him, and the other three feet mean that which is immortal in the heaven” (ChanU.3.12.6) etc.

4.4.19 L.5  न च तत् निर्विकारं रूपम् इतरालम्बनाः प्राप्नुवन्तीति शक्यं वक्तुम्
It is not possible to say, that those who depend upon his other forms, attain that form of his which does not undergo any modification,

4.4.19 L.6  अतत्क्रतुत्वात् तेषाम्।
Because they have not entertained any desire about it.

4.4.19 L.7  अतश्च यथैव द्विरूपे परमेश्वरे निर्गुणं रूपम् अनवाप्य
Hence it should be understood (iti draṣṭavyam) that even when there are these two forms of the Highest Lord, (the Jīva-Selfs) not having attained the unqualified form,

4.4.19 L.8  सगुण एवावतिष्ठन्ते,
They abide only in the qualified form

4.4.19 L.9  एवं सगुणेऽपि निरवग्रहमैश्वर्यमनवाप्य
And similarly not having attained unlimited powers in the qualified form,

4.4.19 L.10  सावग्रह एवावतिष्ठन्त इति द्रष्टव्यम्॥१९॥
They possess the limited powers only. — 19.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
दर्शयतश्चैवं प्रत्यक्षानुमाने॥४.४.२०॥
Darśayataś caivaṃ pratyakṣānumāne.

Darśayataḥ: they both show; Ca: and; Evam: thus; Pratyakṣa-anumāne: direct perception (‘before the eyes’, directly revealed, Śruti) and inference (‘following thinking’, Smṛti).

🔗 That this is so is also indicated by direct perception and inference (i.e.Śruti and Smṛti). — 4.4.20.

4.4.20 L.1  दर्शयतश्च विकारावर्तित्वं परस्य ज्योतिषः श्रुति-स्मृती –
The Scriptures and the Smṛti also indicate, that the Highest Light (Jyotis) does not abide in its modification, thus —

4.4.20 L.2  ‘न तत्र सूर्यो भाति न चन्द्रतारकं नेमा विद्युतो भान्ति कुतोऽयमग्निः’ (MunU.2.2.10, SvetU.6.14, KathU.2.2.15) इति,
“The Sun is unable to shine there, nor the Moon, nor the Stars nor also the Lightning, whence then can this Agni (shine there)?” (KathU.2.2.15, SvetU.6.14, MunU.2.2.10)

4.4.20 L.3  ‘न तद्भासयते सूर्यो न शशाङ्को न पावकः’ (BhG.15.6) इति च।
And “The Sun does not illumine it, nor the Moon, nor the fire” (BhG.15.6).

4.4.20 L.4  तदेवं विकारावर्तित्वं परस्य ज्योतिषः प्रसिद्धमित्यभिप्रायः॥२०॥
In this way, the Sūtra-kāra means, that it is well-known that the Highest Jyotis (Light, i.e. the Highest Lord, Brahman) does not abide in its modification. — 20.

[Go top]

←PrevNext→
भोगमात्रसाम्यलिङ्गाच्च॥४.४.२१॥
Bhoga-mātra-sāmya-liṅgāc ca.

Bhoga-mātra: with respect to enjoyment only; Sāmya: equality; Liṅgāt: from the indication of Śruti; Ca: also, and.

🔗 Because of the indicatory mark (in the Scriptures) about equality only about experience (Bhoga) (between Jīva-Selfs that have attained Final Release, and the Highest Lord), and also because (it is understood that the former do not possess unlimited powers). — 4.4.21.

4.4.21 L.1  इतश्च न निरङ्कुशं विकारालम्बनानामैश्वर्यम्,
This is again why those who depend upon Brahma-the-effect (Kārya-Brahman) only, do not possess unlimited powers,

4.4.21 L.2  यस्मात् भोगमात्रमेव एषाम् अनादि-सिद्धेनेश्वरेण समानमिति श्रूयते –
Inasmuch as it is stated in the Scriptures, that it is only this experience (Bhoga), that they have in common with the Eternal Lord,

4.4.21 L.3  ‘तमाहापो वै खलु मीयन्ते लोकोऽसौ’ इति
‘स यथैतां देवताꣳ सर्वाणि भूतान्यवन्त्येवꣳ हैवंविदꣳ सर्वाणि भूतान्यवन्ति’ ‘तेनो एतस्यै देवतायै सायुज्यꣳ सलोकतां जयति’ (BrhU.1.5.23)
इत्यादिभेदव्यपदेश-लिङ्गेभ्यः॥२१॥

Because of the indicatory marks thus —
“(Hiraṇya-garbha said to the meditator), the (Primeval) Waters verily indeed are my worlds and yours also” (KausU. 1.7),
“All beings honour that deity. So do all beings honour him, who knows that. He obtains through it, equality in body (Sāyujya) and sameness of abode (Sālokya) with the deity” (BrhU.1.5.23). — 21.

[Go top]

4.4.22 L.1  ननु एवं सति सातिशयत्वाद् अन्तवत्त्वम् ऐश्वर्यस्य स्यात्;
But (says the opponent of Vedānta) if it be so, then because of the lordly powers being either more or less, they are such, as are prone to come to an end

4.4.22 L.2  ततश्च एषामावृत्तिः प्रसज्येत –
And the Jīva-Selfs will be liable to revert (to the transmigratory existence).


4.4.22 L.3  इत्यतः उत्तरं भगवान्बादरायण आचार्यः पठति –
To this, Bhagavān Bādarāyaṇa replies:

←Prev
अनावृत्तिः शब्दादनावृत्तिः शब्दात्॥४.४.२२॥
Anāvṛttiḥ śabdād anāvṛttiḥ śabdāt.

An-āvṛttiḥ: no return; Śabdāt: on account of the scriptural statement.

🔗 On the authority of the Scriptures, there is no more return, there is no more return (to transmigrational existence). — 4.4.22.

4.4.22 L.4  नाडी-रश्मि-समन्वितेन अर्चिरादि-पर्वणा देव-यानेन पथा ये ब्रह्मलोकं शास्त्रोक्त-विशेषणं गच्छन्ति –
Those who go by the path of the Gods, which is connected with the Nāḍī and the ray (of the Sun) and have Arci etc. as its stages, towards the world of Brahman having special characteristics as stated by the Śāstra, thus —

4.4.22 L.5  यस्मिन्नरश्च ह वै ण्यश्चार्णवौ ब्रह्म-लोके तृतीयस्यामितो दिवि,
“That world of Brahman which is the third in the order of the heavens from here, and in which there are two seas (of nectar) by name Ara and Ṇya,

4.4.22 L.6  यस्मिन्नैरं मदीयं सरः, यस्मिन्नश्वत्थः सोम-सवनः, यस्मिन्नपराजिता पूर्ब्रह्मणः, यस्मिंश्च प्रभु-विमितं हिरण्मयं वेश्म,
A lake which consists of food which is intoxicating, an Aśvattha tree oozing Soma, a city of the Gods called Aparā-jitā in which there is a golden palace built by the Lord

4.4.22 L.7  यश्चानेकधा मन्त्रार्थवादादि-प्रदेशेषु प्रपञ्च्यते –
And which is often described at length in the Mantras and Artha-Vādas etc.,

4.4.22 L.8  ते तं प्राप्य न चन्द्र-लोकादिव भुक्तभोगा आवर्तन्ते।
Arrive there, but do not return from there, as some do from the world of the Moon after completing their experience (Bhukta-bhogāḥ)”.

4.4.22 L.9  कुतः? ‘तयोर्ध्वमायन्नमृतत्वमेति’ (ChanU.8.6.6, KathU.2.3.16)
Whence is it so? Because of the Scriptural statements — “Proceeding upwards they attain immortality” (ChanU.8.6.6, KathU.2.3.16),

4.4.22 L.10  ‘तेषां न पुनरावृत्तिः’ (BrhU.6.2.15)
“In their case there is no return” (BrhU.6.2.15),

4.4.22 L.11  ‘एतेन प्रतिपद्यमाना इमं मानवमावर्तं नावर्तन्ते’ (ChanU.4.15.5)
“Those who arrive by the path do not again return to this transitory worldly whirlpool” (ChanU.4.15.5),

4.4.22 L.12  ‘ब्रह्मलोकमभिसम्पद्यते’ (ChanU.8.15.1) ‘न च पुनरावर्तते’ इत्यादिशब्देभ्यः।
“He attains the world of Brahman, and does not return” (ChanU.8.15.1) etc.

4.4.22 L.13  अन्तवत्त्वेऽपि तु ऐश्वर्यस्य यथा अनावृत्तिः
Even though their powers are liable to come to an end, as to how they never return

4.4.22 L.14  तथा वर्णितम् – ‘कार्यात्यये तदध्यक्षेण सहातः परम्’ (BrS.4.3.10) इत्यत्र;
Has been indicated in “When there is a dissolution of the worlds of Brahma-the-effect, (the Selfs) along with the presiding deity, attain the Highest Brahman” (BrS.4.3.10).

4.4.22 L.15  सम्यग्दर्शन-विध्वस्ततमसां तु नित्यसिद्धनिर्वाण-परायणानां
That, in the case of those whose darkness of ignorance has been dispelled by perfect knowledge, and who have resorted to the eternal Nirvāṇa,

4.4.22 L.16  सिद्धैव अनावृत्तिः;
There is no return, has been established.

4.4.22 L.17  तदाश्रयणेनैव हि सगुण-शरणानाम् अपि
अनावृत्ति-सिद्धिरिति।

Hence it goes without saying that those also who resort to qualified Brahman and have their resort in that Nirvāṇa
[and either have knowledge yet also have some Karma for this Nirvāṇa, or subsequently gained knowledge in Nirvāṇa directly from Brahmā - ED],
Do not return
[or having not gained that knowledge do not return in this cycle of creation, but return in the next with their good Saṃskāras in tow - ED].

4.4.22 L.18  अनावृत्तिः शब्दादनावृत्तिः शब्दात् – इति सूत्राभ्यासः शास्त्र-परिसमाप्तिं द्योतयति॥२२॥
The repetition of the words ‘do not return’ indicates the end of the Śāstra. — 22.

– 191. Jagad-vyāpāra-Adhikaraṇam. End of Pāda 4.4


Chap. 1
Samanvaya
Chap. 2
Avirodha
Chap. 3
Sādhana
Chap. 4 WIP
Phala

Go to Top ('Home' key on many Windows browsers)


Abbreviation References
AitU.Aitareyopaniṣad
Ait. Ār.Aitareya Āraṇyakaऐ. आ.
Ait. Brā.Aitareya Brāhmaṇaऐ. ब्रा.
BhG.Bhagavadgītā
BrS.Brahma-Sūtras
Bra. Sū. Bhā.Brahma-Sūtra-Bhāṣya
BrhU.Brihad-āraṇyakopaniṣad
ChanU.Chandogyopaniṣad
Dhar. Sū.Dharma-Sūtraध. सू.
IsU.Īṣavāsyopaniṣad
Jāb. Up.Jābālopaniṣadजा. उ.
Jai. Sū. or
Pū. Mī.
Jaimani Sūtra or
Pūrva-Mīmāṃsā
जै. सू.
KathU.Kaṭhopaniṣad
KenU.Kenopanishad
KaivU.Kaivalyopaniṣad
KausU.Kauṣītakyopanishadकौ. उ.
Kauṣ. Brā.Kauṣītaki Brāhmaṇaकौ. ब्रा.
Mahā-Bhā.Mahā-bhārataम. भा.
ManKa.Māndukya-Kārikā or
Gaudapāda-Kārikā
Manu. or
Manu. Smṛ.
Manu-Smṛti or -Saṃhitāमनु. स्मृ.
Mukti. Up.Muktikopaniṣad
MunU.Muṇḍakopaniṣad
Nār. Up.Nārāyaniyopaniṣadना. उ.
Nyāya Sū.Nyāya-Sūtraन्या. सू.
PrasU.Praṣnopaniṣad
Ṛg. Sam.Ṛg-Veda Saṃhitāऋ. सं.
Śābara Bhā.Śābara Bhāṣya
of Jaimani Sūtras
शा. भा.
Śat. Brā.Śata-patha-Brāhmaṇaश. ब्रा.
SvetU.Śvetāśvatāropaniṣad
Ṣaḍ-viṃśa Brā.Ṣaḍviṃśa Brāhmaṇa षड्विंश. ब्रा.
Sarvānu.Sarvānukramaṇī
TaitU.Taittirīyopaniṣad
Tait. Ār.Taittirīya-Āraṇyakaतै. आ.
Tait. Brā.Taittirīya-Brāhmaṇaतै. ब्रा.
Tait. Sam.Taittirīya-Saṃhitāतै. सं.
Tāṇ. Brā.Tāṇḍya-Brāhmaṇaताण्ड्य. ब्रा.
Vaiś. Sū.Vaiśeṣika-Sūtraवै. सू.
Yaj. Sam.Yajur-Veda Saṃhitāयज्. सं.
YS.Yoga-Sūtra

॥इति ब्रह्मसूत्र-शानङ्कर-भाष्यम् Translation॥